UPDATE NOTIFICATION

F8767 0387

Document No.: B006-6488-C000

Document Title: NCR Personas M-Series Automated Teller Machines
Field Service Manual
Change No.: 85
Print Date: AUGUST 2005

REASON FOR UPDATE:

This update includes:
* Chapter 26.6 is now named SVGA Sunlight Readable Colour Displays.
* Chapter 26.10 Cable Information - changes to structure plus new devices.
* Updates to chapter 26.13 GBRU/GBNA foreign object detection, FRU replacement pro-
cedure changes plus the outpus for the Status Test (page 23).
* New chapter added for Check Processor Type 4 - 26.14.
* New chapter added for Coin Dispenser - 26.16.
* New chapter added for Graphical Operator Interface - 26.18

UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS:
Replace the manual B006-6488-B000 with this version (B006-6488-C000).
 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.

CANADIAN CLASS A DEVICE DECLARATION

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio
Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.

Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits

radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils
numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Réglement sur le
brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministrère des
Communications du Canada.
Information to User

This equipment must be installed and used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. However, there is no guarantee that interference
to radio communications will not occur in a particular commercial
installation. If this equipment does cause interference, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
consult an NCR service representative immediately.

CAUTION

NCR is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by

unauthorised modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment
of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by NCR. Such
unauthorized modifications, substitutions, or attachments may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. The correction of interference caused by
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
i
such unauthorized modifications, substitutions, or attachments will be the
responsibility of the user.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
ii
 CONTENTS

CONTENTS

NCR Personas M-Series

Automated Teller Machines
Field Service Manual
CONTENTS

Chapter 26.1 - Introduction

Chapter 26.2 - Uninterruptible Power Supply

Chapter 26.3 - Standard ATM Power Supply Unit

Chapter 26.4 - Rear and Front Access Bill Alignment

Dispensers

Chapter 26.5 - Envelope Depository and Envelope Dispenser

Chapter 26.6 - SVGA Sunlight Readable Colour Display Module

Chapter 26.7 - Standard Brightness Colour Displays

Chapter 26.8 - NCR Personas M Series ATMs AC Distribution

Chapter 26.9 - 12.1 Inch and 15 Inch Touchscreens

Chapter 26.10 - Cable Information

Chapter 26.11 - Deposit ATM Power Supply Unit

Chapter 26.12 - Moving Key Keyboards

Chapter 26.13 - Cash Acceptor and Recycler

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 iii
CONTENTS

Chapter 26.14 - iTRAN 1000 ATM Check Processor (Type 4)

Chapter: 26.15 - Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes

Chapter 26.16 - Coin Dispenser

Chapter 26.17 - Reserved

Chapter 26.18 - Graphical Operator Panel

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
iv AUGUST 2005
 INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Introduction

Chapter 26.1

PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL......................................................... 26.1-1

NCR 6674 AND 6676 ATMs ........................................................... 26.1-2
SUB-SECTIONS .............................................................................. 26.1-3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.1-i
INTRODUCTION

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.1-ii AUGUST 2005
 INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.1

Introduction

PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual is issued for the use of NCR Customer Engineers who maintain
the Personas M Series of Automated Teller Machines. It gives service details
of the devices that are unique to the NCR 6674 and 6676 ATMs.
This manual is issued in the same format as the CE’s SAMM manual
(BFM-0547-A000) to enable it to be added as Section 26 of that publication
but it has been given an individual publication number so that its circulation
can be controlled.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.1-1
INTRODUCTION

NCR 6674 AND 6676 ATMs

6674

6676

The NCR 6674 and 6676 ATMs form an Interior range of ATMs that extends
the functionality provided by the NCR 58XX ATMs. Both ATMs are available
in front or rear access freestanding variants and also as a rear access vestibule

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.1-2 AUGUST 2005
 INTRODUCTION

variant, for use through an interior wall.

They offer the following services:
Dispensing media
Depositing notes
Account transactions
Account enquiries
Screen advertising and marketing
Public and private audio
Envelope deposits
Envelope dispensing
Mini-statement printing (sideways receipt)
Passbook updating (page turning passbook printer)
Statements (80 column letter quality printing with graphics)
Receipts and couponing (graphics and text printing)
Journal printing
Cheque processing
Coin dispensing.

SUB-SECTIONS
Refer to BFM0-0547-A000 for details of devices NOT found listed below (for
example, card readers, printers, and so on).
The sub-sections of this book are intended to supplement BFMO-0547-
A000 as follows:
Chapter 26.2 - Uninterruptible Power Supply - this optional module pro-
vides stabilized power to the ATM and permits an orderly termination of
a transaction in the event of a mains power failure
Chapter 26.3 - Standard ATM Power Supply Unit - provides dc power to
the majority of ATM modules
Chapter 26.4 - Rear and Front Access Bill Alignment Dispensers - rear
and front access media dispensers
Chapter 26.5 - Envelope Depository and Envelope Dispenser - combined
depository and optional envelope dispenser
Chapter 26.6 - SVGA Sunlight Readable Colour Display Module - 12.1-
inch LCD colour display
Chapter 26.7 - Standard Brightness Colour Displays - 12.1-inch and 15-
inch LCD displays
Chapter 26.8 - AC Distribution - describes the distribution of ac power
within the ATMs
Chapter 26.9 - 12.1-inch and 15-inch Touchscreens - calibration informa-
tion for the touchscreens
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.1-3
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 26.10 - Cable Information - harnessing, tables of cable routing

and diagrams of connector pinouts
Chapter 26.11 - Deposit ATM Power Supply Unit - provides additional dc
power for the deposit function
Chapter 26.12 - Moving Key Keyboards - describes cardholder tactile
keyboards including FDKs
Chapter 26.13 - Cash Acceptor and Recycler - describes the GBNA and
GBRU devices that offer deposit and dispense functions in the Personas
M-series ATMs
Chapter 26.14 - iTRAN 1000 Check Processor (Type 4) - describes the
optional device that provides cheque processing functionality
Chapter 26.15 - Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes - describes adjust-
ments and currency loading of cassettes
Chapter 26.16 - Coin Dispenser - describes the device, canister and con-
figuration settings.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.1-4 AUGUST 2005
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

CONTENTS

Uninterruptible Power Supply

Chapter 26.2

DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 26.2-1
SPECIFICATION............................................................................. 26.2-1
Definitions...................................................................................... 26.2-2

STRAPPING ....................................................................................... 26.2-2

CONFIGURING THE UPS ................................................................ 26.2-2

OPERATION ...................................................................................... 26.2-4

NORMAL OPERATION ................................................................. 26.2-4
SHORT TERM OUTAGE OR VOLTAGE VARIATION .............. 26.2-4
LONG TERM OUTAGE OR VOLTAGE VARIATION ................ 26.2-4
RESTART AFTER CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN ....................... 26.2-5
UPS SELF TEST .............................................................................. 26.2-5

INDICATORS .................................................................................... 26.2-6

INDICATIONS DURING OPERATION ........................................ 26.2-7
Start-Up .......................................................................................... 26.2-7
Boost or Buck Mode ...................................................................... 26.2-7
Operation on Battery Power ........................................................... 26.2-8

TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................... 26.2-8
LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................... 26.2-9
Test ................................................................................................. 26.2-9
Report ............................................................................................. 26.2-9
LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................... 26.2-9
S_DATA......................................................................................... 26.2-9
Tallies ............................................................................................. 26.2-9
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-i
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

MODULE REPLACEMENT............................................................26.2-10
UPS MODULE ...............................................................................26.2-11
BATTERY CARE AND REPLACEMENT...................................26.2-12
Storing the UPS Batteries .............................................................26.2-12
Replacing Batteries.......................................................................26.2-12
Testing New Batteries...................................................................26.2-15
Recycling Used Batteries..............................................................26.2-15

HISTORY..........................................................................................26.2-16
UNIVERSAL (UPS) (230 V) 1500 VA RACK MOUNT WITH USB HID
INTERFACE...................................................................................26.2-16
UNIVERSAL (UPS) (120 V) 1500 VA RACK MOUNT WITH USB HID
INTERFACE...................................................................................26.2-16
REPLACEMENT BATTERY FOR UNIVERSAL (UPS) 1500 VA
RACK MOUNT ..............................................................................26.2-16

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-ii
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.2

Uninterruptible Power Supply

DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) unit used in
the NCR 6674 and 6676 ATMs.
The UPS monitors the mains supply and provides a stabilised supply to
the ATM. If the mains supply fails, the UPS will supply the ATM from its inte-
gral battery-backed power supply. This supply duration is limited and is
intended to provide for orderly termination of any active transactions before
the ATM shuts down.

SPECIFICATION
Model: UPS 230 V 009-0019482:
Nominal Voltage: 220 V, 230 V, 240 V, Configurable
Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto-sensing.
Power Level: 1500VA, 1000W
Regulation (Battery Mode): -10% to +7% of nominal
Buck/Boost: maintain output within 198-256 V
Battery Configuration: Internal batteries provided as one assembled
part.
Model: UPS 120 V 009-0019483:
Nominal Voltage: 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, Configurable
Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto-sensing.
Power Level: 1500VA, 1000W
Regulation (Battery Mode): -10% to +7% of nominal
Boost/Buck: maintain output within 90-136 V
Battery Configuration: Internal batteries provided as one assembled
part.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-1
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

Definitions

Line Boost Capability - Line Boost Capability is the minimum voltage

deviation below nominal that must be handled via boosting without going on
battery, while maintaining the output voltage within the required output volt-
age range.

Line Buck Capability - Line Buck Capability is the minimum voltage devi-
ation above nominal that must be handled via bucking without going on bat-
tery, while maintaining the output voltage within the required output voltage
range.

Boost / Buck Mode - A shift to boost or buck mode occurs during voltage
variations in the ac input power. The boost and buck functions maintain the
output voltage supplied by the UPS within close tolerances around the rated
value even if significant voltage variations occur in the ac input power. This
avoids calling on battery power.
The values defining the voltage range are preset and vary depending upon
the nominal voltage selected.

STRAPPING
There is no hardware strapping associated with the UPS. Refer to the next
section, “Configuring the UPS” for information on adjustable parameters.

CONFIGURING THE UPS

The Self Service Configuration Menu for the UPS enables adjustment of
following UPS parameters:
Mode
Voltages
Shutdown Delay
Startup Delay
Nominal Voltage
Battery Low Threshold
Outage Mask time
Battery Test Day
Battery Test Hour
A description of each parameter, together with the permitted range of

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-2
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

inputs and the default settings, is shown in the table below.

Parameter
Description Range Default Value
Name
Mode This string identifies the mode (Control or 000 or 001 “000” - Control
Data) of the UPS and the device type. “001” - Data
Voltages Identifies the level of the control voltages 000 - 111 111
for serial control lines, in order, CTS
(Power Fail), DCD (Battery Low), DTR
(Shutdown).
“0” means negative voltage
“1” means positive voltage
Note: “Voltages” has no effect for USB
UPS.
Shutdown This specifies the delay time in seconds of 0 - 999 120 seconds
Delay the interval between the issue of a shut-
down command and the shutdown of the
UPS.
Startup If mains has returned during shutdown the 0 - 999 15 seconds
Delay Startup Delay is introduced after the Shut-
down Delay. If mains is not present during
the Shutdown Delay then the UPS will
restart as soon as mains returns.
Nominal Nominal Input/Output voltage of the prod- 100, 120, 120 V
Voltage uct. 127, 220,
230, 240
Battery This is the capacity remaining threshold 0 - 1000 950
Low that indicates a low battery condition. If the (95%)
Threshold reported charge remaining is less than or
(BL) equal to this value then the Battery Low
indicator is True. The parameter is given in
1/10 percent units.
Outage This is the duration that the mains outage 0 - 99 15 seconds
Mask Time must exceed before the supply out indica-
tor is set true.
Battery This specifies the day on which the weekly 0 - 6 2
Test Day battery test should be performed. (Monday)
Battery This specifies the hour at which the weekly 00 - 23 04
Test Hour battery test should be performed. (4am)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-3
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

OPERATION

NORMAL OPERATION
Under normal operation, the UPS will supply standard mains power to the
terminal. Supply voltage deviations within the line boost and line buck
capability will result in the UPS boosting (stepping up) or bucking (stepping
down) the voltage via its internal transformer. This ensures that the voltage
supply to the rest of the product remains within the acceptable ranges of 198 -
256 V for 230 V units or 90 - 136 V for 120 V units. If necessary, the UPS
internal batteries will be charging to maintain 100% charge.

SHORT TERM OUTAGE OR VOLTAGE VARIATION

In the event of a short term outage or input voltage variation (lasting less than
the configured Outage Mask Time), the UPS will automatically switch to
supplying the terminal from its integral batteries. On restoration of the normal
mains supply the UPS will automatically switch back to supplying a stabilised
supply to the terminal from mains power. The internal batteries will be
charged to maintain 100% capacity when mains is present.

LONG TERM OUTAGE OR VOLTAGE VARIATION

In the event of an outage or input voltage variation (outside the line boost and
buck capability) lasting longer than the Outage Mask Time, the UPS will
automatically switch to supplying the terminal from its integral batteries. At
this point, under the control of the application program, the terminal will take
one of the following actions:
Immediately initiate a shutdown
Go into standby mode until mains returns or until the battery capacity
falls below the Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a
shutdown
Continue offering transactions until mains returns or until the battery
capacity falls below the Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will ini-
tiate a shutdown.
The shutdown is controlled, terminating any active transactions and leav-
ing the terminal in a safe and secure state. A control message is sent to the
UPS to disengage.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-4
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

RESTART AFTER CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN

On restoration of the mains supply and restart of the terminal, the
customer application may either bring the terminal immediately
back into service or wait until the battery capacity is above the
Battery Low Threshold before doing so.
A Low Battery condition will be displayed until the calculated
battery capacity is equal to the Battery Low Threshold

UPS SELF TEST

The UPS will carry out a self test on demand by selecting DEVICE SELF
TEST from the System Application Menu and UPS from the Device Self Test
Menu.
If the battery is fully charged this test will verify battery health and that it
is correctly connected. If the battery capacity is less than 100% then the test
will only verify the connection.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-5
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

INDICATORS
The illustration and table below explain the functions of the indicators on the
UPS front panel:

4
9

8 5 3 2 1

Item Description Specification Comments

1 On/Off button To start/stop the UPS Illuminated and locking but-
Off-------------------------------------- ton
Solid green--------------------------- System off
On utility power
2 On battery LED Off-------------------------------------- Normal mode
Solid green--------------------------- Battery mode
3 Fault LED Solid red------------------------------ Mains failure
Flashing red ------------------------ Battery failure
4 Overload LED Off-------------------------------------- Normal load
Solid yellow ------------------------- Overload
5 Buck/Boost Off-------------------------------------- Normal mode
LED Solid yellow ------------------------- Buck or Boost mode
6 Power share Off-------------------------------------- Plug #1 not powered
plug #1 LED Solid green--------------------------- Plug #1 powered
7 Power share Off-------------------------------------- Plug #2 not powered
plug #2 LED Solid green--------------------------- Plug #2 powered
8 Battery level 4 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the dis-
LED bar graph 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit) play
51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)
9 Load level 4 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the dis-
LED bar graph 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit) play
51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-6
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

INDICATIONS DURING OPERATION

This section describes the indications of the following UPS phases of
operation:
Start-Up
Shift to Booster or Fader Mode
Operation on Battery Power.
The numbers in the text refer to the front panel diagram.

Start-Up
Start-up commences when the ON/OFF (1) button is pressed:
The buzzer beeps and all the LEDs come on.
The buzzer beeps two times during the self test, then button (1) remains
ON, indicating that the outlets are supplied with power.
Either:
AC power is present, LED (2) is not ON, and the protected equip-
ment is supplied by the ac power source.
or:
AC power is absent, LED (2) is ON, and the protected equipment is
supplied by the UPS operating on battery power.
All the connected equipment is supplied with power.

If button (1) is not ON, or if LED (3) is ON, there is a fault (see
“Troubleshooting”).

NOTE: The battery is charged as soon as the UPS is connected to the ac

power source, even if button (1) is in the OFF position.

Boost or Buck Mode

Operation in boost or buck mode is indicated by LED (5) being on, showing
that there is a significant voltage variation in the ac input power.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-7
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

Operation on Battery Power

Operation on battery power takes place when ac input power has failed or is
outside the Boost/Buck range.

Transfer to Battery Power - While operating on battery power:

LED (2) is illuminated
the equipment connected to the UPS is supplied by the battery.

Threshold for the Low Battery Warning - The low battery warning
threshold (Battery Low Threshold) is set via the self service configuration
menu and shows that there is very little remaining battery backup time. The
indications that the threshold has been reached are:
the ATM applications will close because UPS automatic shutdown is
imminent.

When the battery reaches the end of its backup time:

the UPS shuts down and all the LEDs go OFF
equipment connected to the UPS is no longer supplied with power.

TROUBLESHOOTING
The LED numbers in the following table appear on the diagram in the
“Indicators” section.

Indication Meaning Action

LED (4) flashes and the UPS overload. The power If LED (4) goes on perma-
buzzer beeps once. drawn by the connected nently, check the power
equipment exceeds UPS drawn by the attached
capacity. equipment and replace the
faulty device.
LED (3) flashes. A battery fault was detected Replace the battery module
during the automatic bat-
tery test.
LED (3) goes ON and the UPS internal diagnostics Replace the UPS.
buzzer sounds continuously. have detected an internal
fault. The connected equip-
ment is no longer supplied.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-8
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS
Level 1 diagnostics tests available on the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
Test
Report

Test
Selection of TEST from the UPS diagnostic test menu tests the UPS and
reports its status.

Report
The REPORT test returns the present status of the UPS

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS

S_DATA
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:

S_Data Meaning
00 Good (Operation successful)
01 Routine (Command not supported, RS232 turnaround failure)
02 Warning (Battery low)
04 Fatal (Device failure, Battery failure, Command failure, Comms error,
Device inoperative)

Tallies
The tallies recorded for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:

Tally Mnemonic
OUTAGES Number of times the UPS reported a power outage.
MSKD OUT Number of times that a power outage exceeded the time specified by the
outage mask time.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-9
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

MODULE REPLACEMENT

WARNING

Before removing the UPS isolate the UPS from the mains
input supply by switching it off at its ON/OFF button and
removing the connector shown in the following illustration.

Even with the input power connector removed the UPS out-
let will be live when the UPS is switched on.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-10
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

UPS MODULE
Remove the UPS module as follows:
1. Remove the four screws securing the UPS retaining brackets and remove
the brackets

Retaining Brackets

2. Slide the UPS module forward and support it while you remove the
power in, power out and USB connectors from the rear of the module.
3. Remove the module from the ATM.

WARNING

The UPS module is heavy. Be sure that you have a clear

path to where you intend to set it down.

Replacement of the UPS module is the reverse of the above procedure.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-11
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

BATTERY CARE AND REPLACEMENT

Storing the UPS Batteries

If UPS batteries are stored for a long period, recharge them every 6 months by
plugging the UPS into a power outlet. The batteries charge to 90% in
approximately 3 hours. However, it is recommended that the batteries charge
for 6 to 24 hours after long time storage.

Replacing Batteries
The hot swappable battery feature allows the UPS batteries to be replaced
without turning off the UPS, or disconnecting the load.
If it is preferable to remove input power to change the batteries, press the
ON/OFF button to switch off the UPS and unplug the UPS from the power
outlet shown in the previous section.

WARNING

Batteries can present a risk of electrical shock or burn from

high short circuit current. The following precautions should
be observed:

1. Remove watches, rings or other metal objects

2. Use tools with insulated handles.

3. Do not lay tools or metal parts on top of batteries.

4. Do not attempt to alter any battery wiring or connectors

as this can cause injury.

5. Replace batteries with the same number and type as orig-

inally installed in the UPS

6. Do not disconnect the batteries while the UPS is in bat-

tery mode.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-12
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

Remove the battery as follows:

1. Remove the left-hand UPS retaining bracket.
2. Unclip the small cover plate from the front left-hand end of the UPS.

Small Cover Plate

Left Hand
Bracket

3. Remove the two uncovered screws.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-13
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

4. Remove the left-hand side of the front panel by sliding it slightly to the
right and then pulling it forward.

5. Disconnect the battery module by separating the two parts of the connec-
tor. Do not pull on the cables.

6. Unhook the tangs of the metal cover plate by sliding it to the right and
then lift it off over the battery connector.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-14
 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

7. Hold the UPS part of the connector aside and pull out the battery by the
plastic tag. Do not pull the battery by its connector.

Replacement of the battery is the reverse of the above procedure. Take

care to hold the UPS connector aside so the it is not broken or the wires cut
when sliding the new battery into place.

Testing New Batteries

Run the Device Self Test from the System application menu and UPS from the
Device Self-Test menu.

Recycling Used Batteries

Contact your local recycling or hazardous waste centre for information on
proper disposal of the used batteries.

WARNING

Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. Batteries may

explode. Proper disposal of batteries is required. Refer to
your local codes for disposal requirements.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-15
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

HISTORY

UNIVERSAL (UPS) (230 V) 1500 VA RACK MOUNT WITH USB

HID INTERFACE

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
009-0019482

UNIVERSAL (UPS) (120 V) 1500 VA RACK MOUNT WITH USB

HID INTERFACE

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
009-0019483

REPLACEMENT BATTERY FOR UNIVERSAL (UPS) 1500 VA

RACK MOUNT

Old Part New Part Change Interchangea

Comments
Number Number Number bility
009-0019702

NOTE: The replacement battery services both models of UPS.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.2-16
 STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CONTENTS

Standard ATM Power Supply Unit

Chapter 26.3

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................. 26.3-1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................... 26.3-2

THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................................ 26.3-2
MOUNTING METHOD .................................................................. 26.3-2
PSU Replacement........................................................................... 26.3-3
INPUT SPECIFICATION ................................................................ 26.3-5
Voltage ........................................................................................... 26.3-5
Input Current .................................................................................. 26.3-5
Inrush Current ................................................................................ 26.3-5
DC OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 26.3-6
DC Output Voltage......................................................................... 26.3-6
Voltage Dropout............................................................................. 26.3-7
Output Isolation.............................................................................. 26.3-7
OVERLOAD PROTECTION .......................................................... 26.3-7
RESTART AFTER SHUTDOWN ................................................... 26.3-7
POWER SUPPLY GOOD SIGNAL.............................................. 26.3-8

PSU CONNECTORS.......................................................................... 26.3-9

AC CONNECTION.......................................................................... 26.3-9
PSU AC Input Connector............................................................... 26.3-9
Input Fuse....................................................................................... 26.3-9
DC OUTPUT CONNECTORS ........................................................ 26.3-9
DC Distribution Connectors J2 to J6............................................ 26.3-10
Auxiliary Connector J7 ................................................................ 26.3-10
Test Connector ............................................................................. 26.3-11

STRAPPING ..................................................................................... 26.3-11

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.3-i
STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

ADJUSTMENTS...............................................................................26.3-11

TEST TOOLS....................................................................................26.3-11

HISTORY..........................................................................................26.3-12
SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY - 355W.................................26.3-12

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.3-ii JANUARY 2005
 STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.3

Standard ATM Power Supply Unit

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the ac to dc switch mode power supply unit (PSU) that
is the terminal power supply for the NCR 6674 and 6676 ATMs. The power
supply is specified at 355W with static dc load and has three supply rails,
nominally +5.15 V, +12 V, and +24 V, with an additional low power +5 V rail.
Features of the PSU include:
UL and CSA Recognition/Certification
Operation at supply ranges 90 Vac - 136 Vac and 198 Vac - 264 Vac with-
out manual configuration
Power good signal for providing diagnostics
Shutdown control input to switch off all outputs (except +5 V aux.)
Protection circuit to prevent damage to the PSU from overvoltage or short
circuit conditions

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.3-1
STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

The independent +5 V auxiliary rail gives the PSU the ability to continue
to power an external controlling device, such as a universal Miscellane-
ous Interface, to allow power reset of all other modules within the ATM
Internal cooling fan.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

THEORY OF OPERATION
The following block diagram illustrates the various functions and connections
within the power supply unit.

J2,J3,J4,J5,J6
+5.15V
J1 Regulation DC Distribution
L Fuse & Connectors
+12V
N Filter AC DC
E
Regulation

+24V
AC DC Regulation J7
Shutdown
PSU Control
Shutdown Monitor Remote LED
& Indicator
Control

+5V Power Good

Auxiliary +5V
AC DC Auxiliary
Regulation

MOUNTING METHOD
The power supply is situated within a compartment next to the PC Core. The
wall of the compartment alongside the PC Core is formed of two parts, a fixed
rear panel and a removable front panel. Lugs at the rear of the PSU fit into
slots in the fixed panel and a bracket at the front of the PSU hooks over a
threaded stud in the removable panel and is secured by a single nut.
The arrangement of studs and slots permits the PSU, when it is fitted
alone, to be secured in a low position resting on the top box shelf, and, when it
is accompanied by the deposit PSU, to be placed in a high position above the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.3-2 JANUARY 2005
 STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

other PSU.

Removable Panel
Securing Nut

PSU Securing Nut

(Low Position)

PC Core
Securing Nut

PSU Replacement
The removable panel of the PSU compartment permits the removal of the PSU
from the ATM as follows:
1. Remove the PC Core.
2. Unplug the PSU inlet connector.
3. Remove the PSU securing nut.
4. Remove the securing nut at the top of the removable panel.
5. Lift the removable panel clear of its locating slot in the top box shelf.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.3-3
STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

6. Pull the PSU forward to free it from the slots in the rear panel.

Securing
Slots

7. Turn the PSU into the PC Core compartment so that you can see the dc
output connectors at its rear.
8. Unplug the dc output connectors and lift the PSU out of the ATM.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.3-4 JANUARY 2005
 STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

INPUT SPECIFICATION

Voltage
The PSU can operate with a single phase input voltage ranging from 90 V to
264 V rms, 47 to 63 Hz. Voltage range selection is automatic.

Input Current
The maximum input current under normal operating conditions is as follows:

Input Voltage Frequency Range Maximum Input

Range
Range (V rms) (Hz) Current (A)
115 90 - 136 47 - 63 5.2
230 180 - 264 47 - 63 2.6

Inrush Current
The inrush current, measured at full output load (during a cold or warm start
and for a max of one cycle):
40 A peak at 115 Vrms input, measured at TA = 20 deg C
40 A peak at 230 Vrms input, measured at TA = 20 deg C

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.3-5
STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

DC OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS

DC Output Voltage
The following table defines the dc output specification of the PSU:

Performance
DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Units
Requirements
Nominal Voltage +5.15 +12 +24 5.0VSB Vdc
Current Static - Maximum 10 1 61 -2 1.0 Adc
Current Static - Minimum 0 0 0 0 Adc
Current Dynamic 10 A for 30 3.0 A for 12 - 2 0 Adc
secs addi- secs addi-
tional every tional every
120 secs 120 secs
Total Voltage Drift 3
Minimum Voltage 5.15 11.52 22.8 4.90 Vdc
Maximum Voltage 5.25 12.60 25.2 5.25 Vdc

Max. Ripple and Noise 4 50 120 240 50 mV p-p

Maximum Output Power <---355 continuous, 440 for 4 secs--- > W

NOTE: 1. The current taken from any one pin on the output connectors
should be limited to 6 A max.

NOTE: 2. The 24 V output is capable of delivering 9.0 A continuously. At

an ambient temperature of 25oC, the 24 V output current limit is between
9.2-A and 10.7 A. The current limit circuits, however, allow the following
dynamic output currents, without the power supply shutting down or the
output voltages going outside the specified limits:

15 A for 4 seconds every 120 seconds

20 A for 20 milliseconds every 120 seconds
The current limit circuit also allows the dynamic loads shown in the
section “Peak Current”.Worst case peak current will be 22 A for 290 µ s
every 120 seconds. Current waveforms are shown in the section “Peak
Current”.

NOTE: 3. The total voltage drift consists of the following: line regulation,
load regulation (with all load variations), dynamic load, temperature
warm-up drift, ripple and noise, interaction and manufacturing tolerances.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.3-6 JANUARY 2005
 STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE: 4. The maximum allowed ripple/noise output of the power supply is

defined in the table above. This is measured over a bandwidth of 0 Hz to
20 MHz at the power supply connector. A 10 µ F tantalum capacitor in
parallel with a 0.1 µ F capacitor ceramic capacitor is placed at the point of
measurement. For measurement purposes a X1 oscilloscope probe must
be tied directly across the pins of the above capacitors. The plastic probe
tip and earth clip must be removed and the tip soldered directly to the +ve
line of the voltage being measured, directly on the pin of the capacitor.
Three turns of tinned copper wire must be wrapped around the earth band
of the probe, with a leadout brought down adjacent to the probe tip. This
band must be soldered directly on to the -ve terminal of the capacitor.

Voltage Dropout
An input voltage change to 50% of nominal for one half cycle will not cause
the outputs to exceed the specified tolerance limits. Subsequent to any input
under voltage, outage, dip, or interruption, the PSU shall automatically restart
and function normally when the input voltage returns to within its operating
range. No input voltage interruption shall cause the output levels to latch off in
a non-recoverable state requiring manual power cycling.

Output Isolation
The secondary winding and circuit for the 24 V output is independent from
those of the +5.15 V, +12 V, and +5 VSB outputs.

OVERLOAD PROTECTION
The PSU will shut down to prevent itself from damage in the event of:
Overvoltage:
For the +5 VSB output the voltage limit is 6.8 V
For the +5.15 V output the voltage limit is 7.0 V
For the +12 V output the voltage limit is 15.6 V
For the +24 V output the voltage limit is 32.0 V
Overcurrent
Short circuit
Overpower
Abnormal temperature rise

NOTE: In each of the above occurrences of shutdown (except overvoltage),

the 5.0 VSB output remains normal.

RESTART AFTER SHUTDOWN

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.3-7
STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

If the PSU is shutdown by its protection circuits because of overcurrent, short

circuit, or overpower, then it will automatically attempt to restart. If the fault
condition continues, the PSU will go into “tick mode” where it will continue
to shutdown and attempt to restart until power is removed or the fault is
removed.
If the protection circuits have shut down the PSU because of overvoltage
or temperature rise then the PSU will latch off until the input voltage is cycled.

POWER SUPPLY GOOD SIGNAL

The PSU Good signal is generated by the power supply to indicate that the dc
outputs are present and to indicate that the line voltage is present and within
its specified range. The signal is TTL compatible; a logic low shows a failure
condition and a logic high shows a normal condition. The output providing
this is the collector of a transistor connected to the +5.15 V output via a 240
ohm resistor. The signal is generated when:
the power supply has been switched off for at least one (1) second and is
then switched on again without any failures
overvoltage or overcurrent is sensed on any of the dc outputs.
When the power supply has been switched off or the mains input has
failed, the power supply good signal must go low for a minimum of seven (7)
milliseconds before any of the voltages fall below their normal regulated
range. The seven millisecond delay is measured with the power supply in nor-
mal operation, with maximum load and minimum line voltage.
The PSU Good signal must go high between 200 and 500 milliseconds
after all the dc outputs have reached their minimum nominal voltage. When
the signal goes low it must stay low for a minimum of 90 milliseconds.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.3-8 JANUARY 2005
 STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

PSU CONNECTORS

AC CONNECTION
Connection of the ac supply to the PSU is via the ATM Input Connector, the
Uninterruptible Power Supply, the Line Circuit Breaker, and the ATM Line
Switch.

PSU AC Input Connector

The ac is connected to the PSU at AC Connector J1 which is a standard
chassis mounted IEC 3-way inlet connector. The PSU input circuit
incorporates a fuse and a power line filter.

Input Fuse
The PSU is protected by an internal 10 A slow blow ceramic UL/CSA
approved fuse. This is not a field replaceable item.

DC OUTPUT CONNECTORS

J2

J3

J4

J5

J6

J7

The following pinout diagrams are shown looking into the connectors in the
orientation they are in when the PSU is mounted in a front access ATM,
(connector J2 is at the top and J7 at the bottom, see photograph). In a rear
access ATM the PSU is turned through 180 degrees so that connector J7 at the
top and pin 1 of each of the connectors is at the top left.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.3-9
STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

DC Distribution Connectors J2 to J6
Connectors J2, J3, J4, J5, and J6 are 20-way Molex Mini-Fit Jr. series
connectors (39-28-1203) with identical pinout as shown below:

Latch
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
12 V 12 V 5.15 V 5.15 V 5.15 V 5.15 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
RTN RTN RTN RTN RTN
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 V 12 V 5.15 V 5.15 V 5.15 V 5.15 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
RTN RTN RTN RTN RTN

Auxiliary Connector J7
Connector J7 is an 8-way Molex Mini-Fit Jr. connector (39-28-1083) that
provides connection for a remote status LED (P.G. LED), shutdown control,
Auxiliary +5 VSB, Power Good, and all associated return circuits:

Latch
8 7 6 5
PSON LED 5 VSB 5 VSB
RTN
4 3 2 1
PSON LED PGOOD POWER
RTN RTN RTN GOOD

NOTE: The PSU LED output is not used in the 6674/76 ATMs.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.3-10 JANUARY 2005
 STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Test Connector
The PSU test connector is located in the edge of the top box shelf and is
connected by the ATM cabinet harness to output connector J3.

J3 TEST
Standard Power Supply Unit

5.15 V
15 5

V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V

5.15 V RTN
17 1
12 V
20 6
12V RTN
19 2 8 7 6 5
24 V 4 3 2 1
12 8
24 V RTN
14 4
7
3

STRAPPING
The ATM Cabinet Harness links PSU connector J7 pin 8 (PSON) to connector
J7 pin 4 (PSON RTN). The signal PSON is intended to provide a remote
shutdown capability to the PSU and is a future development. Without this link
the PSU will not start up.

ADJUSTMENTS
The PSU is supplied pre-set. There are no field adjustments.

TEST TOOLS
None.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.3-11
STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

HISTORY

SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY - 355W

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
009-0019138

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.3-12 JANUARY 2005
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

CONTENTS

Rear and Front Access

Bill Alignment Dispensers

Chapter 26.4

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................. 26.4-1

AREAS OF CHANGE ..................................................................... 26.4-1
PICK MODULES............................................................................. 26.4-2
SINGLE AND DUAL CONFIGURATION .................................... 26.4-3
Safes ............................................................................................... 26.4-4
OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT ................................................ 26.4-4
VARIANTS ...................................................................................... 26.4-4
CONTAINERS ................................................................................. 26.4-4
SECURITY....................................................................................... 26.4-5
Standard Security ........................................................................... 26.4-5
Tamper Indicating .......................................................................... 26.4-5
Cash Security.................................................................................. 26.4-5
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................... 26.4-6
Power Requirements ...................................................................... 26.4-6
Weight ............................................................................................ 26.4-6
Dispenser Dimensions.................................................................... 26.4-6

DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 26.4-7
PATH OF NOTES............................................................................ 26.4-7
Forming the Stack .......................................................................... 26.4-7
Present ............................................................................................ 26.4-8
Purge............................................................................................... 26.4-9
Sensors ......................................................................................... 26.4-10
PICK MODULE ............................................................................. 26.4-11
PRESENTER MODULE................................................................ 26.4-11
Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT) .................... 26.4-12

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-i
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Main Timing Disk.........................................................................26.4-13

Flicker Shaft, Anti-Static Brush, and Deflectors ..........................26.4-14
Bill Alignment Assembly .............................................................26.4-15
Note Clamp...................................................................................26.4-17
Presenter Transport.......................................................................26.4-19
Presenter Timing Disk ..................................................................26.4-21
Transport Sensors .........................................................................26.4-21
Exit Sensor....................................................................................26.4-23
Purge Bin Location Components..................................................26.4-23
Purge Transport ............................................................................26.4-24
Purge Sensor .................................................................................26.4-24
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump ...................................................26.4-24
Motor Control Circuit ...................................................................26.4-25

CURRENCY DISPENSER CONTROL BOARD ............................26.4-26

VOLTAGE AND CURRENT ........................................................26.4-27
COMPATIBILITY..........................................................................26.4-27
Dispenser Security Switch ..............................................................26.4-27
Configuration Switches ................................................................26.4-27
Diagnostic LEDs...........................................................................26.4-28
Security Shutter Operation ...........................................................26.4-28
Split Purge Bin..............................................................................26.4-28
AC Motor......................................................................................26.4-28

SINGLE PICK INTERFACE BOARD.............................................26.4-28

DOUBLE PICK INTERFACE BOARD...........................................26.4-28

FIRMWARE DESCRIPTION...........................................................26.4-29

CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE .26.4-29

CALIBRATING THE DISPENSER ..............................................26.4-30
ESTABLISHING SINGULARITY AND SIZE .............................26.4-33
Calculation of Reject Rate ............................................................26.4-38
ERROR MESSAGES .....................................................................26.4-38
Dispenser Clear Transport Error...................................................26.4-39
Change Parameter Errors..............................................................26.4-39
Learn Parameter Errors.................................................................26.4-40

ADJUSTMENTS...............................................................................26.4-41
DRIVE BELT TENSION ...............................................................26.4-41
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-ii
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

R/A Drive Belt Arrangement. ...................................................... 26.4-42

F/A Drive Belt Arrangement........................................................ 26.4-43
REMOVAL OF SAFETY INTERLOCK BOARD........................ 26.4-44
R/A ............................................................................................... 26.4-44
F/A................................................................................................ 26.4-45
REMOVING THE ELECTRONICS BOX (R/A) .......................... 26.4-46
REMOVING THE CONTROL BOARD ....................................... 26.4-54
R/A Dispenser .............................................................................. 26.4-54
F/A Dispenser............................................................................... 26.4-57
REMOVING THE MAIN MOTOR (F/A) ..................................... 26.4-58
REMOVING THE LVDT .............................................................. 26.4-59
R/A Dispenser .............................................................................. 26.4-59
F/A................................................................................................ 26.4-60
ELECTRONIC VERIFICATION OF LVDT................................. 26.4-61
PICK MODULE TIMING.............................................................. 26.4-61

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTIC TESTING ................................................ 26.4-62

NID CURRENCY DISPENSER CONTROL BOARDS ............... 26.4-62
SWITCHES AND LEDS INTERFACE......................................... 26.4-62
MODE OPTION............................................................................. 26.4-62
ON-BOARD SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................... 26.4-63
TEST SEQUENCES....................................................................... 26.4-64
TEST DESCRIPTIONS.................................................................. 26.4-64
TEST ROUTER.............................................................................. 26.4-64
Purpose ......................................................................................... 26.4-64
Description ................................................................................... 26.4-64
Test Selection ............................................................................... 26.4-64
Test Results .................................................................................. 26.4-64
Notes............................................................................................. 26.4-64
TEST 01H - MICROCONTROLLER CONFIDENCE AND EPROM
SUMCHECK .................................................................................. 26.4-64
Purpose ......................................................................................... 26.4-65
Description ................................................................................... 26.4-65
Test Selection ............................................................................... 26.4-65
Test Results .................................................................................. 26.4-65
Notes............................................................................................. 26.4-65
TEST 02H - SRAM DATA ............................................................ 26.4-66
Purpose ......................................................................................... 26.4-66
Description ................................................................................... 26.4-66
Test Selection ............................................................................... 26.4-66
Test Results .................................................................................. 26.4-66
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-iii
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Notes .............................................................................................26.4-66
TEST 03H - SRAM ADDRESS .....................................................26.4-66
Purpose .........................................................................................26.4-66
Description....................................................................................26.4-66
Test Selection................................................................................26.4-67
Test Results...................................................................................26.4-67
Notes .............................................................................................26.4-67
TEST 04H - ALL RAM DATA ......................................................26.4-68
Purpose .........................................................................................26.4-68
Description....................................................................................26.4-68
Test Selection................................................................................26.4-68
Test Results...................................................................................26.4-68

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS .....................................................26.4-69

DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENUS ....................................................26.4-69
CLEAR .........................................................................................26.4-69
SET NOTES .................................................................................26.4-69
STACK .........................................................................................26.4-70
PRESENT .....................................................................................26.4-70
DISPENSE....................................................................................26.4-70
MAIN MOTOR ............................................................................26.4-70
SELF TEST ..................................................................................26.4-70
EXIT SHUTTER ..........................................................................26.4-71
SENSOR/SWITCH STATUS ......................................................26.4-71
PRESENTER BILL DRIVE.........................................................26.4-71
LEARN BILL PARAMETERS....................................................26.4-71
PRESENTER CLAMP .................................................................26.4-71
PICK VALVE...............................................................................26.4-72
SDC TURNAROUND..................................................................26.4-72
RUN-TO-RUN .............................................................................26.4-72
Gulp Feed Detector Switch...........................................................26.4-72
M_STATUS AND M_DATA.........................................................26.4-72
Actual to Virtual Cassette Mapping .............................................26.4-73
CURRENCY DISPENSER TI........................................................26.4-74
Diagnostics Test Menu .................................................................26.4-74
TAMPER INDICATION..............................................................26.4-75

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS................................................................26.4-75
S_DATA .........................................................................................26.4-75
TALLIES ........................................................................................26.4-75
Transaction Tallies........................................................................26.4-75
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-iv
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

TMS Interface Support Area Tallies ............................................ 26.4-77

STRAPPING ..................................................................................... 26.4-77

NID CURRENCY DISPENSER CONTROL BOARD ................ 26.4-77
PRESENTER HARNESS LINK .................................................... 26.4-78

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 26.4-78

PM PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 26.4-78
CURRENCY/MEDIA CONTAINERS .......................................... 26.4-78
PICK MODULES........................................................................... 26.4-78
Suction Cups ................................................................................ 26.4-79
PRESENTER ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 26.4-80
SHUTTER ASSEMBLIES............................................................. 26.4-80

LUBRICATION................................................................................ 26.4-80
LUBRICANT TYPE ...................................................................... 26.4-81
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS........................................................ 26.4-81
Presenter Assembly ...................................................................... 26.4-82
Pick Module ................................................................................. 26.4-82

INTERNAL CABLES ...................................................................... 26.4-82

RETRACTION HARNESS............................................................ 26.4-83
DISPENSER MAIN MOTOR (R/A).............................................. 26.4-84
DISPENSER MAIN MOTOR (F/A) .............................................. 26.4-84
R/A DISPENSER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................ 26.4-85
R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 1 OF 4............................. 26.4-86
R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 2 OF 4) ........................... 26.4-87
R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 3 OF 4) ........................... 26.4-88
R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 4 OF 4) ........................... 26.4-89
F/A INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ....................................... 26.4-90
F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 1 OF 4)............................ 26.4-91
F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 2 OF 4)............................ 26.4-92
F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 3 OF 4)............................ 26.4-93
F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 4 OF 4)............................ 26.4-94

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT ....................................................... 26.4-95

POWER INTERFACE ................................................................... 26.4-95
SDC INTERFACE.......................................................................... 26.4-95
RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE ............................... 26.4-96
PICK MODULES........................................................................... 26.4-96
STEPPER MOTOR SENSORS...................................................... 26.4-96
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-v
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

J5 Pinout .......................................................................................26.4-97
J6 Pinout .......................................................................................26.4-97
ON-BOARD SHUTTER.................................................................26.4-98
TRANSPORT LEDS AND SENSORS ..........................................26.4-98
NOTE THICKNESS SENSOR / LVDT .........................................26.4-99
SPLIT PURGE BIN INTERFACE .................................................26.4-99
INTELLIGENT CASSETTE INTERFACE ...................................26.4-99
RDI INTERFACE.........................................................................26.4-100
STEPPER MOTORS ....................................................................26.4-100
JTAG INTERFACE ......................................................................26.4-100
RS-232 DIAGNOSTIC INTERFACE ..........................................26.4-101

HISTORY........................................................................................26.4-101
MODULE: R/A PRESENTER .....................................................26.4-101
MODULE: ELECTRONICS BOX 120 V ....................................26.4-101
MODULE: ELECTRONICS BOX 230 V ....................................26.4-102
MODULE: F/A PRESENTER 120V ............................................26.4-102
MODULE: F/A PRESENTER 230V ............................................26.4-102
MODULE: NID/P86 CONTROL BOARD ..................................26.4-102

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-vi
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.4

Rear and Front Access

Bill Alignment Dispensers

INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the rear access (R/A) and front access (F/A) currency
dispensers used in the Personas M Series 6674 and 6676 ATMs. These
dispensers form a stack of bills using the bill alignment mechanism and
transport the stack to the facia of the ATM. The R/A and F/A dispensers are
developed from the following NCR dispensers:
The R/A is based on the Personas 86 Currency Dispenser introduced in
the NCR Personas 86 ATM
The F/A is based on the Front Access New Interior Dispenser (NID)
introduced in the NCR Personas 77 ATM.

NOTE: Differences between dispenser types are pointed out in the text.

AREAS OF CHANGE
The major areas of change between the Bill Alignment type dispensers in the
667X ATMs and earlier P86 and NID are as follows:
Mechanical:
The R/A has a shorter exit nose than the P86 type.
The F/A has a fixed exit nose instead of the nodding nose of the NID.
The F/A does not have the on-board shutter that is a feature of the
NID.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-1
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Electrical:
The R/A and F/A dispensers are made in 115 V and 230 V main
motor variants only. There is no 100 V version as there is with the
NID.
The NID dispenser control printed circuit board is used on the R/A
and F/A dispensers, replacing the P86 control board on the P86 dis-
penser.
The interlock board and dispenser interlock switch are mounted on
the dispenser.
Software:
Changes to control notes over the different lengths of note path.

PICK MODULES
The Bill Alignment Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX single and double
pick modules. Aria pick modules are described in Chapter 17.2 of NCR
publication BFM0-547-A000, 56XX/Personas Automated Teller Machines,
Service Aids Mini-Manual. For a description of the 56XX type pick module
refer to Chapter 17.6 of the same publication.

NOTE: 1. Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX type pick modules,
then the Aria type must always be put to the lower positions.

NOTE: 2. The Aria single and double pick modules were designed origi-
nally for the Personas 86 Currency Dispenser but are interchangeable
with the 56XX Enhanced Currency dispenser pick modules. They can
not, however, be used with the H-8010-56XX-XX-08 and H-8010-56XX-
XX-08 (IE) presenters. The R/A and F/A presenters can not be used with
earlier versions of the currency dispenser.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-2
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

SINGLE AND DUAL CONFIGURATION

The R/A and F/A dispensers are available in either single cash dispenser
configuration or, if running on an APTRA XFS on XP platform, dual cash
dispenser configuration. A single, 4-high dispenser can be configured to
recognize up to seven different denominations of currency, one from each
possible cassette type. It is limited to dispensing four denominations because
of the maximum number of cassettes it can hold. In the dual dispenser, the
second dispenser may be configured with a further seven denominations
against the seven cassette types giving a total of 14 denominations but again
limited to dispensing eight at any one time because of the physical maximum
number of cassettes (2 x 4-high).
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-3
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Safes
Single or dual dispenser configuration has a bearing on the type of safe used in
the ATM, as follows:
UL Safe - Single or dual dispenser configuration
CEN Safe - Single dispenser only with the dispenser at the left hand side
when viewed on the facia.

OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT
The dispenser operates as an intelligent module under the control of its own
onboard microprocessor. It communicates with the ATM central processing
unit over the SDC serial bus. Dispenser device control firmware, resident in
the dispenser memory, interfaces to the ATM transaction control and
diagnostic programs.

VARIANTS
The variants of the currency dispenser are designated as follows:
115 V or 230 V Electronics Box (R/A)
115 V, 230 V versions (F/A)
ICS versions
Cash Security versions
2, 3, and 4 Standard Width Cassettes*
2, 3, and 4 Standard Width, Tamper Indicating Cassettes*
2, 3, and 4 Position, No Cassettes*
Open Purge Bin
Latchfast Purge Bin.

NOTE: * The R/A and F/A dispensers are only available in 2, 3 and 4 high
variants.

CONTAINERS
The dispenser is capable of using all the currency cassettes developed for
5070/80/81/84/85/88 ATMs.

NOTE: A full description of the currency cassette is given in Chapter 17.2

of NCR publication BFM0-547-A000, 56XX/Personas Automated Teller
Machines, Service Aids Mini-Manual.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-4
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

SECURITY
Three levels of security are available in respect to the physical security of the
currency:
Standard security
Tamper indicating with mechanical devices
Cash Security variants:
Intelligent Cash Security (ICS) variant
ATM Cash Security variant.

Standard Security
The currency cassettes and purge bin remain seal-fast secure when the ATM is
opened. Latch-fast security provides a level of security where access to the
currency can not be achieved without using a simple tool.

Tamper Indicating
Tamper-indicating security prevents access to the currency in the currency
cassettes and dispenser transport by using seal-fast containers and covers.
Tamper indicating on the currency cassettes is by multi-shot mechanical
containers.

NOTE: Mechanical indicators are not available on the purge bin. A dis-
penser ordered with mechanical TI is supplied with a standard latch-fast
purge bin with a sealable door lock.

Cash Security
There are two types of Cash Security currency cassettes: the Intelligent Cash
Security (ICS) cassette and the ATM Cash Security cassette. Both are
designed to fit into a security system that injects a marking ink onto the
currency within the cassette if the ATM is attacked. The currency is
permanently stained and therefore no longer of any use. Because of this, it is
very important that the correct procedures be observed when handling this
type of cassette.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-5
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

SPECIFICATIONS

Power Requirements
The power requirements of the bill alignment dispenser are:
Direct current:
+5 V ± 5% 2.5 A
+12 V ± 10% 0.5 A
-12 V ± 10% 0.1 A
+24 V ± 10% 3.5 A.
Alternating current:
115 Vac, 5.5 A r.m.s., 20.0 A surge
230 Vac, 3.0 A r.m.s., 10.0 A surge.

Weight
The weights of the component parts of the dispenser are:
R/A Dispenser:
Basic unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 40.7 kg (89.73 lb.)
Presenter unit = 21.1 kg (46.52 lb.)
F/A dispenser:
Basic unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 53.5 kg (117.95 lb.)
Presenter unit = 33.8 kg (74.52 lb.)
Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.)
Double pick module = 9.7 kg (21.38 lb.)
Currency cassette empty = 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)
Currency cassette full = 6.0 kg (13.2 lb.)
Purge bin empty = 1.0 kg (2.2046 lb.)
Purge bin full = 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.).

Dispenser Dimensions
The dimensions of the dispenser with four pick modules (excluding ATM
interface requirements) are:
R/A Dispenser:
Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
Height = 700 mm (27.56 in.)
Depth = 726 mm (28.58 in.)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-6
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A:
Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
Height = 780 mm (30.95 in.)
Depth = 747 mm (29.41 in.)

DESCRIPTION
Bill alignment dispensers present a bunch of up to 40 bills in up to four
denominations of currency to the cardholder. A detect and purge system
controls the movement of currency along the transport. Misfed or damaged
currency is bunched and driven into a purge bin. The option is available, via
application commands, to retract currency presented to the cardholder but not
taken, to the purge bin.
The following sections describe the operation of the dispenser’s mechani-
cal, electrical/electronic, and firmware components under the headings. The
components are described in the order they are encountered by notes passing
through the dispenser.

PATH OF NOTES
The R/A and F/A dispensers in the 667X ATMs are built with two, three, or
four pick modules suspended below the presenter module.
The path of notes through the presenter is shown in the following dia-
grams:

Forming the Stack

Notes enter the presenter from the pick modules, pass, as a stream of single
bills, through the LVDT and are projected against the bill stop gate of the bill
alignment mechanism by the flicker shaft fingers. The bills then fall onto the
top of the note clamp transport where they form a stack.

R/A -
Bill Alignment Assembly
Stack Sensor
(Down)

From Pick Flicker Note Stack

Modules Shaft

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-7
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A -
Stack Sensor Bill Alignment Assembly
(Down)

Note Stack
From Pick Flicker Stack Sensor
Modules Shaft

Present
The note clamp transport is lifted up so that the note stack is held against the
underside of the top set of presenter transport belts. The belts are driven and
the stack of notes is moved out to the facia exit slot where it is held for the
cardholder.

R/A -
Present Position of Stack Bill Alignment Assembly
(Down)

Note Clamp Cam

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-8
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A -
Bill Alignment Assembly Present Position of Stack
(Down)

Purge
If the stack is not taken by the cardholder, the presenter transport is driven in
reverse and the stack of notes is moved from the present position into the
purge bin. If a mispick has been detected the stack of notes is not presented
but is driven directly to the purge bin.

R/A -
Bill Alignment Assembly Purge Bin
(Up)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-9
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A -
Bill Alignment Assembly (Up)

Note Clamp Cam Purge Bin

Sensors
The position of the sensors that detect the movement of notes is shown in the
diagrams below:

R/A -
Exit Sensor T5
T4 T3 Stack Sensor T2 Purge Overfill Sensor

LVDT

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-10
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A -
Exit Sensor TS5
TS3 TS4

Stack Down
LVDT Sensor TS2 Clamp Position Up TS1
Sensors
(Purge Overfill Sensor)

PICK MODULE
The R/A and F/A Currency Dispensers may be configured with two, three, or
four pick modules hanging vertically below the presenter module.
Pick position number 1 is immediately below the presenter, number 2 is
below number 1, number 3 below number 2, and 4 below 3.
There are two types of pick module; the single pick module holds one
currency cassette, and the double pick module holds two cassettes, one above
the other. Both single and double pick modules are known as the Aria type
(described in Chapter 17.9 of NCR publication BFM-0547-A000, 56XX/Per-
sonas Automated Teller Machines, Service Aids Mini-Manual).

PRESENTER MODULE
The presenter module has the following functions:
stack up to 40 bills and present the stack to the cardholder
detect when the stack of bills is taken
control the exit shutter behind the ATM facia
provide a housing for the purge bin
drive damaged, mispicked, or not-taken currency into the purge bin
detect when the purge bin is full
drive, through gearing, all the pick modules
detect the movement of bills through the transport
create the timing signal for the measurement of bill singularity
supply the pick vacuum to all the pick modules.
The components of the presenter which achieve these functions are:
linear variable displacement transducer (LVDT)
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-11
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

main timing disk

flicker shaft
bill alignment assembly, note stack guide, and bill stop gate
note clamp, clamp arm, clamp motor, stack sensor
presenter transport and motor
presenter timing disk
transport sensors
exit sensor
shutter assembly
purge bin location components
purge transport
purge sensor
main motor and vacuum pump
motor control circuit on the dispenser control board.
The following sections describe these components.

Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT)

Bills passed up from the pick modules enter the presenter via the LVDT
transport. This short transport is the only one in the presenter that is driven by
the main motor and is linked via a gear train to the first pick module transport.
The LVDT is a sensing device, situated in the transport just before the
flicker shaft, which gives an electrical output proportional to the displacement
of two movable roller assemblies caused by bills passing between them and
fixed reference rollers. The rollers are attached to ferrite cores which project
through sensing coils printed on a pcb. The output from the coils is digitized,
integrated, and is compared to the expected value (held in memory) for the
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-12
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

currency being dispensed. In this way torn, folded, or multiple bills are
detected. Refer to the “Electrical Description” section for a more detailed
description of the LVDT.

NOTE: There is no Pre-LVDT sensor on the bill alignment presenters. The

timing of the calculation is carried out by the LVDT itself.

Main Timing Disk

The main timing disk pulley is driven by toothed belt from the main motor.
Thirty-six holes around the periphery of the timing disk create the timing
pulses from an opto-electronic sensor. The output of the sensor is used to
measure the movement of the bills as far as the flicker shaft and as a reference
in the measurement of bill width. The interval between the interrupts
represents a distance travelled by the bill of approximately 1 mm.

R/A -

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-13
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A -

Timing Disk

Flicker Shaft, Anti-Static Brush, and Deflectors

The plastic fingers on the flicker shaft impart an extra impetus to the notes as
they leave the LVDT transport so that they are projected against the bill stop
gate of the bill alignment assembly. On the NID this action is augmented by a
second flicker shaft assembly with short flicker fingers. The longer flicker
fingers also drag the notes into the stack against plastic guides attached to the
LVDT transport.
Just as the notes leave the LVDT transport they pass through an anti-static
brush to remove any electric charge that would hinder them forming into a
stack. Above the anti-static brush two plastic note deflectors are clipped
between tie bars so that they brush across the upper surface of the note and
provide a light downward pressure to keep the trailing edge of the notes down
and aid the action of the flicker fingers.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-14
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Also assisting the path of the notes is the note stack guide. This polycar-
bonate moulding is clipped on to supporting studs on the side frames of the R/
A and on to the transport drum shaft of the
F/A. It turns around its support to provide four guiding fingers that deflect
notes downwards on to the note clamp transport. The note stack guide is
lightly sprung so that it rests on the stack tray at either side with the fingers a
distance above where the stack of notes is formed. When the note clamp trans-
port is raised to present the stack of notes, the note stack guide is lifted clear of
the presenter transport belts.

Bill Alignment Assembly

The bill stop gate of the bill alignment assembly hangs down into the path of
the notes as they are flicked out of the LVDT transport. Notes strike the gate,
bounce back from it, and fall down on to the top of the note clamp transport
where they are dragged into a stack by the action of the flicker fingers.
The neat formation of the stack of notes depends upon the bounce given
to the notes by the gate which, in turn, depends on the position of the gate. The
gate hangs from a belt transport driven by a stepper motor controlled by the
dispenser firmware. The position for the width of notes being dispensed is cal-
culated by the firmware from the note width stored in the dispenser bill con-
figuration procedure. During a transaction, if the width of notes to be
dispensed varies, the gate is moved to the new position before the next size is
dispensed. The recommended method of forming the stack is from the small-
est bills first, getting progressively larger, so that the bill alignment mecha-
nism moves out to accommodate each larger size. The zero reference position
of the bill alignment mechanism is sensed by the stack sensor which is inter-
rupted by a flag on the bill stop gate when the mechanism has been driven
fully forward. This is done at the start of every dispense and the gate is driven
from there to its calculated position.
When the stack of notes is completed, the gate is driven back slightly
towards the rear of the dispenser to clear the stack and the note clamp trans-
port is then raised. If the stack has been formed successfully, the notes will be
driven forwards by the presenter transport belts to be taken by the cardholder.
If, however, a fault has been detected, the notes will be driven to the purge bin.
To achieve this, the presenter transport drives the stack forward until its trail-
ing edge just passes the stack sensor. Then the bill alignment mechanism is
driven towards the rear of the dispenser. This action causes the bill stop gate to
be lifted out of the presenter belt transport by the action of passing over ramps
attached to the side frames of the presenter. The mechanism is sensed fully
back and up by a second flag on the bill stop gate interrupting the beam of the
rear bill alignment sensor. The bill alignment mechanism remains in this posi-
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-15
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

tion during the purge cycle. The presenter transport is then driven rearward to
deliver the stack to the purge bin.
The following illustrations show the bill alignment assembly in the R/A
and F/A dispensers.

R/A -

Bill Align
Up Sensor

Bill Stop
Gate

Stack
Sensor

Note Stack
Guide

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-16
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A -
Bill Align
Up Sensor

Bill Stop
Gate

Note Stack
Guide

Stack
Sensor

Note Clamp

The note clamp transport is a tray assembly that is raised and lowered by
semicircular cams driven by a stepper motor via a gear train. The transport
consists of a set of three belts held between two shafts at either end of the
metal tray. One of the shafts is driven by the presenter transport stepper motor
via a toothed belt and the other shaft is an idler. The transport belts run on

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-17
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

crown pulleys on the shafts.

Also fixed to the clamp tray is the plastic stack tray. When the note clamp
transport is in the down position this stack tray is higher than the transport
belts so that the notes can stack on its top surface. As the transport is lifted by
the action of the cams the idler shaft lifts in elongated holes in the stack tray so
that the belts are lifted up above the surface of the stack tray and lift the stack
of notes from it. In this way, when the notes are driven by the presenter trans-
port they are not impeded by rubbing across the stack tray. Part of the stack
tray is shaped to project beyond the drive shaft to provide a support for notes
when being purged into the purge bin.
In its down position on the R/A, the note clamp transport sits within a
metal bracket, attached between the presenter side frames, that has vertical
plates to prevent notes from falling off the sides of the note clamp transport.
This function is performed on the F/A by flat blades that are part of the note
stack guide.
Fingers on the bill stop gate hang down through the slots in the stack tray
to prevent any notes from falling off the rear of the note clamp transport.
The note clamp transport is sensed in its up and down position by two
sensors that are interrupted by a flag on the shaft attached to the clamp lifting
cams. On the F/A there is provision to add a third sensor that detects the clamp
transport in a mid-raised position. This is for future development in dispens-
ing small media. The stack of notes is sensed by the same sensor that detects
the forward position of the bill alignment assembly. The sensor looks down
through a hole in the tray of the clamp transport to an LED attached to the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-18
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

metal bracket that provides the vertical side plates.

Clamp
Clamp Clamp Up and Down
Cam Cam Sensors

Bill Alignment Stepper Motor Clamp Stepper Motor

Presenter Transport

R/A -

Exit Sensor Upper Transport Belts

Bill Alignment Assembly

Purge Bin
Location

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-19
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A -

Exit Sensor

Upper Transport Belts

Purge Bin
Location

The presenter transport consists of an upper set of three belts bearing against a
lower set of three belts, both sets driven by a stepper motor via toothed belts at
the left hand side of the dispenser. The transport belts pass across crown
pulleys on the drive and tension shafts. The lower set of belts runs from the
exit of the dispenser to just above the LVDT transport and the upper set runs
from the exit and extends over the note clamp transport.
Just after the note alignment mechanism backs away from the stack of
notes, the note clamp transport is raised by the rotation of the semicircular
cam. The clamp is lifted so that its belts press against the underside of the top
set of presenter transport belts and the note stack is held between both sets of
belts. The stepper motor then drives the presenter transport (and also through
a gearwheel the belts on the note clamp transport) so that the stack of notes is
moved to the exit held between the upper and lower presenter transport belts.
The toggle shaft at the exit compensates for different thicknesses of stack and
permits the stack to be pulled from the dispenser by the cardholder.
In the F/A the transport belts pass around a large diameter drum so that
the stack of notes is turned through 180 degrees and then driven to the exit
above the purge bin.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-20
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Presenter Timing Disk

An opto-electronic sensor controls the time that the presenter stepper motor
has to be powered to drive the transport and stop it with the bills projecting
from the exit slot. The sensor beam is chopped by the segments on a timing
disk attached to the presenter transport drive shaft to produce interrupts
equivalent to travel of the stack of 1.57 mm (0.062 in.).
The illustration below shows the R/A presenter timing disk.

Timing Disk

Transport Sensors
On the way along the transport, the progress of the stack of bills is monitored
by infra-red sensors, and their related LEDs. See the illustrations below and
also the diagrams in the section “Path of Notes”.
The photographs show TS3 and TS3A arranged across the width of the
transport. These sensors and their respective LEDs are wired in series and are
intended to improve detection of certain world currencies that have a transpar-
ent section as part of the bill design.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-21
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

R/A -

TS5
Exit Sensor

TS4

TS3
TS3A

F/A -

TS5
Exit Sensor
TS4

TS3A
TS3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-22
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Exit Sensor
The last sensor on the transport is the exit sensor T5 which sees the stack in
the present position and detects when it is taken by the cardholder.

Purge Bin Location Components

The purge bin is held in the presenter so that it is accessible from the same
position as the currency cassettes. It is supported by guide rails and is locked
in position by a latch. A microswitch is operated by the inserted purge bin to
inform the electronics system that the bin is in place.
When a latchfast purge bin is installed, a keyplate enters holes in the top
front of a latchfast purge bin and pushes the truck door up into the top. The
rear door of the latchfast purge bin is secured by a sealable latch.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-23
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Purge Transport
The purge transport consists upper and lower foam roller shafts driven via
toothed gears from the presenter transport and upper and lower plastic guides.
The extended portion of the note stack tray forms the lower note support
guides and an upper set of plastic guides is attached between the drive shaft of
the upper presenter transport belts and the upper foam roller shaft.
On a purge, either due to a mispick being detected or the stack of notes
not being taken by the cardholder, the direction of the stepper motor driving
the presenter transport is reversed, (the bill alignment mechanism having been
previously driven to its rearmost and up position), thus moving the stack into
the note guides which direct the notes from the belts in between upper and
lower foam roll shafts. A friction clutch arrangement makes sure that the foam
roll shafts only drive when the presenter motor is reversed and the notes are
driven in the direction of the purge bin. The foam rollers complete the task of
pushing notes into the bin.

Purge Sensor
The movement of the stack into the purge bin is detected by a sensor and LED
that look across the path of the notes at the foam rollers. This sensor also
detects a bin overfill condition.

Main Motor and Vacuum Pump

The main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed
timing belts. It also drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick
line via 6 mm bore tubing. A vacuum reservoir is located near the pump to
improve the system vacuum, and an air filter in the tubing above the first pick
module protects the pump from damage caused by ingress of grit particles.
On the R/A dispenser the motor and pump assembly is located in a sepa-
rate electronic box assembly that also houses the dispenser control board. This
box is attached below the start of the projecting nose of the dispenser and is

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-24
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

supplied in 230 V and 115 V versions.

On the F/A the motor and vacuum pump are located at the rear of the pre-
senter next to the LVDT transport.

Motor Control Circuit

The motor control circuits are located on the dispenser control board. These
circuits include: the drive circuits for the main motor, the presenter transport
motor, the bill alignment motor, and the clamp motor.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-25
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

CURRENCY DISPENSER CONTROL BOARD

The following illustration shows the NID Control Board which is used on both
the R/A and the F/A dispenser.

J11 J10 J5
Intelligent Split Purge Clamp J9
Cassette I/F Bin Mid Sensor LVDT

J8
Transport
Diagnostic Sensors
LEDs
J7
J12 Shutter
Diagnostics Sensors
Diagnostic J6
Switches Timing Disks
&
Position Sensors
Flex Authorization
Switch

J4
Pick Modules

J13
Motors

J14 J1 J2 J3
Shutter Power SDC RS-232
Solenoids BUS (Optional)

NOTE: Connector J3 is populated only on boards fitted to OEM dispensers.

The Currency Dispenser Control Board controls the operation of the cur-
rency dispenser and monitors the currency path through the dispenser. It is an
intelligent board, responsible for collating all sensor information and operat-
ing the individual pick modules, the presenter, the ac motor and stepper
motors, and also communicating commands and responses to the ATM core
processor.
The Currency Dispenser Control Board is a mixed technology pcb

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-26
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

employing both Surface Mount Technology (SMT) and Plated Through Hole
(PTH) components.
The functions of the Currency Dispenser Control Board can be summa-
rized as follows:
1. To co-ordinate operation of the currency dispenser transport hardware
including all motors, sensors, and actuators.
2. To process instructions from and provide responses to the ATM core elec-
tronics via either an SDC or (for OEM) an RS-232 interface.
3. To provide a power and logic interface to the associated single and double
pick modules.
4. To provide a power and logic interface for future intelligent cassette and
purge bin modules.

VOLTAGE AND CURRENT

The Currency Dispenser Control Board requires the following voltages and
currents:
+5 V ± 0.25 V @ 2.5 A (max)
+12 V ± 1.2 V @ 0.5 A (max)
-12 V ± 1.2 V @ 0.1 A (max)
+24 V ± 2.4 V @ 3.5 A (max)

COMPATIBILITY
The SDC variant of the Currency Dispenser Control Board is designed for
operation in NCR P86, NID, R/A and F/A currency dispensers. The RS-232
variant of the Currency Dispenser Control Board is designed for operation in
dispensers that are OEM models.

Dispenser Security Switch

Switch SW1 on the Currency Dispenser Control Board is used to authorize
running level 1 diagnostic tests: STACK, PRESENT, and DISPENSE. Refer
to the section, “Level 1 Diagnostic Tests”.

Configuration Switches
Eight configuration switches are provided for configuration use and Extended
Level 0 Diagnostics.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-27
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Diagnostic LEDs
Eight LEDs are provided to display Extended Level 0 Diagnostics information
during start-up.

Security Shutter Operation

The ATM has a security shutter fitted in front of the module (at the currency
exit) - refer to Chapter 17.4 of NCR publication BFM-0547-A000, NCR
56XX/Personas Automated Teller Machines, Service Aids Mini-Manual. This
shutter is operated by a motor driven from a separate driver board controlled
by the currency dispenser via the SDC power interface. Sensors mounted on
the shutter driver board detect when the shutter is open and closed.

Split Purge Bin

Provision is made on the NID Control Board to control a split purge bin with a
solenoid operated movable deflector that diverts bills into either of two
sections. This is a possible future development and is not described at this
time.

AC Motor
The ac motor is used to drive the pick units and is controlled by the Currency
Dispenser Control Board.

SINGLE PICK INTERFACE BOARD

Single pick modules used on the R/A and F/A dispensers are the Aria type
which uses the same single pick interface board as 56XX pick modules. Aria
pick modules and interface boards are described in Chapter 17.9 of NCR
publication BFM-0547-A000, NCR 56XX/Personas Automated Teller
Machines, Service Aids Mini-Manual.
56XX type pick modules can also be fitted to both dispensers, however,
in this case, the GULP- and TEMP1 signals will have no effect on dispenser
operation because these signals are not used by the NID control board.

DOUBLE PICK INTERFACE BOARD

The Aria double pick module is used on R/A and the F/A dispensers. The
Double Pick Interface board in the Aria double pick module is the same board
as that used in the 56XX Enhanced Currency Dispenser. The board acts as an
interface between the actuators and sensors in the Currency Dispenser Double
Pick Module and the Currency Dispenser Control Board. Aria pick modules
and interface boards are described in Chapter 17.9 of NCR publication BFM-
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-28
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

0547-A000, NCR 56XX/Personas Automated Teller Machines, Service Aids

Mini-Manual.

FIRMWARE DESCRIPTION
The following description of the firmware is not complete but introduces only
the topics thought necessary for an understanding of dispenser operation.
The P86 Currency Dispenser Device Firmware provides device control,
including full error recovery procedures, for the Currency Dispenser in the
SDC peripheral environment.
The firmware interface provides dispensing of up to four different cur-
rency denominations with a single dispenser and up to eight denominations
with dual dispensers. It accepts, executes, and returns status information in
response to device control commands from the next level process.
The firmware operates under control of the VxWorks real time kernel by
soliciting commands from the SDC Secondary software and sending solicited
and unsolicited responses to the SDC secondary for transmission to the host
system.
The P86 Currency Dispenser firmware will operate as a dual implementa-
tion module, that is, it can be a PROM based, or a Programmable Serial Dis-
tributed Control (SDC) secondary based peripheral. The mode of operation is
determined at run time. The firmware is PROM based by default, but it will
accept a new driver on receiving a Write Module Memory command. This
allows enhancements to be made to the device control firmware.
The P86 Currency Dispenser firmware can be configured as one of up to
eight dispensers in the operational environment. The purpose of this is to
allow up to eight dispensers to be present in a self-service terminal.
The dispenser firmware is plug compatible with previous releases of the
SDC 56XX Currency Dispenser firmware; there are no new T_CODE,
M_STATUS, SOH modules or message IDs. Some additional M_DATA val-
ues have been added to indicate faults within new dispenser mechanisms.

CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE

NOTE: The R/A and F/A Currency Dispensers are calibrated in the same
way as the other dispensers in the 58XX and 56XX ranges of ATMs and
singularity values previously calculated for these are valid for the R/A
and F/A.

When the first R/A or F/A dispenser is received in each country the local Field
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-29
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Engineering organization must establish the singularity values for each type of
currency to be dispensed. These singularity values must then be entered to
every ATM dispensing that currency, upon initial installation or whenever the
dispenser control board or the LVDT has been changed or repaired.
The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed
on a calibrated dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or
incorrectly calibrated dispenser will give incorrect results.

CALIBRATING THE DISPENSER

NOTE: Dispensers are shipped pre-calibrated by the manufacturing plant.

Calibration is required if the LVDT or control board are replaced or
NVRAM is corrupted.

The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the

dispenser control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that
exist between the singularities calculated by different LVDT assemblies
because of mechanical tolerances. The dispenser adjusts the LVDT
compensation factor automatically as bills of a known singularity value are
dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual average of good single bill
singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the
singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is
adjusted accordingly. Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H
(equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed automatically by the dispenser and
updated every 255 bills.
To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity
must be dispensed. This may be local currency or test media.
The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a ter-
minal running on the OS/2 platform using TERMINAL UTILITIES. If con-
figuring dual dispensers you will use the SYSTEM APPLICATION on NT
and should refer, for details to the NCR publication, B006-6167-E000, NCR
Self-Service Support, System Application User Guide.
You will require to use level 1 diagnostic tests to dispense cash and for
this reason you need to insert the NCR Secure ATM Diagnostics Key Disk
(Product IDG531-1001-0000) in the flex disk drive.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Prepare a cassette to accept the test currency. See Chapter 17.10 of NCR
publication BFM-0547-A000, NCR 56XX/Personas Automated Teller
Machines, Service Aids Mini-Manual for the method of adjusting cas-
settes to currency size.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-30
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette type 1. See Chapter 17.10 for
this setting
3. Load the test currency into the cassette
4. Insert the cassette into the dispenser
5. Put the ATM into supervisor mode
6. Select the TERMINAL UTILITIES option on the ATM opening menu
7. Select the CONFIGURATION option on the utilities menu
8. Select the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option on the CONFIGURA-
TION menu and check that the following menu appears:

9. Select CHANGE and respond to the prompt screens which appear.

10. Enter the provided bill size parameter for Type 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-31
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

11. Press the Enter key to accept the bill size for types 2, 3, and 4

12. Enter the provided singularity figure for Type 1

13. Press the Enter key to accept the singularity values for types 2, 3, and 4
14. Press the Enter key to accept the presentation order and check that you
are returned to the DISPENSER BILL CONFIGURATION screen
15. If you wish to continue by configuring types 5, 6 and 7 select the
EXTENDED option and repeat steps 9 to 14 above.
16. Select the CONFIG MENU activator
17. Answer Yes (1) to the prompt to return to the CONFIGURATION menu
18. Select UTILITIES MENU to return to the utilities menu
19. Select the MAINTENANCE/DIAGNOSTICS option on the UTILITIES
menu
20. Operate the dispenser security switch

NOTE: The dispenser security switch (SW1 on the dispenser control board)
is a toggle action switch which can be left in either position during nor-
mal dispenser operation.

21. Select the CONTROL MENU activator from the diagnostics menu
22. Select CASH ENABLE to ON
23. Select CURRENCY DISPENSER on the DIAGNOSTICS menu
24. At the CURRENCY DISPENSER menu select the SET NOTES option
25. Set the number of bills to be picked, from cassette type 1, to 40. Set the
remaining types to 0 (zero)
26. Select the LOOP activator at the CURRENCY DISPENSER menu
27. Select the DISPENSE test at the CURRENCY DISPENSER menu and
permit the loop count to go at least as far as 7.
The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-32
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

dispensed as described in the next section.

ESTABLISHING SINGULARITY AND SIZE

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and
size of 40 dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate.
Due to the nature of the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each
attempt. Add the five figures and take the average (divide by five and round to
the nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and size values
you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this proce-
dure should comprise of new bills. Load the currency so that the same side of
each bill is facing the truck door of the cassette. Put the bills into the cassette
in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way up and upside-down (see the illustra-
tion below). This makes sure that variations in inking are allowed for.

The singularity procedure is as follows:

1. Prepare cassettes to accept the denominations of currency you will nor-
mally be dispensing from the ATMs. See Chapter 17.3 for the method of
adjusting cassettes to currency size
2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as
required. See Chapter 17.3 for this setting
3. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cas-
settes
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-33
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

4. Insert the cassettes into the dispenser

5. Put the ATM into supervisor mode
6. Select the TERMINAL UTILITIES option on the ATM opening menu
7. Select the CONFIGURATION option on the UTILITIES menu

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-34
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

8. Select the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option on the

CONFIGURATION menu and check that the following menu appears:

9. Select LEARN and respond to the prompt screens which appear

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-35
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

10. Select SET BILLS to change the number of bills to be dispensed during
the learn

NOTE: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.

11. Select the cassette type or ALL to change the number of bills to be dis-
pensed

12. Enter the number of bills you want to dispense

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-36
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

13. When you have made all the changes you want, select LEARN MENU to
return to the LEARN BILL PARAMETERS menu

NOTE: * The menu now displays the number of bills you have selected for
each cassette.

14. Select the cassette type to learn from, or select ALL if you are measuring
currency in all the cassette types displayed
15. When the dispenser stops select BILL CONFIG to return to the DIS-
PENSER BILL CONFIGURATION menu
16. Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the
cassette type selected or all cassette types if applicable
17. Empty the purge bin as necessary
18. Repeat steps 9 to 17 until you have five readings of singularity and size
for each cassette type loaded
19. Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an aver-
age singularity and size for each cassette type

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-37
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

20. Select CHANGE at the DISPENSER BILL CONFIGURATION menu

and respond to the prompt screens which appear

21. Press Enter to accept any parameters you are not changing
22. Enter the calculated bill size and singularity figures for the cassette types
23. Select the CONFIG menu activator
24. Answer Yes (1) to the prompt to configure the new parameters and return
to the CONFIGURATION menu
25. Select UTILITIES menu to return to the UTILITIES menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now
enter level 1 diagnostics and dispense notes to test the validity of the singular-
ity values. A minimum of one cassette full of used notes and one cassette full
of new notes of each denomination should be dispensed. New notes must be
loaded with alternate packs right way up and then upside down. Bowed notes
must be loaded with the bow towards the note pusher.
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average
of 2.5 bills per transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity
and size values should be recalculated.

Calculation of Reject Rate

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for
rejected bills and total bills picked are taken from tallies.
Total Number of Rejected Bills
Reject Rate = x 100%
Total Bills Picked + Total Number of Rejected Bills

ERROR MESSAGES
Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-38
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

messages described below.

Dispenser Clear Transport Error

When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the
CONFIGURATION menu a CLEAR command is sent to clear the transport of
any bills. If the clear operation fails then the error screen shown below is
displayed. You return to the CONFIGURATION menu by selecting the
CONFIG MENU activator.

Change Parameter Errors

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error
is detected then an error message is displayed in the position indicated in the
following illustration:

The message is shown for two seconds and then you are prompted to
enter the new parameter value again. Once all the parameter values have been
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-39
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

changed and checked, the main dispenser screen reappears with the new
parameter values. If a mistake becomes apparent at this point then the user can
select CHANGE again.
The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:
ERROR - VALID RANGE XX - XXX - Parameter value is outside the
permissible range. This applies to bill sizes and singularity values
DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE - A duplicate value has been
entered in the presentation order
ERROR - INVALID SEQUENCE - The user has input fewer than four
values for the presentation order.

Learn Parameter Errors

Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from

a particular cassette type fails then, providing the error is not fatal, the opera-
tion will be tried repeatedly until successful, or a fatal error occurs. Should a
fatal error occur then the error screen shown below appears, and, after 5 sec-
onds, you are returned to the LEARN menu.

Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal

dispenser error occurs while learning parameters from the dispenser. Any
changes made up to this point can not be written to the dispenser therefore you
are returned to the CONFIGURATION menu via the CONFIG MENU activa-

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-40
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

tor:

Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an

error occurs which is not fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is
successful or until a fatal error occurs. When a fatal error is encountered then
a DISPENSER COMMS ERROR screen showing one of the following mes-
sages is displayed. The CONFIG MENU activator on the screen returns you to
the
configuration menu.
UNABLE TO READ PARAMETERS - A fatal error has occurred while
reading data from the dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured
dispenser parameters so can not continue with configuration.
CONFIGURATION NOT COMPLETED - Fatal error while writing data
to the dispenser. The configuration data is written to the dispenser
NVRAM using three separate dispenser calls. One sets the new bill sizes,
one sets the new singularity values and the third sets the new presentation
order. Because the data is split into three parts, if this type of error occurs
then the dispenser configuration is incomplete.

ADJUSTMENTS
This section describes the adjustments for the R/A and F/A Currency
Dispensers.

DRIVE BELT TENSION

Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor
to the intermediate pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-41
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

for each type of dispenser.

1. Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21
lb.) is applied to the mid span of the drive belt.
2. If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.
3. Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.
4. Tighten the screws and check the tension again.
5. Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.

R/A Drive Belt Arrangement.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-42
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A Drive Belt Arrangement

Motor Mounting
Screws
(4 Places)

1.0 N (0.21lb)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-43
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

REMOVAL OF SAFETY INTERLOCK BOARD

On both the R/A and F/A dispensers the safety interlock board is mounted
beneath the control board and attached to six stand-off pillars. On the R/A the
associated metalwork is attached to the electronics box and has to be removed
to permit the electronics box to be lifted from the dispenser as described in the
next section.

R/A
The following illustration shows how the safety interlock board and
metalwork is attached to the R/A dispenser.

2 Screws
(Both Sides)

Safety Interlock
Board Cover
Board Cover
Screws

Retraction
Harness
Bracket Screws
(Under)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-44
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A
The following illustrations show how the safety interlock board and
metalwork is attached to the F/A dispenser.

Screw

Four Screws
Hooked Over
This Side
Screw

Safety Interlock Board

(Cover Removed)

Screw Retraction Harness

Bracket Screws

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-45
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

REMOVING THE ELECTRONICS BOX (R/A)

On the R/A Currency Dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor
and pump assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides
a mounting place for the dispenser control board. Its removal gives access to
these components and also to the LVDT assembly.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-46
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Remove the electronics box as follows:

Screw

Harness

Control Board
Cover

Screw
Cable

1. Detach the metalwork associated with the safety interlock board as illus-
trated in the previous section.
2. Disconnect the cable at the bottom left-hand side of the control board.
Check that the connector is labelled with its control board connector
number.
3. Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left-hand side of
the control board cover.
4. Loosen the two screws on the left-hand side of the control board cover.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-47
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Dispenser
Harness

Cables
Screw

5. Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right-hand side of the con-
trol board cover.
6. Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.
7. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics
box.
8. Disconnect the cables from the lower right-hand side of the electronics
box.
9. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. Check that each
connector is labelled with its control board connector number.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-48
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

10. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in
position.
11. Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then
ease off the timing belt.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-49
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Plastic Timing Disk

Rivets Sensor

12. Remove the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position.
Move the sensor clear of the timing disk.

13. Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off
the rear of the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
14. Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-50
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

15. At the upper left-hand side of the electronics box remove the screw
attaching the earth strap to the presenter.

Air Hose

16. Remove the air hose from the pump.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-51
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Screw

Screw

17. Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to
the presenter.
18. Remove the two bottom screws holding the electronics box to the pick
module.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-52
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

19. Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft
and lift it clear of the dispenser.
Fitting the replacement electronics box is a reversal of the removal proce-
dure.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-53
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

REMOVING THE CONTROL BOARD

R/A Dispenser

Screw

Harness

Control Board
Cover

Screw
Cable
Remove the control board as follows:
1. Loosen the two screws on the left-hand side of the control board cover.
2. Disconnect the cable at the bottom left-hand side of the control board.
Check that the connector is labelled with its control board connector
number.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-54
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Dispenser
Harness

Cables
Screw

3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right-hand side securing
the control board cover to the electronics box.
4. Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.
5. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics
box.
6. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. Check that each
connector is labelled with its control board connector number.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-55
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Screws
Heat Sink
Screws

7. Unscrew and remove the heat sink screws.

8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the
electronics box and then remove the control board.
Fitting the replacement Control Board is a reversal of the removal proce-
dure.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-56
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A Dispenser
On the F/A dispenser the control board is attached to its mounting plate by six
Pozidrive screws into stand-offs and a further two screws through the heat
sinks, as shown in the illustration below:

Pozidrive
Screws
(8 Places)

The control board mounting plate is hung in slots in the presenter side
frames and fastened by a screw at each side in the positions indicated in the
illustration below:

Slot
(Both Sides)

Screw
(Both Sides)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-57
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

REMOVING THE MAIN MOTOR (F/A)

NOTE: For the R/A procedure, see the section “Removing the Electronics
Box”.

Proceed as follows to remove the main motor from the F/A:

SSR
Assembly

Cable
Guard
Main Motor
Screws Timing
(4 Places) Disk

Timing Disk
Sensor

Handwheel

1. Remove the cable guard (3 screws) at the left-hand side of the dispenser
and let it hang free.
2. Remove two connectors from the SSR assembly and then the 4 screws
(two at each side) and remove the assembly.
3. Remove the green handwheel (2 screws).
4. Remove the circlip and retaining washer and slip off the timing belt
between the handwheel and main motor shaft.
5. Remove the plastic rivets holding the timing disk sensor and move the
sensor clear of the timing disk.
6. Slacken the four screws holding the main motor to the side frame.
7. Ease the timing belt off the timing disk gear towards the presenter side
frame.
8. Remove the timing disk from its shaft and lift the timing belt off the main
motor pulley.
9. Remove four motor screws, slackened in step 6, and lift the motor out of
the slot in the side frame.
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pump.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-58
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

REMOVING THE LVDT

R/A Dispenser
In the R/A dispenser the LVDT assembly is attached between the side frames
of the presenter by two screws at either side. To remove the LVDT proceed as
follows:

NOTE: There is no field adjustment on this LVDT version.

1. Make sure you have access to both sides of the dispenser.

2. Remove the electronics box as described in the procedure given earlier in
this chapter.

Screws

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-59
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

3. Remove the four screws attaching the LVDT assembly to the presenter
side frames - two at either end.
4. Slide the LVDT forward out via the space vacated by the electronics box,
taking care not to trap any wires.
Fitting the replacement LVDT is a reversal of the removal procedure.

F/A
Remove the LVDT assembly from the F/A as follows:

LVDT Guard Screws

(2 at each side)

LVDT Assembly Screws

(2 at each side)

LVDT Transport
Drive Shaft

1. Remove the main motor.

2. Remove the LVDT shield (2 screws in presenter side frames at both
sides).
3. Remove the circlips inside and outside of the right-hand side frame, on
the drive shaft of the LVDT upper belt transport.
4. Slide the shaft out of the presenter right-hand side frame so that the ten-
sion is removed from the transport belts.
5. Remove the screws from the LVDT assembly (2 screws in the presenter
side frames at both sides).
6. Ease the LVDT assembly out between the belts.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-60
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

ELECTRONIC VERIFICATION OF LVDT

The following procedure verifies the LVDT adjustment:
1. Clear NVRAM
2. Load a cassette with currency of a known singularity value.
3. Put size and singularity values of the test currency into NVRAM.
4. Dispense 1000 bills.
5. Perform the Level 1 Diagnostics “Sensor/Switch Status” test.
6. Check that the LVDT calibration ratio returned in the last byte of
M_DATA is 80H ± 12.5% (that is, between 70H and 90H).

NOTE: Values outside the range given above indicate that further investiga-
tion of the LVDT may be necessary.

PICK MODULE TIMING

The R/A and F/A dispensers do not require any timing relationship to be set
between the action of the pick modules and the presenter. The pick module to
pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set. The adjustment
procedures are described in Chapter 17.9 of NCR publication BFM-0547-
A000, NCR 56XX/Personas Automated Teller Machines, Service Aids Mini-
Manual.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-61
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTIC TESTING

NID CURRENCY DISPENSER CONTROL BOARDS

The following paragraphs describe the unique features of the on-board level 0
tests on the Dispenser Control Board.

SWITCHES AND LEDS INTERFACE

On the New Interior Dispenser Control board the switches at location U17 and
LEDs D1, D2, D3, and D4 are used to select and report on the diagnostic tests
on the pcb components.

MODE OPTION
Switch SW8 (of set U17) is used to determine which method of testing is
to be used. If SW8 is OFF then diagnostics are performed in start-up mode. If
SW8 is ON then diagnostics are run in Test Mode (that is, either selected or
run-to-run tests).

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-62
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

ON-BOARD SWITCH SETTINGS

The on-board switch settings are as shown in the following table:

Test Mode SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
Start-up 0 X X X X X X X
Run To Run 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 0 0 0
Selected 1 SW7 SW6 0 <---------TEST ID---------->

0 = Switch OFF/OPEN
1 = Switch ON/CLOSED
X = Don’t Care

SW7 - Loop Option:

OFF = Run test sequence once
ON = Run test sequence indefinitely (according to error option)
SW6 - Error Option (valid only if SW7 is ON)
OFF = Halt on error
ON = Continue on error.

NOTE: Switch 8 (SW8) on the switchpack corresponds to the most signifi-

cant bit.

LEDs - While a test is being executed its test number is displayed on LEDs
D1 - D3. LEDs D4 - D8 are “OFF”.
For example:

LED D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
0 0 0 0 0 <-----Test ID------>

NOTE: LED D4 is always ON if an error code is being displayed.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-63
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

TEST SEQUENCES

Test No. Run-To-

Test Description Start-Up Selected
Hex Run
01 Micro-Controller Confidence and X X X
EPROM Sum Test
02 SRAM Data Test X X X
03 SRAM Address Test X X X
04 All RAM Data Test X

TEST DESCRIPTIONS
The following subsections define each test in turn. Each subsection identifies
the switch settings which cause the test to be executed.

TEST ROUTER

Purpose
The Test Router controls the way in which the Level 0 Diagnostics executes.

Description
The L0 switches are read and the appropriate test or test sequence executed.

Test Selection

Switch Number SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
X X X X X X X X

Test Results

LED Status
00 Start-up Passed
0D Bad Switch Setting
0E CPU Quick Check Failed

Notes
The error codes displayed by the router do not flash.
If the LEDs indicate 0FH then the MCU is probably held in a RESET state.

TEST 01H - MICROCONTROLLER CONFIDENCE AND EPROM

SUMCHECK
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-64
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Purpose
To test the Micro-Controller, MCU and check that the contents of the EPROM
is valid.

Description
The following functions are performed:
1. Check the required MCU commands, flags and registers needed to per-
form a sumcheck on the EPROM
2. Perform EPROM sumcheck.

Test Selection

Test Mode SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
Start-up 0 X X X X X X X
Run-To-Run 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 0 0 0
Selected 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 0 0 1

Test Results

LED Status
00H Pass code
08H MCU ALU fault
0DH EPROM sumcheck fail

Notes
On power up the LEDs should be 0FH. If LEDs stay at 0FH the MCU is
probably held in a RESET state.
The top two bytes of EPROM are reserved for L0 diagnostics. The checksum
value is stored here.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-65
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

TEST 02H - SRAM DATA

Purpose
To test all SRAM not allocated as non-volatile RAM (NVRAM).

Description
The following sequence is executed:
1. SRAM data area boundaries are calculated.
2. First two bytes of SRAM under test checked for any faults external to
SRAM.
3. A one is rotated through each byte in SRAM under test to check for inter-
nal SRAM faults.

Test Selection

Test Mode SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
Start-up 0 X X X X X X X
Run-To-Run 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 0 0 0
Selected 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 0 1 0

Test Results

LED Status
00H Pass code
08H Internal data error in SRAM.
0AH External data fault on SRAM

Notes
The board is populated with only one SRAM.

TEST 03H - SRAM ADDRESS

Purpose
To check that there are no hard faults on memory not allocated as NVRAM.

Description
The following sequence is executed:
1. Write 00H to all SRAM under test and verify.
2. Write 0FFH to Byte 0 of SRAM under test and verify.
3. Read back from locations given by enabling one and only one address
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-66
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

line. These are the diagonal addresses (1,2,4,8...). If an address line fails
to all of SRAM under test the data read back is 0FFH. If an address fails
internally to one bit of SRAM, then the data read back is neither 00H or
0FFH.

Test Selection

Test Mode SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
Start-up 0 X X X X X X X
Run-To-Run 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 0 0 0
Selected 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 0 1 1

Test Results

LED Status
00H Pass code
08H Data error while verifying 00H write
09H Data error while verifying 0FFH write - at address 0000H
0AH SRAM address bus error
0EH Chip select fault

Notes
If board is populated with only one SRAM then error codes refer to upper or
lower half of memory.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-67
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

TEST 04H - ALL RAM DATA

CAUTION

This test will destroy any data stored within RAM area allo-
cated as NVRAM.

Purpose
This test has the same purpose as Test 02H except that all populated RAM is
tested.

Description
As per Test 02H except that Step 1 is missed and all populated RAM is tested.

Test Selection

Test Mode SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
Selected 1 SW7 SW6 0 0 1 0 0

Test Results

LED Status
00H Pass code
08H Internal data fault in SRAM.
0AH External data fault on lower SRAM

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-68
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENUS

The currency dispenser diagnostics test menus are as follows:

Looping is allowed on certain tests.

CLEAR
The Clear test drives any bills left in the transport, into the purged bills area.

SET NOTES
The Set Notes test allows you to set the number of notes (bills) to be picked,
from each cassette type present. If the combined maximum number of notes is
greater than 40 the test fails and displays “Invalid number of notes”. You are
then prompted to “Set notes for cassette X”.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-69
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

A default of five bills is picked if no number is entered.

STACK
The Stack test picks a number of bills, from each cassette type, and stacks
them for presentation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed
using the “Set Notes” option.

NOTE: This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the
dispenser security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Ena-
ble” option on the control menu is set ON.

PRESENT
The Present test moves previously stacked bills to the exit slot for removal.

NOTE: This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the
dispenser security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Ena-
ble” option on the control menu is set ON.

DISPENSE
The Dispense test performs the Stack and Present tests in a single operation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed
using the “Set Notes” option.

NOTE: This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the
dispenser security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Ena-
ble” option on the control menu is set ON.

MAIN MOTOR
The Main Motor test tests the pick/stack transport drive motor.

SELF TEST
The Self Test test picks one bill from each pick module, with a cassette
installed, and moves the bills into the purge bin. The exit shutter is then
exercised.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-70
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

EXIT SHUTTER
The Exit Shutter test checks the exit shutter sensors while the shutter is open
and again when it is shut.

SENSOR/SWITCH STATUS
The Sensor/Switch Status test determines the state of all sensors/switches and
reports them as M_DATA.

PRESENTER BILL DRIVE

The Presenter Bill Drive test activates the presenter bill drive at two speeds,
fast and slow, in both the forward and reverse directions.

LEARN BILL PARAMETERS

The Learn Bill Parameters test instructs the firmware to learn the bill
parameters. The test is only offered for configured cassettes. Forty bills are
picked from a selected cassette, inspected for width and singularity, and then
deposited in the purge bin.
The bill width and singularity is returned as T_DATA.

PRESENTER CLAMP
The Presenter Clamp test exercises and monitors the presenter clamp and the
bill alignment mechanism. The mechanisms are monitored by their own home
sensors. Before the clamp test is performed the bill alignment mechanism will
be moved to the home position if required.
The clamp test initially checks the position of the presenter clamp. If it is
not at home, it is driven until it reaches home. When it is in the home position,
it is driven to the present position and then driven back to home. Failure in any
of these operations is reported.
The bill alignment test initially checks the position of the bill alignment
mechanism. If it is not at home, the mechanism is driven until it reaches home.
When it is in the home position, it is driven to the smallest bill position and
then driven back to home. Failure in any of these operations is reported.
The outcome of the test is returned as M_DATA.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-71
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

PICK VALVE
The Pick valve test energizes the main motor and the pick valve of the pick
module, in the selected position, for a period of 10 seconds.

NOTE: 1. No feedback is provided for this test. You have to manually con-
firm the operation of the valve.

NOTE: 2. All currency cassettes must be removed from the dispenser for
this test to run.

SDC TURNAROUND
The SDC Turnaround test carries out a turnaround test between the SDC
service and the module.

RUN-TO-RUN
The Run-To-Run test automatically performs the following tests, in sequence:
Clear
Sensor/Switch status
Presenter clamp
Presenter bill drive
Self Test
Exit shutter
Dispense (only if the security switch has been operated, refer to “Dis-
pense”).
Clear.

Gulp Feed Detector Switch

On the NID control board Gulp Feed Detect is not supported, therefore,
triggering the switch on a 56XX Pick Module fitted to a R/A or F/A dispenser
will have no effect.

M_STATUS AND M_DATA

The M_STATUS codes and M_DATA returned for the currency dispenser are
listed in the NCR publication, B006-6273-D000 56xx/Personas Self-Service
Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status Code Notebook.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-72
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Actual to Virtual Cassette Mapping

Error codes returned by a Self Test or Dispense test are mapped to the virtual
type (VT) of the cassette. This section enables you to determine which
cassette type has returned which code.
The following algorithm is used by both Sysapp (Aptra) and Terminal
Utilities (S4i):
1. Map codes returned by physical cassette types 1 to 4, into the correspond-
ing virtual type.
2. Map physical extended types 5 to 7 into the unused virtual type entries in
ascending order.
3. Set any unused virtual type slots to their physical types.
The following examples explain how the error codes can be traced to the
correct cassette position in the dispenser.

Example 1 -
Step 1
Byte 0 1 2 3 Note: In this example two cassettes are
VT 1 2 3 4 Type 1. To achieve a code for each
Physical Type 1 run the test with one removed
1 2 in turn.
Position Type
1 5 Byte 0 1 2 3
Step 2
2 1 VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
3 2 1 2 5
4 1 Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
Step 3 Byte 0 1 2 3 4 1
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
1 2 5 4
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-73
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Example 2 -

Step 1 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7 Byte 0 1 2 3
Step 2
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
6 7 3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7

Step 3 - No further mapping required. All fields filled by steps 1 and 2.

CURRENCY DISPENSER TI

Diagnostics Test Menu

The currency dispenser TI diagnostics test menu is as follows:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-74
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

TAMPER INDICATION
The Tamper Indication test displays the status of the dispenser tamper
indicator as M_DATA.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS

S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the currency dispenser are:

S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault).
02 WARNING (May require attention).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention).

TALLIES
The tallies recorded for the currency dispenser are:

Transaction Tallies

Tally Description
PKFAIL 1 Pick attempt failure. A dispense attempt reported a pick failure on virtual
cassette number 1. This tally is not incremented if the cassette low media
sensor is activated.
PKFAIL 2 As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
PKFAIL 3 As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 3.
PKFAIL 4 As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 4.
SIZEERR1 Bill size errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least
one undersize, oversize or extra bill was detected from virtual cassette
number 1.
SIZEERR2 As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 2.
SIZEERR3 As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 3.
SIZEERR4 As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 4.
DOUBLE1 Double bill errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at
least one double bill was detected from virtual cassette number 1.
DOUBLE2 As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 2.
DOUBLE3 As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 3.
DOUBLE4 As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 4.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-75
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Tally Description
REJECT1 Bills picked from virtual cassette number 1 and purged due to bill verifica-
tion errors. This count does not include good bills picked and purged dur-
ing dispense by position.
REJECT2 As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 2.
REJECT3 As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 3.
REJECT4 As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 4.
PICKED 1 Bills picked and successfully stacked from virtual cassette number 1 or
successfully diverted during dispense by position.
PICKED 2 As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
PICKED 3 As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 3.
PICKED 4 As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 4.

DISP OPS Dispense, dispense by position or clear main transport operations

attempted.
TRANSEN Dispenser transport sensor fault or transport jam. A dispense or zero dis-
pense attempt was not successful because a fault was detected on one of
the dispenser transport sensors:
The fault may have occurred for a number of reasons:
- Sensor blocked initially (jam or sensor fault).
- Bill not seen under sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
- Bill did not clear sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
- Main motor timing disk failure (jam or sensor fault).
COMMINIT Reserved
COMMRET Reserved
COMMFAIL Reserved
RES 5070 Reserved for H-8010-5070-XX-08 currency dispenser.
EXITSHUT Exit shutter faults detected. The conditions causing this tally to be incre-
mented are:
- Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter failed to open during a present
operation
- Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter is not closed on initiation of a
dispense, dispense by position, clear dispense, purge, or present opera-
tion
- EXIT_SHUTTER_TEST or DIAG_SHUTTER_TEST failed.
PRES OPS Present operations attempted.
PRSTROPS Other presenter operations attempted, for example, clamp or purge.
PRSTRJAM Presenter mechanism was not in the correct position or jammed during a
dispense, dispense by position, clear dispense, purge or present opera-
tion.
PRES_ERR Reserved
EXITSENS Reserved
PRESDISK Presenter timing disk failed to operate correctly.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-76
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Tally Description
PRESJAM Presenter bill jam was detected:
- Presenter transport sensors failed to block/clear while tracking bills
- Sensors failed static on/off test
- Sensors blocked initially on present or at end of purge.

TMS Interface Support Area Tallies

The tallies held in TMS NVRAM on the NID Currency Dispenser Control
board can be read using the Rework Diagnostics Tool.

STRAPPING

NID CURRENCY DISPENSER CONTROL BOARD

The strapping associated with the NID Currency Dispenser Control board has
the following default position:
First Dispenser, SDC command switch pack - set switches 1 to 8 to off for
normal running
Second Dispenser, SDC command switch pack - set switch 1 to on and
switches 2 to 8 to off for normal running.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-77
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

PRESENTER HARNESS LINK

The P86 firmware services five different hardware types: P86 (Long Nose
TTW), P87 (Short Nose TTW), F/A NID (Front Access Interior), 667X R/A
and F/A. The software configures timeouts for media tracking according to
which hardware type it is running on. The hardware type is identified to the
software by links in the presenter harness. The configurations are shown in the
following table for the R/A and F/A:

Dispenser Control Board Connector J6

Pin 23 to Pin 21 Pin 19 to Pin 17 Dispenser Type
Link Closed Link Open F/A
Link Closed Link Closed R/A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

PM PROCEDURES
At each service call the Customer Engineer should carry out cleaning tasks
and check for wear on timing belts and moving parts. Particular attention
should be paid to the pick arm suction cups and the air filter in the vacuum
line.

NOTE: Vacuum the dust from all areas of the currency dispenser.

CURRENCY/MEDIA CONTAINERS
Clean the purge bin and all cassettes (including spare cassettes) both
inside and out.

NOTE: Pay particular attention to the front door of the cassette.

PICK MODULES
Check that the reed switch housing is not cracked (replace if necessary)

NOTE: A note low condition may not be identified if the reed switch hous-
ing is damaged.

Inspect the pick lines for broken nozzles. Replace the pick line if broken,
cracked or bent
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-78
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

Check and replace suction cups if necessary. Read the “Suction Cups”
section following
Check alignment and clean all pick sensors/LEDs
Inspect the dispenser for worn or broken gears. Replace gears where nec-
essary. If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft are
in place. Lateral movement of shafts occur (accelerating gear wear) when
circlips fall off
Swap pick module orientation to prolong gear life (for example, on a 4
high dispenser the top and bottom modules should exchange places, as
should the middle two modules)
Lubricate the pick modules and check their mechanical adjustment; refer
to the “LUBRICATION” section in this chapter.
Ensure pick modules are properly timed.

Suction Cups

State of Health Systems - Replace suction cups when the “SOH Replace
Soon” message appears. The threshold is 103 000 bills.

Non SOH Systems - The following information is provided as a guide to

formulating replacement schedules for individual ATMs:
Lower usage ATMs (150 dispense operations daily, 1 bill per pick module
per operation); replace suction cups annually
Medium usage ATMs (250 dispense operations daily, 2 bill per pick mod-
ule per operation); replace suction cups every six months
Higher usage ATMs (350 dispense operations daily, 3 bill per pick mod-
ule per operation); replace suction cups every three months.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-79
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

PRESENTER ASSEMBLY
Look to see if the air filter above the top pick module is contaminated
with dust, and replace it if it is (Part No. 445-0612449).

NOTE: Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When you dis-

turb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest pick
module. Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick solenoid and clean the
dust from the tube and solenoid:

Measure the vacuum above and below the in-line air filter. The minimum
acceptable vacuum is 19 in. Hg /650 mbar. Both readings must be identi-
cal; replace the air filter if the two readings are not the same
Strip and clean the pump if the vacuum level is low

NOTE: To maximise ATM availability, the pump should be replaced and

the original pump should be taken to a repair
centre.

Lubricate the presenter.

SHUTTER ASSEMBLIES
For dispensers controlling facia mounted shutters, make sure both dispenser
and depository shutters are aligned and run freely.

LUBRICATION
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-80
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

This section describes the lubrication of the currency dispenser during

component replacement.

LUBRICANT TYPE
The following lubricants are recommended:

Lubricant Type
A No.2 General Purpose Oil
B Synthetic Lubricating Grease (009-0004618 = 100gm containers)

For No.2 General Purpose Oil any one of the following lubricants can be
used:
Shell Oil Co. Donax T-6
Mobil Oil Co. Mobile ATF 220
Exxon Oil Co. ATF or Esso ATF.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The following general instructions must be observed:
1. Use clean lubricants from properly labelled containers.
2. Satisfactory operation of mechanical components depends upon proper
lubrication. Follow the specific lubrication instructions in the following
paragraphs in detail.
3. Avoid excessive lubrication. Apply only that amount which will provide a
thin coating on the entire bearing area or surface, unless otherwise speci-
fied.
4. All parts to be lubricated must be free from dust, corrosion and metal
chips.
5. Lubricate bearing areas and surfaces during assembly, unless conditions
caused by subsequent handling are detrimental (for example, accumula-
tion of chips, grit, and so on) to the proper operation of the part. In those
cases lubrication should be applied after assembly.
6. Apply lubricants using the most convenient method when none is speci-
fied, that is by brushing, dipping, or oil can. Spraying is not recom-
mended.
7. Lubricate all spring hooks and spring studs with lubricant B.
8. Working clipped or riveted assemblies should not be lubricated before
riveting but only after all processes, handling, or storage involving expo-
sure to dirt or serious atmospheric contamination are past.
9. On assemblies that have shafts on which one or more moving parts are
assembled, lubricate both the shaft and the hub areas on each part with the
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-81
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

specified lubricant.
10. Lubricants can cause serious deterioration of rubber. Avoid contamination
of drive belts and drive rolls.

CAUTION

Make sure that no lubricant spills on to the teeth of gears as

this may impair their performance.

Presenter Assembly
Lubricate as follows:
Transport assemblies:
All bronze bearings - with A
Rollers (before assembly) - with A
Cam arms, rolls retained by riveted studs - with A
Twin-track cam, raceways, bore, cam roll and roll pivot stud - with B
Gears turning on stationary stud, on the stud, in the bore - with B
Toggle, pivot - with A.
All plastic bearings (before assembly) - with A.

Pick Module
Lubricate as follows:
Drive segment, inside hub, pivot stud - with A
Gears turning on stationary stud, on the stud, in the bore - with B
Cam cluster, bore and pivot stud - with B
Pick line, bearing faces - with B
Pick line hub bearing surface - with B
Plastic bearings (before assembly) - with A
Cassette latch stud - with B.

INTERNAL CABLES
The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the
Currency Dispenser. Refer to Chapter 17.9 of NCR publication BFM-0547-
A000 NCR 56XX/Personas Automated Teller Machines, Service Aids Mini-
Manual, for Aria pick module internal cables.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-82
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

RETRACTION HARNESS
AC P1 LIVE J7

VVV VVV VVVVV

V VV
2 4
NEUTRAL
1 3
EARTH
3 2
DISP AC P1 J8
LIVE I/L

VVV
2 4
To Main Motor NEUTRAL I/L
1 5
Harness EARTH
3 6
NEUTRAL 120V - N J1
4

Interlock Board
1
LIVE 120V - L
5
2
GND GND
6
I/L SW J2
VV

V V V V VV
Interlock 1 2
I/L RTN
Switch 2 6
J1
+24 V I/L RTN
VV

8 7
+24 V I/L
16 3
+24 V
1
+24 V RTN
5
V VV VV VVVV V

4
12
Dispenser Control Board

+12 V
VV

10 10
2 +12 V RTN
2
+5 V
13
+5 V RTN DC_P1
5
9 +5 V 9
VVVV

+5 V RTN
1 1
+24 V 11
12
4 +24 V RTN
3

MSC_P1 SAFE_SHUTTER
+5 V
VVVVVVVV

VVVVVVVV

5 5
+5 V RTN 1 1
+24 V 6 6
+24 V RTN 2 2
DISP LOCK To Facia
VVVV

5 4 4 Harness J2
DISP LOCK RTN and then
6 3 3
DISP SOL to Shutter PCB
14 7 7
DISP OPEN
7 8 8

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-83
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

DISPENSER MAIN MOTOR (R/A)

AC
J1
NEUTRAL 1 1

V
V

Main Motor
LIVE 2 1 SSR SSR 2 2
V

V V
3
GROUND 3 V V
V
1 2
V Motor Run
Frame Capacitor
Ground 1
SSR J1
1 4 SSR
V

2 3 SSR
V

Frame Frame
V

V
Ground 2 Ground 3

DISPENSER MAIN MOTOR (F/A)

DISP AC
J1 Motor
P1 J1
1 NEUTRAL 33 1
V

V
V

Main Motor

2 LIVE
11
V

1 SSR SSR 2 2
V
V

V V

GROUND 3
3 22
V
V

V V
V

1 2
V Motor Run
Frame Capacitor
Ground 1
SSR J1
1 3 SSR
V

2 4 SSR
V

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-84
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

R/A DISPENSER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

AC Interlock Main
SSR P5 Motor

Sensors: Exit, Transport Sensors 3, 3A, 4,

Purge Overfill, Stack.
UNI
DC J8
J1 LEDs: Exit, Transport LEDs 3, 3A, 4, Purge
M1 Overfill, Stack.

Purge Bin Present Switch

J1 Motorized Shutter Control Board

SDC Bus J2
Clamp Motor

J13 Align Motor

Dispenser Control Board

Present Motor

Timing Disks - Main, Present, Clamp Sensors,

J6
Up, Down, Align Home, Configuration Loops

J9 Note Thickness Sensor/LVDT

Pick Sensor
Pick LED
J4 J1 Double J5 Solenoid Valve
Pick Pick Arm Timing
Interface Disk

J4 To Lower Pick
Module I/F (P1)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-85
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 1 OF 4

J8 P1
AC MOT ON (WHITE) 2
1

V V
V V V V V V V

+5 V (BLACK) SSR
2 1
TSEN1 (GREEN) G T1
3

V V
TSEN1+ (WHITE)
5 W SENSOR
T1LED+ (RED)
4 R

V V
T1LED (BLACK) T1 LED
6 B
TSEN2 (GREEN)
7 G T2

V V
TSEN2+ (WHITE)
9 W SENSOR
V V V V V

T2LED+ (RED)
8 R

V V
T2LED (BLACK) T2 LED
10 B
11 TSEN3 (GREEN)
G T3
V V

13 W SENSOR
LINK1 (GREEN) G T3A
V V
Dispenser Control Board

TSEN3+ (WHITE) W SENSOR

12 T3LED+ (RED)
R
V V
V V

T3
14 B LED
LINK2 (BLACK) R
V V

T3A
T3LED (BLACK) B LED
TSEN4 (GREEN)
V V V V V V V V V V

15 G T4
V V

TSEN4+ (WHITE)
17 W SENSOR
TLED4+ (RED)
16 R
V V

TLED4 (BLACK) T4 LED

18 B
T5SEN (GREEN)
19
V V

G T5
T5SEN+ (WHITE)
21 W SENSOR
T5LED+ (RED)
20 R
V V

T5LED (BLACK) T5 LED

22 B
GND
23 C Purge Bin
V V

PURGE INb
24 NO Microswitch

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-86
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 2 OF 4)

J9 PL1
N/A
1 1

V V V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V
N/A
2 2
DATA P
3 3
DATA N 4
4

LVDT
RESET P 5
5
RESET N
6 6
N/A 7
7
N/A
8 8
SIG REF 9
9
N/A
10 10

J13
Dispenser Control Board

PRES A+
4
V V V V

V V V V
7
PRES C+
8 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ Motor
2
PRES D+
2 1

9 CLAMP A+ 1
V V V V

V V V V

10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4

ALIGN A+ 1
V V V V

V V V V

11
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
5
ALIGN D+
6 4

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-87
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 3 OF 4)

J6
CLAMP UP LED (RED)
R
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V

V V V V
1
GND (BLACK) Clamp
3 B
+5 V (WHITE) Up
5 W Sensor
CLAMP UP (GREEN)
7 G
CLAMP DOWN (RED)
9 R

V V V V
GND (BLACK) Clamp
11 B
+5 V (WHITE) Down
13 W Sensor
15 CLAMP DOWN (GREEN)
G
ALIGN LED (RED)

V V V V
2 R
Dispenser Control Board

GND (BLACK)
4 B Align
+5 V (WHITE) Home
6 W
ALIGN HOME (GREEN)
8 G
PRES TDISK (RED)
10 R
V V V V

GND (BLACK)
12 B Timing
+5 V (WHITE) Disk
14 W
PRES TDISK (GREEN)
16 G
MAIN TD LED (RED)
18
V V V V

R
GND (BLACK) Main
20 B
+5 V (WHITE) Timing
22 W Disk
MAIN TDISK (GREEN)
24 G
19 CONFIG 1a P87_J1 P87_P1
CONFIG 1b For firmware to recognize
17
CONFIG 2a R/A Dispenser:
23 MUD_J1 MUD_P1 Link CONFIG 1 is Closed
CONFIG 2b Link CONFIG 2 is Closed
21

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-88
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

R/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 4 OF 4)

J4 J1
CAS ID1- 40C

V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
1

V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
2 GND
39
CAS ID2- 38
3
GND 37
4
CAS ID3-
5 36
6 GND
35
CAS ID4-
7 34
GND
8 33
CAS TEMP-
9 32
GND
10 31
CASLOW-
11 30
12 GND
29
13 GULP- 28
LEDON_PICK
14 27

Pick Interface Board

GND 26
15
GND
16 25
Dispenser Control Board

S0 24
17
S1 23
18
DISABLE-
19 22
COILEN-
20 21
PICK
21 20
PSEN1
22 19
PSEN2
23 18
PSEN3
24 17
PSEN4
25 16
PICKTXD
26 15
27 PICK RXD
14
GND
28 13
29 GND
12
+12 V
30 11
+5 V
31 10
+5 V
32 9
GND
33 8
GND
34 7
35 GND
6
36 GND
5
+24 V
37 4
+24 V
38 3
+24 V
39 2
+24 V
40 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-89
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

AC Interlock Main
SSR P5 Motor

Sensors: Exit, Transport Sensors 3, 3A, 4,

Purge Overfill, Stack.
UNI
DC J8
J1 LEDs: Exit, Transport LEDs 3, 3A, 4, Purge
M1 Overfill, Stack.

Purge Bin Present Switch

J1 Motorized Shutter Control Board

SDC Bus J2
Clamp Motor

J13 Align Motor

Dispenser Control Board

Present Motor

Timing Disks - Main, Present, Clamp Sensors,

J6
Up, Down, Align Home, Configuration Loop

J9 Note Thickness Sensor/LVDT

Pick Sensor
Pick LED
J4 J1 Double J5 Solenoid Valve
Pick Pick Arm Timing
Interface Disk

J4 To Lower Pick
Module I/F (P1)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-90
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 1 OF 4)

J8 P1
AC MOT ON (WHITE) 2
1

V V
V V V V V V V
+5 V (BLACK) SSR
2 1
TSEN1 (GREEN) G T1
3

V V
TSEN1+ (WHITE)
5 W SENSOR
T1LED+ (RED)
4 R

V V
T1LED (BLACK) T1 LED
6 B
TSEN2 (GREEN)
7 G T2

V V
TSEN2+ (WHITE)
9 W SENSOR
V V V V V

T2LED+ (RED)
8 R

V V
T2LED (BLACK) T2 LED
10 B
11 TSEN3 (GREEN)
G T3
V V
13 W SENSOR
LINK1 (GREEN) G T3A

V V
Dispenser Control Board

TSEN3+ (WHITE) W SENSOR

12 T3LED+ (RED)
R
V V
V V

T3
14 B LED
LINK2 (BLACK) V V
R T3A
T3LED (BLACK) B LED
TSEN4 (GREEN)
V V V V V V V V V V

15 G T4
V V

TSEN4+ (WHITE)
17 W SENSOR
TLED4+ (RED)
16 R
V V

TLED4 (BLACK) T4 LED

18 B
T5SEN (GREEN)
19
V V

G T5
T5SEN+ (WHITE)
21 W SENSOR
T5LED+ (RED)
20 R
V V

T5LED (BLACK) T5 LED

22 B
GND
23 C Purge Bin
V V

PURGE INb
24 NO Microswitch

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-91
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 2 OF 4)

J9 PL1
N/A
1 1

V V V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V

N/A
2 2
DATA P
3 3
DATA N 4
4

LVDT
RESET P 5
5
RESET N
6 6
N/A 7
7
N/A
8 8
SIG REF 9
9
Dispenser Control Board

N/A
10 10

J13
PRES A+
4
V V V V

V V V V

7
PRES C+
8 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ Motor
2
PRES D+
2 1

9 CLAMP A+ 1
V V V V

V V V V

10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4

ALIGN A+ 1
V V V V

V V V V

11
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
5
ALIGN D+
6 4

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-92
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 3 OF 4)

J6
CLAMP UP LED (RED)
R
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V

V V V V
1
GND (BLACK) Clamp
3 B
+5 V (WHITE) Up
5 W Sensor
CLAMP UP (GREEN)
7 G
CLAMP DOWN (RED)
9 R

V V V V
GND (BLACK) Clamp
11 B
+5 V (WHITE) Down
13 W Sensor
CLAMP DOWN (GREEN)
15 G
ALIGN LED (RED)
Dispenser Control Board

V V V V
2 R
GND (BLACK)
4 B Align
+5 V (WHITE) Home
6 W
ALIGN HOME (GREEN)
8 G
PRES TDISK (RED)
10 R
V V V V

GND (BLACK)
12 B Timing
+5 V (WHITE) Disk
14 W
PRES TDISK (GREEN)
16 G
MAIN TD LED (RED)
18
V V V V

R
GND (BLACK) Main
20 B
+5 V (WHITE) Timing
22 W Disk
MAIN TDISK (GREEN)
24 G
CONFIG 1
23
21
19
17

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-93
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

F/A PRESENTER CABLING (SHEET 4 OF 4)

J4 J1
CAS ID1- 40C
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
1

V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
2 GND
39
CAS ID2- 38
3
GND 37
4
CAS ID3-
5 36
6 GND
35
CAS ID4-
7 34
GND
8 33
CAS TEMP-
9 32
GND
10 31
CASLOW-
11 30
12 GND
29
13 GULP- 28
LEDON_PICK
14 27

Pick Interface Board

GND 26
15
GND
16 25
Dispenser Control Board

S0 24
17
S1 23
18
DISABLE-
19 22
COILEN-
20 21
PICK
21 20
PSEN1
22 19
PSEN2
23 18
PSEN3
24 17
PSEN4
25 16
PICKTXD
26 15
27 PICK RXD
14
GND
28 13
29 GND
12
+12 V
30 11
+5 V
31 10
+5 V
32 9
GND
33 8
GND
34 7
35 GND
6
36 GND
5
+24 V
37 4
+24 V
38 3
+24 V
39 2
+24 V
40 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-94
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT

POWER INTERFACE
The Currency Dispenser Control Board is powered directly from the ATM
power supply via the 16-way right-angled header J1. Provision is made on the
connector to control the motorized shutter interface board. The shutter signals
are as follows:

Signal Description
SHUT_OPEN High = shutter open
SHUT_LOCK High = shutter locked
SHUT_ONb Low = shutter motor on

The pinout of connector J1 is as follows:

+5 V 9 1 GND
+12 V 10 2 GND
-12 V 11 3 GND
+24 V 12 4 GND
GND 13 5 SHUT_LOCK
SHUT_ONb 14 6 GND
GND 15 7 SHUT_OPEN
+24V_INT 16 8 FRAME_GND

SDC INTERFACE
The SDC Interface connector (J2) is a 10-way right angle latched header with
the pinout shown below. The SDC primary is located in the core of the ATM.

N/C 1 2 N/C
DATA_P 3 4 DATA_N
RESET_P 5 6 RESET_N
N/C 7 8 N/C
SIG_REF 9 10 N/C

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-95
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE

The RS-232 Communications Interface connector (J3) is a 9-way right-angled
D-type with the following pinout:

GND 5 9 RS232_RI0
RS232_DTR0 4 8 RS232_CTS0
RS232_TXD0 3 7 RS232_RTS0
RS232_RXD0 2 6 RS232_DSR0
RS232_CD0 1

PICK MODULES
Connector J4 provides the interface to the currency dispenser pick modules. It
is a 40-way right-angle latched header connector with the following pinout:

CAS_ID1b 1 2 GND
CAS_ID2b 3 4 GND
CAS_ID3b 5 6 GND
CAS_ID4b 7 8 GND
CAS_TEMPb 9 10 GND
CASLOWb 11 12 GND
(No connection on NID) GULPb 13 14 LEDON_PICK
GND 15 16 GND
S0 17 18 S1
DISABLEb 19 20 COILENb
PICK 21 22 PSEN1
PSEN2 23 24 PSEN3
PSEN4 25 26 PICK_TXD
PICK_RXD 27 28 GND
GND 29 30 +12 V
+5 V 31 32 +5 V
GND 33 34 GND
GND 35 36 GND
+24 V 37 38 +24 V
+24 V 39 40 +24 V

STEPPER MOTOR SENSORS

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-96
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

4-way right-angle header J5 and 24-way right angle header J6 provide the
interface to the stepper motor sensors. The connector pinouts are as follows:

J5 Pinout

CLAMP_MID_LED 1
GND 2
+5V_MID_SEN 3
CLAMP_MID 4

J6 Pinout

CLAMP_UP_LED 1 2 ALIGN_LED
GND 3 4 GND
+5V_CLAMP_UP 5 6 +5V_ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_UP 7 8 ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_DOWN_LED 9 10 PRES_TD_LED
GND 11 12 GND
+5V_CLAMP_DOWN 13 14 +5V_PRES_TDISK
CLAMP_DOWN 15 16 PRES_TDISK
CONF1 17 18 MAIN_TD_LED
GND 19 20 GND
CONF2 21 22 +5V_MAIN_TDISK
GND 23 24 MAIN_TDISK

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-97
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

ON-BOARD SHUTTER
Connector J7 on the NID board provides the interface to the on-board shutter
assembly solenoid and sensors (not used on the R/A or F/A dispensers). This
is an 8-way right angle header with the following pinout:

GND 1 2 OPEN_LED_POS
GND 3 4 GND
LOCK_LED_POS 5 6 SHUT_LOCK
SHUT_OPEN 7 8 GND

TRANSPORT LEDS AND SENSORS

Connector J8 carries the signals to transport LEDs and sensors 1 to 5, and also
provides interfaces to the purge bin and ac motor. This connector is a 24-way
right-angle header with the following pinout:

AC_MOTOR_ONb 1 2 +5 V
TSEN1 3 4 T1LED_POS
TSEN1_POS 5 6 T1LED
TSEN2 7 8 T2LED_POS
TSEN2_POS 9 10 T2LED
TSEN3 11 12 T3LED_POS1
TSEN3_POS 13 14 T3LED
TSEN4 15 16 T4LED_POS
TSEN4_POS 17 18 T4LED
TSEN5 19 20 T5LED_POS
TSEN5_POS 21 22 T5LED
GND 23 24 PURGE_INb

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-98
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

NOTE THICKNESS SENSOR / LVDT

The Note Thickness sensor (NTS) or LVDT is connected to 10-way right
angled latch header connector J9. The pinout is as follows:

+5 V 1 2 GND
STRAIN_REF 3 4 NTS_1
NTS_2 5 6 NULL_NTS
NULL_OK 7 8 N/C
LVDT_GAIN_SELb 9 10 N/C

SPLIT PURGE BIN INTERFACE

Connector J10 on the NID board provides the interface to the split purge bin
(future development).

INTELLIGENT CASSETTE INTERFACE

10-way right-angle header connector J11 provides the interface to the
intelligent cassette module. The connector has the following pinout:

+24 V 1 2 +24 V
GND 3 4 GND
+5 V 5 6 GND
ICS_TXD 7 8 ICS_RXD
GND 9 10 N/C

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-99
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

RDI INTERFACE
The RDI interface is provided by 20-way vertical header connector J12 with
the following pinout:

+5 V 1 2 RDIRESb
SW0 3 4 RDIRES2b
SW1 5 6 LED1
SW2 7 8 LED2
SW3 9 10 N/C
SW4 11 12 LED3
SW5 13 14 LED4
SW6 15 16 PICK_RXD
SW7 17 18 TXD
GND 19 20 GND

STEPPER MOTORS
Connector J13 provides the interface to the three stepper motors used in the
currency dispenser. This is a 12-way right-angled header with the following
pinout:

PRES_A_POS 7 1 PRES_B_POS
PRES_C_POS 8 2 PRES_D_POS
CLAMP_A_POS 9 3 CLAMP_B_POS
CLAMP_C_POS 10 4 CLAMP_D_POS
ALIGN_A_POS 11 5 ALIGN_B_POS
ALIGN_C_POS 12 6 ALIGN_D_POS

JTAG INTERFACE
Connector J15 provides the JTAG interface to the Intel386 EX microprocessor
and CPLDs. This is a 10-way vertical header connector with the following
pinout:

+5V 1 2 TCK
GND 3 4 TDI
GND 5 6 TDO_2
GND 7 8 TMS
N/C 9 10 TRSTb

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-100
 REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

RS-232 DIAGNOSTIC INTERFACE

Connector J17, provides the RS-232 diagnostic interface for the Currency
Dispenser Control Board. It is a 10-way vertical header with the following
pinout:

RS232_CD1 1 2 RS232_DSR1
RS232_RXD1 3 4 RS232_RTS1
RS232_TXD1 5 6 RS232_CTS1
RS232_DTR1 7 8 RS232_RI1
GND 9 10 N/C

HISTORY

MODULE: R/A PRESENTER

Old Part New Part

Change
Number Number Interchangeability Comments
Number
445- 445-
0677211

MODULE: ELECTRONICS BOX 120 V

Old Part New Part

Change
Number Number Interchangeability Comments
Number
445- 445-

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-101
REAR AND FRONT ACCESS BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSERS

MODULE: ELECTRONICS BOX 230 V

Old Part New Part

Change
Number Number Interchangeability Comments
Number
445- 445-

MODULE: F/A PRESENTER 120V

Old Part New Part

Change
Number Number Interchangeability Comments
Number
445- 445-

MODULE: F/A PRESENTER 230V

Old Part New Part

Change
Number Number Interchangeability Comments
Number
445- 445-

MODULE: NID/P86 CONTROL BOARD

Old Part New Part

Change
Number Number Interchangeability Comments
Number
445- 445-
0677423

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.4-102
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

CONTENTS

Envelope Depository and Envelope

Dispenser

Chapter 26.5

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................. 26.5-1

DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 26.5-1
DEPOSITORY ................................................................................. 26.5-2
DEPOSITORY BINS ....................................................................... 26.5-3
ENVELOPE DISPENSER ............................................................... 26.5-3
Envelope Cassette .......................................................................... 26.5-3
Pick Mechanism ............................................................................. 26.5-4
ENVELOPE SPECIFICATION ....................................................... 26.5-4
Size ................................................................................................. 26.5-4
Paper............................................................................................... 26.5-5
Construction ................................................................................... 26.5-5
Colour............................................................................................. 26.5-5

TEST TOOLS ..................................................................................... 26.5-6

STRAPPING ....................................................................................... 26.5-6

ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................ 26.5-6

DRIVE BELTS................................................................................. 26.5-6
PRINTHEAD REPLACEMENT...................................................... 26.5-7
Ink Pad Repositioning .................................................................... 26.5-7
ENVELOPE LENGTH..................................................................... 26.5-8

TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................... 26.5-9
SENSORS......................................................................................... 26.5-9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-i
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Depository Sensor Locations........................................................26.5-11

Envelope Dispenser Sensor Locations..........................................26.5-12
RETARD ROLLER SHAFT ..........................................................26.5-14
STATE OF HEALTH REPORTING..............................................26.5-15

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ....................................................26.5-15

ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY ..........................................................26.5-15
Printhead Cleaning........................................................................26.5-15
ENVELOPE DISPENSER..............................................................26.5-17

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS................................................................26.5-17
CONTROL BOARD (SECONDARY PROCESSOR TEST) ........26.5-17
INTERFACES ................................................................................26.5-18
LED Interface ...............................................................................26.5-18
Remote Diagnostic Interface (RDI)..............................................26.5-19
TEST SEQUENCE .........................................................................26.5-19
TEST DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................................26.5-20
TEST ROUTER ..............................................................................26.5-20
Purpose .........................................................................................26.5-20
Test Results...................................................................................26.5-20
Notes .............................................................................................26.5-20
TEST 01H - MICROCONTROLLER CONFIDENCE AND EPROM
SUMCHECK ..................................................................................26.5-20
Purpose .........................................................................................26.5-20
Test Results...................................................................................26.5-20
Notes .............................................................................................26.5-21
TEST 02H - SRAM DATA ............................................................26.5-21
Purpose .........................................................................................26.5-21
Test Results...................................................................................26.5-21
Notes .............................................................................................26.5-21
TEST 03H - SRAM ADDRESS .....................................................26.5-21
Purpose .........................................................................................26.5-21
Test Results...................................................................................26.5-21
SELECTED TEST MODE .............................................................26.5-22
Test 04H - Test All RAM Data (Clear NVRAM) ........................26.5-22

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS................................................................26.5-23
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY ..........................................................26.5-23
DEPOSIT AND PRINT DATA....................................................26.5-23
DEPOSIT AND PRINT SERIAL NO..........................................26.5-24
SHUTTER/SENSOR STATUS....................................................26.5-24
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-ii JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

INCREMENT SERIAL NUMBER ............................................. 26.5-24

CLEAR TRANSPORT ................................................................ 26.5-24
DISABLE DEPOSITORY ........................................................... 26.5-25
SDC TURNAROUND ................................................................. 26.5-25
RUN TO RUN.............................................................................. 26.5-25
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY TI ..................................................... 26.5-26
TAMPER INDICATION ............................................................. 26.5-26
ENVELOPE DISPENSER ............................................................. 26.5-26
PRESENT..................................................................................... 26.5-26
RETRACT.................................................................................... 26.5-26
SENSOR STATUS ...................................................................... 26.5-26
SDC TURNAROUND ................................................................. 26.5-26
RUN TO RUN.............................................................................. 26.5-27

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................... 26.5-27

ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY.......................................................... 26.5-27
S_DATA....................................................................................... 26.5-27
Tallies ........................................................................................... 26.5-27
ENVELOPE DISPENSER ............................................................. 26.5-28
S_DATA....................................................................................... 26.5-28
Tallies ........................................................................................... 26.5-28

CABLE AND CONNECTOR DATA .............................................. 26.5-29

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM .............................................. 26.5-29
CONNECTOR PINOUTS .............................................................. 26.5-30
J1 – SDC I/F................................................................................. 26.5-30
J2 – Power ................................................................................... 26.5-30
J3 – Motors................................................................................... 26.5-30
J4 – Bin-In.................................................................................... 26.5-30
J5 – Envelope Dispenser I/F......................................................... 26.5-31
J6 – Sensors.................................................................................. 26.5-31
J7 – Facia Interface ...................................................................... 26.5-31
J8 – Ink Jet Printhead .................................................................. 26.5-32
J9 – Remote Diagnostics ............................................................. 26.5-32
CABLING INFORMATION.......................................................... 26.5-33
Sensor Harness ............................................................................. 26.5-33
Motor Harness .............................................................................. 26.5-34
Power and Shutter Harness .......................................................... 26.5-34
SDC Harness ................................................................................ 26.5-35
Bin-In Switch Harness ................................................................. 26.5-35
Printhead Harness......................................................................... 26.5-36
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-iii
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Flexible Printhead Interface Board...............................................26.5-37

Envelope Dispenser Harness ........................................................26.5-38

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-iv JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.5

Envelope Depository and Envelope

Dispenser

INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the programmable printing Envelope Depository with
Envelope Dispenser Option (ED-EDO) module available as a feature on the
Personas M-series (66XX) ATMs.

DESCRIPTION

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-1
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

The ED-EDO module combines the functions of a programmable printing

depository with those of an envelope dispenser. Under application control, an
envelope can be presented to the cardholder and then deposited by the
cardholder via a single facia access slot.
The module can be configured two ways:
Depository only
Depository with envelope dispenser.

DEPOSITORY
The depository consists of a motorised transport with various sensors, an ink-
jet based printing system and a depository bin. A shutter on the facia controls
access to the depository transport. (Shutters are described in chapter 17.3 of
NCR publication BFM-0547-A000, NCR 56XX/Personas Automated Teller
machines, Service Aids Mini-Manual). The module is controlled by a
microprocessor-based PCB with firmware on an EPROM.
A typical deposit operation is as follows.
1. The customer application opens the facia shutter and signals to the card-
holder that the ATM is ready to accept an envelope.
2. The envelope is inserted through the facia slot where the transport pulls it
through the shutter.
3. When the envelope has cleared the first (entry) sensor, the shutter is
closed.
4. When the envelope has cleared the second sensor, the envelope is printed
with either a 4-digit serial number or a code of up to 80 characters defined
by the customer application.
5. When the envelope has cleared the exit sensor is is assumed to have fallen
into the depository bin and the transport is stopped.
As the bin becomes full the envelope cannot fall clear of the exit sensor
and a bin-full condition is reported to the system. On the third successive
occurrence of the exit sensor remaining blocked the bin-full condition
becomes fatal and the depository is disabled.

NOTE: If an envelope dispenser is fitted the bin-full condition becomes

fatal the first time the exit sensor is blocked.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-2 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

DEPOSITORY BINS
The depository can use the following types of bin:
Standard – an open-topped bin allowing easy access to deposited media
Standard with access door – open-topped and with a door at the rear to
allow access to deposited media without removing the bin from the ATM
Latchfast – a closed design with a media entry slot which is opened and
closed automatically as the bin is inserted and withdrawn from the depos-
itory. Access to deposited media is through a door at the rear secured by a
sealable catch.

ENVELOPE DISPENSER
The envelope dispenser is a separate module attached to the depository. It is
controlled by the depository firmware and shares the external part of the
depository transport.
The envelope dispenser consists of two main components – a removable
envelope cassette, and a pick mechanism and transport.

Envelope Cassette
The envelope cassette holds a stack of envelopes up to 150mm (5.90in.) deep,
standing on their short end. The envelopes rest against plate which is sprung
so that it pushes the stack towards the pick mechanism.
When it is installed in the ATM, the envelope cassette can only be
removed from the dispenser after first removing the depository bin (see the
following illustration).

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-3
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Pick Mechanism
The pick mechanism is attached to the depository transport. The mechanism
uses eccentric rollers and a clutch roller to nudge the first envelope into
movement and flat belts to drive the envelope into a narrow throat where soft
retard rollers on a spring-loaded shaft ensure that only a single envelope is
driven into the transport.

ENVELOPE SPECIFICATION

Size
The size of envelope that can be used in the PPD-EDO is as follows:
Length:
Minimum: 203mm (8.0in.)
Maximum: 254mm (10.0in.)
Width:
Minimum: 99mm (3.90in.)
Maximum: 111mm (4.37in.).

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-4 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Paper
The paper used to make the envelopes must have the following characteristics:
Paper Weight: 77 to 100gm/m²
Burst Strength: 1.34 to 3.8kg/cm²
Percentage of filler material: ≤ 20%
Sizing COBB: 28gm/m²
Smoothness Bendtsen: 450mls/min
pH value: 5 to 7.

Construction
The recommended construction details for the envelopes are:
Flap on the longest side
Self-seal flap with adhesive along the complete length of the flap
No apertures or holes are permissible within a central band 54mm
(2.13in.) wide along the complete length of the envelope.
Moisture dependent seals are not recommended for ATM use.

Colour
The preferred background colour of the envelope within the print area is
white. However, alternatives are acceptable provided that characters are
legible when produced by black or purple inks.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-5
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

TEST TOOLS
None.

STRAPPING
For normal operation of the ED-EDO the position of the switches on the
control board switchpack should be as follows:
Switches 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, and 8 set to OFF
Switches 5 and 6 set to ON:
Switch 5 = ON (short infeed, 66XX default position), switch 5 = OFF
(long or mid infeed)
Switch 6 = ON (Threshold counts on printhead).

ADJUSTMENTS

DRIVE BELTS
For optimum reliability it is important that the drive belts are set to the correct
tension. Incorrectly tensioned belts cause excessive wear of both the belts and
bearings.
The tension should be set so that light finger pressure applied to the mid-
dle of a belt causes a deflection of about 3mm (0.12in.).
First adjust the tension on timing belt A by repositioning the motor/gear-
box assembly which is held by two securing screws. Adjust the belt in by
loosening the screw that is further from the belt to be adjusted and rotating the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-6 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

motor/gearbox assembly about the other screw until the tension is correct.

Bracket Assembly
Belt B

Belt A
3 mm

3 mm

Motor/Gearbox Securing Screws

When the tension is achieved on belt A, adjust belt B by slackening the

screws on the bracket assembly and moving the bracket by means of the elon-
gated slot.

PRINTHEAD REPLACEMENT
The printhead must be replaced with a Hewlett Packard (HP) ink jet printhead
cartridge, HP Part No. HP C6602A, (NCR Part No. 009-0019525).
The replacement interval is:
Six monthly (estimated on 80 transactions per day of 80 characters per
transaction), or
Sooner if the error message “End of Life Reached, Replace Printhead
Now” is displayed.

Ink Pad Repositioning

At every service call the absorbent ink pad should be checked and, if
necessary, repositioned to bring a fresh area into use.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-7
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

ENVELOPE LENGTH

Envelope Rail
Spacer Plate

Spacer

RearDoor
Cassette Door

Plastic spacers attached between the envelope cassette door and the envelope
rail are segmented to assist accurate cutting to accommodate the customer’s
envelope length. With the full ten segments fitted, the envelope space is suited
to the minimum length of envelope, 203 mm (8.0 in.). Each spacer segment
removed increases this space by 5 mm (0.2 in.). With all ten segments
removed, the maximum length of envelope, 254 mm (10 in.) can be loaded
into the cassette. Segments should be removed from the spacers so that the
customer’s envelopes fit into the cassette with, ideally, 1 or 2 mm to spare (but
no more than 5 mm - 1 segment).
The spacers can be cut with a sharp Stanley knife or small steel saw.
Remove any burrs left on the legs of the spacers with a smooth file.
The following table tells you where to make the cut for the measured

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-8 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

length of envelope.

Measured Length of Envelope

Millimetres Inches Cut above Segment Number:
203 - 207 8.00 - 8.15 Do not cut
208 - 213 8.19 - 8.38 9
214 - 218 8.42 - 8.58 8
219 - 223 8.62 - 8.78 7
224 - 228 8.82 - 8.97 6
229 - 233 9.01 - 9.17 5
234 - 238 9.21 - 9.37 4
239 - 243 9.41 - 9.57 3
244 - 248 9.60 - 9.76 2
249 - 253 9.80 - 9.96 1
254 10 Cut off segment 1

TROUBLESHOOTING

SENSORS
The control PCB monitors the hardware using infrared sensors comprising
LEDs paired with photo-transistors. The LEDs and sensors are small, plastic
assemblies hard-wired into the module harness. On the envelope depository
itself there are four transport sensors, an anti-fish sensor and a timing disk
sensor. The entry, second and exit sensors comprise separate LED and photo-
transistor modules. The other sensors are single opto-electronic switches.
If the depository uses a latchfast bin then a microswitch is fitted to act as
a “bin-in” sensor.
In addition to the depository sensors, the control PCB monitors two sen-
sors on the security shutter and the four sensors on the envelope dispenser (if
fitted).
As the depository hardware and firmware is designed to be compatible
with older ATM software, confusion can arise over the names of some sen-
sors. The following table lists and briefly describes all the sensors in the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-9
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

depository.

Name Alternative Names Description

Entry Detects envelopes entering the trans-
port during deposits and being pre-
sented when dispensed.
Second Print (In electronics This sensor is used to track the move-
Envelope Depository

schematics) ment of envelopes and also to trigger

printing during a deposit.
Merge Gate Located on the Merge Gate mecha-
nism, this sensor is used to track the
movement of envelopes from the dis-
penser transport into the external trans-
port.
Exit Bin Full Detects envelopes clearing the trans-
port into the depository bin.
Timing Disk Monitors rotation of the depository
transport drive shafts.
Bin-In Detects the presence of a depository
(Latchfast only) bin.
Anti-Fish Tamper or Fish Located on the Anti-Fish finger this sen-
sor monitors the position of the finger.
Transport Exit or Present Detects envelopes within the dispenser
transport.
Dispenser
Envelope

Timing Disk Monitors rotation of the dispenser

transport drive shafts.
Cassette Low Monitors the approximate level of enve-
lopes remaining in the cassette.
Cassette Present Detects the presence of the envelope
cassette.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-10 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Depository Sensor Locations

Exit (Bin Full)

Anti-Fish Finger
Merge gate
Second

Entry

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-11
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Envelope Dispenser Sensor Locations

The following illustrations show the location of the sensors in the envelope
dispenser pick mechanism and transport.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-12 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Transport Sensor

Timing Disk
Sensor

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-13
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

RETARD ROLLER SHAFT

At each service call check that the retard roller shaft is seated correctly in its
location in the envelope dispenser side frames. If the shaft is dislodged during
clearance of an envelope jam it will cause subsequent jams owing to several
envelopes being fed into the transport together.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-14 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

STATE OF HEALTH REPORTING

In order to maintain compatibility with previous hardware and applications,
SOH messages have not been updated to reflect the new hardware in the PPD-
EDO module.
For the depository, the following messages are misleading:

SOH Code: Meaning:

303H Transport jammed at “At Print” sensor.
304H Average number of successful operations between jams at “At Print”
sensor below threshold.

In both these cases the “At Print” sensor should be read as the “Merge
Gate” sensor.
For the envelope dispenser, SOH code 103H – transport jam – implies
that an envelope is stuck between the cassette and the merge gate. If a jam
occurs after the envelope enters the merge gate, the SOH message will relate
to the depository transport even though a dispense operation was taking place.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY
Perform the following tasks as necessary:
Clean all belts and check for wear. Replace where necessary.
Clean all sensors and LEDs.
Clean any evidence of ink droplets in the depository transport.
Clean the ink jet printhead (see the following procedure) or replace if
required.
Change ink pad if necessary (part number 445-0611789).

NOTE: There is no lubrication necessary on the envelope depository.

Printhead Cleaning
A deterioration in print quality indicates that the printhead requires to be
cleaned.
ATM operator publications recommend additional cleaning based on the
daily transaction rate and average number of characters per transaction at var-

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-15
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

ious climatic conditions. This is shown in the following table.

Ambient Average
Characters per
Temperature of transactions Frequency of Printhead Cleaning
Transaction
Module per day
10oC +5oC 80 80 maximum Once per month
20oC 80 80 maximum Once every 3 months
50oC +/-5oC 80 80 maximum Once every 2 months

The printhead should be cleaned (using a clean, lint-free cloth) as fol-

lows:
1. Pull and hold up the ink pad carrier to uncover the printhead.

2. Wipe the top of the printhead in one direction only (from the back of the
module towards the front) ensuring the cloth cleans the shaded area
shown in the following illustration.

CAUTION

Do not wipe back and forth and always use a clean lint-free
cloth.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-16 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

ENVELOPE DISPENSER
Perform the following tasks as needed:
Clean all sensors and LEDs.
Check gears, replace where necessary.
Clean belts with a dry cloth. Do not use cleaning solution.

NOTE: There is no lubrication necessary on the envelope dispenser.

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROL BOARD (SECONDARY PROCESSOR TEST)

When the Control Board is powered on, or receives an on or off-board
generated reset, firmware known as the Execution Diagnostic Subsystem
(EDS) automatically carries out a series of tests under the control of the
Execution Processor on the board.
The set of tests on the depository control board run in what is known as
start-up mode, that is, they execute in sequence, without operator interven-
tion, to check the basic functions of the board, such as the processor, EPROM
and SRAM. Limited testing is also carried out on the A/D Converter. If start-
up is successful, control is then passed to the Depository application firmware.
Test results are displayed on a bank of four LEDs.
The EDS may also be controlled via a Remote Diagnostics Interface con-
nector (test tool) which provides access to the LED and Reset signals.

NOTE: The EDS does not test the sensor circuits. These are tested fully
using Level 1 Diagnostics.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-17
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

INTERFACES
There can be two interfaces to the Execution Diagnostics Subsystem.
On-board LEDs
Hard-wired Remote Diagnostic Interface (RDI)

NOTE: For a description of the SDC node tests on the depository control
board, refer to Chapter 4.2.6 of FM-0547, NCR 56XX/Personas XX Auto-
mated Teller Machines, Field Service Information, Service Aids Mini-
Manual.

LED Interface

The on-board LEDs are used to display the test number of the test being run
and the error code if a test fails. The LEDs display the codes as binary
numbers:

LED 1 2 3 4
least--------significant bit----------most
Decimal Value: 1 2 4 8

The following sections refer to the codes using hexadecimal numbers, for
example, test result BH (decimal 11) is represented:

LED 1 2 3 4
Result BH 1 1 0 1

All test codes have numbers 7H or lower so LED 4 is always off during a
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-18 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

test. All error codes have number 8H or higher so LED 4 is always on follow-
ing a failure. A successful test result is always number 0H, i.e. all LEDs off.
On successful completion of a test the EDS jumps to the next test without
displaying a pass code. If a test fails, the EDS displays the test for one second
and then the error code for two seconds. If an error occurs in the router then
the LEDs do not flash but stay on permanently.

Remote Diagnostic Interface (RDI)

The EDS may be controlled via the RDI. The RDI is a hardware interface
which echoes the information on the LEDs and may also be used to drive the
board reset line.

TEST SEQUENCE
At start-up the following sequence of events takes place:
Call initialization code
Execute the tests in the following order:
Test 01H - Microcontroller confidence and EPROM sumcheck
Test 02H - SRAM data test
Test 03H - SRAM address test
Clear all SRAM to zero
Pass control to the application firmware.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-19
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

TEST DESCRIPTIONS
The following subsections define each test in turn and list the possible results.

TEST ROUTER

Purpose
The Test Router controls the execution of the depository Execution Processor
diagnostics.

Test Results

LED Status
0H Start-up passed
EH CPU quick check failed
FH CPU probably stuck at reset

Notes
The error codes displayed by the router do not flash.

TEST 01H - MICROCONTROLLER CONFIDENCE AND EPROM

SUMCHECK

Purpose
To test the Microcontroller (MCU), checks that the contents of the EPROM
are valid and also checks the functionality of the ADC.

Test Results

LED Status
0H Pass
8H MCU ALU fault
9H MCU RAM fault
AH MCU TIMER fault
BH MCU interrupt control register fault
CH MCU serial control register fault
DH EPROM sumcheck fail
EH A.D converter fail

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-20 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Notes
1. On power-up the LED s should be 0FH. If the LEDs stay at 0FH then the
MCU is possibly held in the RESET type state. If LEDs hang-up with
0BH then initialization is not taking place.
2. The top two bytes of EPROM are reserved for Level 0 Diagnostics. The
checksum value is stored there.

TEST 02H - SRAM DATA

Purpose
This test checks all SRAM that is testable.

Test Results

LED Status
0H Pass
8H Internal data error in lower part of SRAM (0-3FFFH)
9H Internal data error in upper part of SRAM (4000-7FFFH)
AH External data fault on lower part of SRAM (0-3FFFH)
BH External data error on upper part of SRAM (4000-7FFFH)

Notes
The depository control board is populated with only one SRAM.

TEST 03H - SRAM ADDRESS

Purpose
This test checks all SRAM for hardware faults.

Test Results

LED Status
0H Pass
8H Data error while verifying 00H write
9H Data error while verifying 0FFH write - at address 000H
AH SRAM address bus error in lower 8 lines
BH SRAM address bus error in upper 8 lines
EH Chip select fault

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-21
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

SELECTED TEST MODE

In selected test mode the 8-pole switch pack is used to run selected tests.
These are all SDC slave node tests and details can be found in Chapter 4.2.6.
To clear NVRAM use the following test.

Test 04H - Test All RAM Data (Clear NVRAM)

CAUTION

This test will clear all the data in NVRAM, including all
level 3 diagnostics (tallies), and so should only be carried
out when it is necessary to update or reload the depository
firmware.

Switch Setting -

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

Test Results -

LED Status
0H Pass
8H Internal data fault in lower SRAM
9H Internal data fault in upper SRAM
AH External data fault in lower SRAM
BH External data fault in upper SRAM

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-22 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS

NOTE: M_DATA and M_STATUS codes returned by the level 1 diagnostic

tests are listed in NCR publication B006-6273, 56xx/Personas Self-Serv-
ice Financial Terminal Diagnostic Status Code Notebook.

ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY
Tests on the Envelope Depository Diagnostic menu are:
Deposit and Print Data
Deposit and Print Serial No
Shutter/Sensor Status
Increment Serial Number
Clear Transport
Disable Depository (PPD-EDO)
SDC Turnaround
Run To Run.
On the PPD-EDO, if a latchfast bin is fitted, an additional test is available
on the envelope depository TI menu:
Tamper Indication

NOTE: Looping is allowed on all tests.

DEPOSIT AND PRINT DATA

The Deposit and Print Data test opens the shutter to allow an envelope to be
deposited. On the PPD-EDO the depository is enabled.

NOTE: The envelope must be entered within 10 seconds of selecting the

test.

If an envelope is deposited the ASCII characters LDTX are printed on it

20 times before it is transported to the bin.
At the end of the test you are prompted to verify acceptability of print
position and quality. The serial number is not incremented during the test. The
tallies are not incremented, and error recovery is not attempted.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-23
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

DEPOSIT AND PRINT SERIAL NO.

The Deposit and Print Serial Number test opens the shutter to allow an
envelope to be deposited.

NOTE: An envelope must be deposited within 10 seconds of selecting the

test.

If an envelope is deposited the current four digit serial number is printed

on it 10 times before it is transported to the bin.
At the end of the test you are prompted to verify acceptability of print
position and quality. The tallies are not incremented, and error recovery is not
attempted during this test.

NOTE: The serial number is incremented by 1 during this test.

SHUTTER/SENSOR STATUS
The Shutter/Sensor Status test opens/closes the shutter and then displays, as
M_DATA, the status of the following sensors:
Transport sensors (Entry, second, merge gate and bin-full (exit) sensors
on PPD-EDO)
Shutter sensors
Bin full sensor
Timing disk sensor.

INCREMENT SERIAL NUMBER

The Increment Serial Number test increments the stored serial number by one.
This test can only be verified by performing two successful “Deposit and
Print Serial No.” tests. One deposit is carried out before the test and one
deposit is carried out after the test, and then the serial numbers on the two
envelopes are compared.

CLEAR TRANSPORT
The Clear Transport test checks that the depository is clear and operable. The
clear transport procedure:
1. Checks the shutter operation.
2. Interrogates the transport sensors.
3. Checks the printhead is properly installed.
4. Checks the anti-fish finger is in its normal position.
If a transport blockage is detected, the shutter is operated and the trans-
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-24 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

port driven for 10 seconds. If an envelope is detected passing the printhead an

attempt is made to print the data last sent to the print buffer.
A bin overfill condition will be returned as fatal if it is the third consecu-
tive occurrence of this state.

NOTE: A GOOD status is returned if there is no blockage detected.

DISABLE DEPOSITORY
The Disable Depository test disables the depository, closing the shutter and
stopping the transport.
If an envelope is in the transport when a Disable Depository command is
received the transport will continue running until the envelope exits the trans-
port or a jam is detected.
For a deposited envelope, the transport will continue to drive the enve-
lope through to the depository bin
If an envelope is being dispensed it will either be driven out through the
shutter or it will be retracted and driven through to the depository bin.

NOTE: Whether an envelope is driven out or retracted is a configuration

option under customer control at the time of system build. The default
configuration is to drive an envelope out.

SDC TURNAROUND
The SDC Turnaround test carries out a turnaround test between the SDC
service and the module.

RUN TO RUN
The Run To Run test automatically performs, in sequence, the following tests:
Clear transport
Shutter/Sensor status
Deposit and Print Serial Number.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-25
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY TI
The test offered on the Envelope Depository Diagnostic menu is the Tamper
Indicator test.

NOTE: Looping is allowed on all tests.

TAMPER INDICATION
The Tamper Indication test displays the status of the envelope depository TI as
M_DATA.

ENVELOPE DISPENSER
Tests on the Envelope Dispenser Diagnostic menu are:
Present
Retract
Sensor Status
SDC Turnaround
Run To Run

NOTE: Looping is allowed on some tests.

PRESENT
The Present test presents an envelope at the facia slot for removal. If the
envelope is not taken within 10 seconds, a message “Envelope Not Taken” is
displayed.

RETRACT
The Retract test retracts an envelope from the facia slot until it clears the exit
sensor
On the PPD-EDO the envelope is cleared from the facia slot either by
driving it out through the facia slot or by retracting it and driving it into the
bin. This is a configuration option under customer control at the time of sys-
tem build. The default is to drive the envelope into the depository bin.

NOTE: A GOOD status is returned if there is no envelope in the facia slot.

SENSOR STATUS
The Sensor Status test returns, as M_DATA, the current status of the bin low,
exit and timing disk sensors.

SDC TURNAROUND

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-26 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

The SDC Turnaround test carries out a turnaround test between the SDC
service and the module.

RUN TO RUN
The Run To Run test automatically performs, in sequence, the following tests:
Sensor status
Present
Retract.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS
This section details the level 3 diagnostics for the deposit handling devices in
NCR Self-Service Financial Terminals.
Level 3 diagnostics provides an interface to the tallies, stored in on-mod-
ule and system NVRAM, and error logs for the units.

ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the envelope depository are:

S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the envelope depository are:

S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault).
02 WARNING (May require attention).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention).

Tallies
The tallies recorded for the envelope depository are:

Tally Description
DRVTRANS Times the transport is driven.
DEPOSJAM Jams detected in the transport.
SENSFAIL Sensor failures.
SHUTOPER Shutter operations.
SHUTTJAM Shutter jams.
ENABDEPO Depository is enabled.
DEPNTDON Deposit is not done.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-27
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Tally Description
DEPOSDON Deposits done.
BINOVRFL Bin overfill detected.

ENVELOPE DISPENSER
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the envelope dispenser are:

S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the envelope dispenser are:

S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault).
02 WARNING (May require attention).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention).

Tallies
The tallies recorded for the envelope dispenser transport are:

Tally Description
DRVTOTAL Number of times the motor is activated/driven.
FRTTOTAL Number of times a front edge of an envelope is detected.
TKNTOTAL Number of times an envelope is taken by a cardholder.
NOTFOUND Number of times an envelope does not pass from the bin/cassette
to over the exit/envelope transport sensor (bin/cassette empty or
envelope jam before sensor).

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-28 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

CABLE AND CONNECTOR DATA

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

J8 J12 J11 Print

Flex I/F
Head

Depository
Motor

J3 Dispenser
Motor

Shutter
Motor
J7 Shutter
Control Open
PPD - EDO Control PCB

Board Locked Shutter

Sensors

J6 Depository
Timing Disk

Anti-Fish
Finger
Entry
Second (Print)
Depository
Merge Gate
Transport
Exit (Bin Full)

J4
Bin-In

J5 Cassette Present
Envelope Present
Dispenser
Cassette Low Sensors

Dispenser
Timing Disk
Latchfast Bin Only

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-29
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

CONNECTOR PINOUTS

J1 – SDC I/F

N/C 1 2 N/C
DATA+ 3 4 DATA-
RESET+ 5 6 RESET-
N/C 7 8 N/C
SIG_REF 9 10 N/C

J2 – Power

GND 1 9 +5V
GND 2 10 N/C
N/C 3 11 N/C
GND 4 12 +24V
SHUTTER_LOCK 5 13 N/C
GND 6 14 SHUT_MOT_ON-
SHUTTER_OPEN 7 15 N/C
CHASSIS GND 8 16 +24V_I/L

J3 – Motors

ENV_DC_B 1 3 PPD_DC_A
ENV_DC_A 2 4 PPD_DC_B

J4 – Bin-In

TI_BIN_PRES- 1
GND 2
GND 3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-30 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

J5 – Envelope Dispenser I/F

ENV_EXIT_LED 1 2 GND
ENV_EXIT_SEN 3 4 +5V
ENV_TIM_LED 5 6 GND
ENV_TIM_SEN 7 8 GND
ENV_CASS_LOW- 9 10 GND
ENV_CASS_PRES- 11 12 GND
ENV_DISP_PRES- 13 14 GND
N/C 15 16 N/C

J6 – Sensors

PPD_ENTRY_LED 1 2 GND
PPD_ENTRY_SEN 3 4 +5V
PPD_PRINT_LED 5 6 GND
PPD_PRINT_SEN 7 8 +5V
PPD_TIM_LED 9 10 GND
PPD_TIM_SEN 11 12 GND
PPD_GATE_LED 13 14 GND
PPD_GATE_SEN 15 16 GND
PPD_FISH_LED 17 18 GND
PPD_FISH_SEN 19 20 GND
PPD_BIN_OVER_LED 21 22 GND
PPD_BIN_OVER_SEN 23 24 GND

J7 – Facia Interface

SHUT_MOT_ON- 1 2 GND
SHUTTER_LOCK 3 4 GND
SHUTTER_OPEN 5 6 GND
N/C 7 8 GND

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-31
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

J8 – Ink Jet Printhead

IJET10- 1 2 IJET9-
IJET12- 3 4 IJET7-
IJET11- 5 6 N/C
HEADVOLT 7 8 HEAD_LED-
IJET2- 9 10 N/C
IJET1- 11 12 +5V
IJET4- 13 14 IJET3-
IJET8- 15 16 IJET5-
IJET6- 17 18 N/C
THERM 19 20 THERM_RET

J9 – Remote Diagnostics

+5V 1 2 RDI_RESET-
SWITCH1 3 4 N/C
SWITCH2 5 6 LED1
SWITCH3 7 8 LED2
SWITCH4 9 10 N/C
SWITCH5 11 12 LED3
SWITCH6 13 14 LED4
SWITCH7 15 16 N/C
SWITCH8 17 18 N/C
GND 19 20 GND

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-32 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

CABLING INFORMATION

Sensor Harness

4
IN-FEED
CNTL_X 3 P1 J1
2
J6 IN-FEED TYPE
1 9 9
ENTRY_LED
1 1 1
RTN Entry LED
2 2 2

ENTRY_SENSOR
3 3 3
+5V Entry Sensor
4 4 4

2ND_LED
5 5 5
RTN 2nd (Print) LED
6 6 6

2ND_SENSOR
7 7 7 2nd (Print)
+5V 8 Sensor
8 8

TIMING_LED
PPD-EDO Control Board

9
RTN
10
TIMING_SENSOR Timing Disk
11
RTN
12

GATE_LED
13
RTN
14
GATE_SENSOR Merge Gate
15
RTN
16

FISH_LED
17
RTN
18 Anti-Fish
FISH_SENSOR Finger
19
RTN
20

BIN_FULL_LED
21
RTN
22
BIN_FULL_SENSOR Bin Full (Exit)
23
RTN
24

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-33
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Motor Harness
J3
PPD-EDO Control Board

ED_ADPTR_P1
ENV_DC_A ENV_DC_A
2 1 1 Dispenser
ENV_DC_B ENV_DC_B Motor
1 2 2

PPD_DC_A
3 Depository
PPD_DC_B Motor
4

Power and Shutter Harness

J2 SHUTTER_ADPTR
SHUTTER OPEN 8
7
RTN 3
15
SHUT MOT ON 7
14
5 SHUTTER LOCK 4
RTN +5V
PPD-EDO Control Board

6 5
RTN +5V RTN
13 1
+24V 6
+24V RTN
2

POWER_ADPTR
+5V
9 9
+5V RTN
1 1
+24V
12 11
+24V RTN 3
4
+24V RTN
8 4
+24V I/L +24V
16 12

NO CM
Interlock Switch

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-34 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

SDC Harness
PPD-EDO Control Board
SDC_ADPTR_1 J1 SDC_ADPTR
N/C N/C
1 1 1
N/C N/C
2 2 2
DATA+ DATA+
3 3 3
DATA- DATA-
4 4 4
RESET+ RESET+
5 5 5
RESET- RESET-
6 6 6
TXEN+ TXEN+
7 7 7
TXEN- TXEN-
8 8 8
SIG REF SIG REF
9 9 9
N/C N/C
10 10 10

Bin-In Switch Harness

J4
PPD-EDO Control Board

TI_BIN_PRES-
1 NO Bin-in
Micro-
RTN switch
3 C

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-35
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Printhead Harness
J8 J12

IJET10-
1 1
IJET9-
2 2
IJET12-
3 3
IJET7-
4 4
IJET11-
5 5
N/C
6 6
PPD-EDO Control Board

HEADVOLT

Printhead Flex I/F Board

7 7
HEAD_LED-
8 8
IJET2-
9 9
N/C
10 10
IJET1-
11 11
+5V
12 12
IJET4-
13 13
IJET3-
14 14
IJET8-
15 15
IJET5-
16 16
IJET6-
17 17
N/C
18 18
THERM
19 19
THERM_RET
20 20

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-36 JANUARY 2005
 ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Flexible Printhead Interface Board

The diagram below shows the schematic of the flexible printhead interface
board:

J11
N/C
6
N/C
10 D1
LED_ANODE
12
HEAD_LED-
8 J12
JET9
2 1
JET10
1 2
JET7
4 3
JET12
3 4
JET11
5 5
HEADVOLT
7 6
JET2
9 7
JET1
11 8
JET4
13 9
JET3
14 10
JET8
15 11
JET5
16 12
JET6
17 13
N/C
18 R1
THERMISTOR
19
THERMISTOR_RTN
20

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.5-37
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY WITH ENVELOPE DISPENSER OPTION

Envelope Dispenser Harness

J5

ENV_EXIT_LED
1 Envelope
RTN Exit LED
2

ENV_EXIT_SEN
3 Envelope
+5V Exit Sensor
4
PPD-EDO Control Board

ENV_TIM_LED
5
RTN Envelope
6
ENV_TIM_SEN Timing
7 Disk
RTN
8

ENV_CASS_LOW-
9 Envelope
RTN Cassette Low
10

ENV_CASS_PRES-
11 Envelope
RTN Cass. Present
12

ENV_DISP_PRES-
13 Envelope Dispenser
RTN Present Loop
14

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.5-38 JANUARY 2005
 SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

CONTENTS

SVGA Sunlight Readable

Colour Display Module

Chapter 26.6

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................... 26.6-1

DISPLAY ILLUMINATION ........................................................... 26.6-2
TEMPERATURE CONTROL ......................................................... 26.6-2

TEST TOOLS ..................................................................................... 26.6-2

STRAPPING ....................................................................................... 26.6-2

ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................ 26.6-3

SET-UP INSTRUCTIONS............................................................... 26.6-3
Warm-up......................................................................................... 26.6-3
Main Menu Functions .................................................................... 26.6-3

TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................... 26.6-4

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT ......................................................... 26.6-5

12.1 INCH DISPLAY....................................................................... 26.6-5
15 INCH DISPLAY.......................................................................... 26.6-5
LIGHT SENSOR (LDR) CONNECTOR......................................... 26.6-6
POWER CONNECTOR (12.1 INCH DISPLAY)............................ 26.6-6
POWER CONNECTOR (15 INCH DISPLAY)............................... 26.6-6
DATA SIGNAL CONNECTOR ...................................................... 26.6-6

HISTORY ........................................................................................... 26.6-8

MODULE: 12.1 INCH SUNLIGHT READABLE
COLOUR DISPLAY ........................................................................ 26.6-8

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.6-i
SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

MODULE: 15 INCH SUNLIGHT READABLE

COLOUR DISPLAY ........................................................................26.6-8

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.6-ii AUGUST 2005
 SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.6

SVGA Sunlight Readable

Colour Display Module

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

12.1 Inch Display

15 Inch Display

This chapter describes the 12.1 Inch and 15 Inch Sunlight Readable Colour
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) modules used in the NCR Personas M Series
6674 and 6676 ATMs. The 12.1 Inch display is the GDS model CD12133TMS
and the 15 Inch display is the GDS model CD15133TMX.
The LCD modules are self-contained replaceable units capable of dis-
playing computer generated video, graphics, and text. LCD interface signals
are provided by the PIVAT Core.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.6-1
SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

DISPLAY ILLUMINATION
A bank of U-shaped cold-cathode fluorescent lamps provide back illumination
of the LCD panel. There are six lamps in the 12.1 Inch display and seven in
the 15 Inch display.
Brightness of the lamps is automatically adjusted by a circuit connected
to an LDR resistor that senses the ambient light falling on the display. On the
12.1 Inch display the LDR resistor is located at the facia of the ATM and is
connected to the display by an external harness. The LDR resistor for the 15
Inch display is located within the front of the display and all wiring is inside
the display casing.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Air is drawn through an external filter into the display interior, by fans (two in
the 12.1 Inch display and three in the 15 Inch display). The fans are controlled
by a circuit incorporating a thermistor placed at the exhaust vent at the top of
the casing. The speed of the fans is increased to provide cooling when the
display is heated by the sun. The fans still provide a gentle airflow even when
the display is exposed to extreme cold. In this case the warm air inside the
ATM is used to keep the LCD panel slightly warm.

TEST TOOLS
None.

STRAPPING
None.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.6-2 AUGUST 2005
 SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

ADJUSTMENTS

SET-UP INSTRUCTIONS
These set-up instructions are provided to allow field adjustment to optimize
the display with respect to the system board fitted to the host system.

CAUTION

It is essential that no adjustment be made of any other func-

tions other than Image Vertical Position, Image Horizontal
Position and Image Size - Horizontal. Alteration of settings
in other functions requires the use of a PC-based test tool at
rework centres.

There are no internal adjustments that can be made. All adjustments are
made through the rear control PCB and the On Screen Display Menu.

WARNING

Do not open the display casing, there are hazardous voltages

present.

The rear of the display has three push buttons; “MENU”, “-”, and “+”.

Warm-up
Allow the display to warm-up in the host system for twenty minutes so that
the temperature of the display and system board stabilises before adjustments
are attempted.
Press the MENU button to display the main menu.
Use the + and - buttons to scroll through the main menu functions list.
Press the MENU button to select a function from the list.
Press the + or - buttons to make the required adjustment.
Press the MENU button to save the setting.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining functions.
Press the MENU button to exit the menu saving the settings.

Main Menu Functions

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.6-3
SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

The table shows the adjustments available from the display’s menu system.

<----------------------------------------------Main Menu------------------------------------------------>
Exit Setup Picture Colour OSD System
Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit
Setup Video Brightness Colour Horizontal Signal Info
Temperature Position
Setup Contrast Red Gain Vertical Firmware
Geometry Position Version
Auto Setup Horizontal Green Gain Size Test Pattern
Position
Auto Clock Vertical Blue Gain Transparency Restore
Position Factory Presets
Phase Adjust Red Level Timeout
Clock Adjust Green Level
Image Blue Level
Enhancement

NOTE: If any of the above adjustments result in the display not appearing
to be correct then selecting “Restore Factory Presets” will setup the dis-
play with default settings.

TROUBLESHOOTING
To ensure an unimpeded airflow through the display case, clean or renew the
foam air filter at a preventive maintenance call to the ATM. The filter can be
removed by flexing the outer part of the plastic holder until it unclips from the
inner part. Vacuum or tap out the dust from the filter or fit a new filter.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.6-4 AUGUST 2005
 SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT
The position of the connectors on the back of the display modules is shown in
the illustrations below:

12.1 INCH DISPLAY

Menu

Data Signal
Connector

Power

15 INCH DISPLAY

Data Signal
Connector

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.6-5
SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

Menu

Power

Remote Diagnostics

LIGHT SENSOR (LDR) CONNECTOR

The smaller 4-way connector on the back of the 12.1 Inch LCD display is used
to connect the light sensor. This incorporates a Light Dependent Resistor
(LDR) which senses the ambient light at the facia of the ATM. The display is
automatically brightened or darkened to suit the outside light conditions.

N/C 4 3 N/C
GND 2 1 LDR

NOTE: The LDR for the 15 Inch display is located inside the front of the
display and all wiring is internal to the display casing.

POWER CONNECTOR (12.1 INCH DISPLAY)

The 4-way power connector on the LCD display has the following pinout:

+12 V RTN 3 1 +5 V RTN

+12 V 4 2 +5 V

POWER CONNECTOR (15 INCH DISPLAY)

The 2-way power connector on the 15 Inch LCD display has the following
pinout (looking into the connector):

2 +24 V RTN
1 +24 V

DATA SIGNAL CONNECTOR

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.6-6 AUGUST 2005
 SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

The data signal connector on the display is a 15-way connector with the
following pinout:

GND 6
RED 1 GND 11
GND 7
GREEN 2 DATA 12
GND 8
BLUE 3 H.SYNC 13
N/C 9
N/C 4 V.SYNC 14
GND 10
GND 5 CLOCK 15

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.6-7
SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

HISTORY

MODULE: 12.1 INCH SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0018695

MODULE: 15 INCH SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0019537

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.6-8 AUGUST 2005
 STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

CONTENTS

Standard Brightness Colour Displays

Chapter 26.7

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................... 26.7-1

DISPLAY ILLUMINATION ........................................................... 26.7-2
TEMPERATURE CONTROL ......................................................... 26.7-2

TEST TOOLS ..................................................................................... 26.7-2

STRAPPING ....................................................................................... 26.7-2

ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................ 26.7-2

Warm-up......................................................................................... 26.7-2

TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................... 26.7-3

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT ......................................................... 26.7-3

12.1 INCH DISPLAY....................................................................... 26.7-3
15 INCH DISPLAY.......................................................................... 26.7-4
POWER CONNECTOR................................................................... 26.7-5
DATA SIGNAL CONNECTOR ...................................................... 26.7-5

CABLE INFORMATION................................................................... 26.7-6

LCD DISPLAY DATA .................................................................... 26.7-6
LCD DISPLAY POWER ................................................................. 26.7-7

HISTORY ........................................................................................... 26.7-8

MODULE: 12.1 INCH STANDARD BRIGHTNESS
COLOUR DISPLAY ........................................................................ 26.7-8
MODULE: 15 INCH STANDARD BRIGHTNESS
COLOUR DISPLAY ........................................................................ 26.7-8
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-i
STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-ii
 STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.7

Standard Brightness Colour Displays

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

12.1 Inch Display

15 Inch Display

This chapter describes the 12.1 Inch and 15 Inch Standard Brightness Colour
Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) used in the NCR Personas M Series 6674 and
6676 ATMs. The 12.1 Inch display is the GDS model CD12133TBS and the
15 Inch display is the GDS model CD15133TBX.
The LCD modules are self-contained replaceable units capable of dis-
playing computer generated graphics, and text. LCD interface signals are pro-
vided by the PIVAT Core.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-1
STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

DISPLAY ILLUMINATION
Two integral cold-cathode fluorescent lamps provide back illumination of the
LCD panel.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Air is drawn through an external filter into the display interior, by two fans
that are controlled by a circuit incorporating a thermistor placed at the exhaust
vent at the top of the casing. The speed of the fans is increased to provide
cooling when the display is heated by the sun. The fans still provide a gentle
airflow even when the display is exposed to extreme cold. In this case the
warm air inside the ATM is used to keep the LCD panel slightly warm.

TEST TOOLS
None.

STRAPPING
None.

ADJUSTMENTS
There are no field serviceable parts inside the display. Failed units should be
returned for repair.

WARNING

Do not open the display casing, there are hazardous voltages

present.

Warm-up
Allow the display to warm-up in the host system for ten minutes so that the
temperature of the display and system board stabilises before adjustments are
attempted.
Press the MENU button to display the main menu.
Use the + and - buttons to scroll through the main menu functions list.
Press the MENU button to select a function from the list.
Press the + or - buttons to make the required adjustment.
Press the MENU button to save the setting.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining functions.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-2
 STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

Press the MENU button to exit the menu saving the settings.

TROUBLESHOOTING
To ensure an unimpeded airflow through the display casing, clean or renew
the foam air filter at a preventive maintenance call to the ATM. On the 12.1
Inch display the filter can be removed by flexing the outer part of the plastic
holder until it unclips from the inner part while on the 15 Inch the filter
retainer is held by two screws.
Vacuum or tap out the dust from the filter or fit a new filter.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT
The position of the connectors on the back of the display modules is shown in
the illustrations below.

12.1 INCH DISPLAY

Menu

Data Signal
Connector

Power

NOTE: The LDR connector is not used with the 12.1 Inch Standard Bright-
ness Colour Display.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-3
STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

15 INCH DISPLAY

Data Signal
Connector

Menu

Power

NOTE: The LDR and RJ11 connectors are not used with the
15 Inch Standard Brightness Colour Display.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-4
 STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

POWER CONNECTOR
The 4-way power connector on the 12.1 Inch LCD display has the following
pinout (looking into the connector):

+12 V RTN 4 3 +5 V RTN

+12 V 2 1 +5 V

The 2-way power connector on the 15 Inch LCD display has the follow-
ing pinout (looking into the connector):

2 +24 V RTN
1 +24 V

DATA SIGNAL CONNECTOR

The data signal connector on both displays is a 15-way connector with the
following pinout:

GND 6
RED 1 GND 11
GND 7
GREEN 2 DATA 12
GND 8
BLUE 3 H.SYNC 13
N/C 9
N/C 4 V.SYNC 14
GND 10
GND 5 CLOCK 15

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-5
STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

CABLE INFORMATION
This section shows the cabling to the LCD displays in the 6674 and 6676
ATMs.

LCD DISPLAY DATA

VGA SIGNAL
RED VIDEO 1
1

V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V

GREEN VIDEO
2 2
BLUE VIDEO
3 3
N/C N/C
4 4
GND

LCD Display Unit

5 5
RED RTN
6 6
GREEN RTN
PIVAT Core

7 7
BLUE RTN
8 8
+5 V (FUSED) N/C
9 9
SYNC GND
10 10
N/C GND
11 11
DDC SERIAL DATA
12 12
HORIZ SYNC
13 13
VERT SYNC
14 14
DDC SERIAL CLOCK
15 15

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-6
 STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

LCD DISPLAY POWER

J2

12.1 Inch Liquid Crystal

+5 V (Black)

V V V V
V V V V
5 1
+5 V RTN (White)

Display
7 3
+12 V (Black)
10
Standard Power Supply Unit

2
+12 V RTN (White)
9 4

15 Inch Liquid Crystal

+24 v (Black)

Display
1
V V

V V
+24V RTN (White)
3 2

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-7
STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR DISPLAYS

HISTORY

MODULE: 12.1 INCH STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR

DISPLAY

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0018937

MODULE: 15 INCH STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR

DISPLAY

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0019628

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.7-8
 NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

CONTENTS

NCR Personas M Series ATMs

AC Distribution

Chapter 26.8

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................. 26.8-1

AC POWER REQUIREMENT ........................................................ 26.8-2

MAINS INPUT CABLE..................................................................... 26.8-2

MAINS INPUT FILTER .................................................................... 26.8-3

POWER ISOLATION TRANSFORMER.......................................... 26.8-4

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY ......................................... 26.8-5

AC DISTRIBUTION BOX................................................................. 26.8-5

FRONT ACCESS AC DISTRIBUTION BOX ................................ 26.8-5
REAR ACCESS AC DISTRIBUTION BOX................................... 26.8-5
OUTPUT SOCKETS........................................................................ 26.8-6
CIRCUIT BREAKER....................................................................... 26.8-6
ATM ON/OFF ROCKER SWITCH................................................. 26.8-6

ATM POWER SUPPLY UNITS ........................................................ 26.8-7

STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................. 26.8-7
DEPOSIT POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................ 26.8-8

ATM AC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ........................................................ 26.8-8

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.8-i
NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.8-ii JANUARY 2005
 NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.8

NCR Personas M Series ATMs

AC Distribution

INTRODUCTION

AC Distribution Box

Standard PSU

PC Core

Deposit PSU

PSU Test
Connector

Uninterruptible
Power Supply

This chapter describes the ac power distribution in the NCR Personas M

Series ATMs (6674 and 6676). The components discussed are:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.8-1
NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

Mains Input Cable

Mains Input Filter
Power Isolation Transformer
Uninterruptible Power Supply
AC Distribution Box
Standard Power Supply Unit
Deposit ATM Power Supply Unit.
Most of these components are located in the ATM Top Box, as shown in
the illustration.

AC POWER REQUIREMENT
The maximum current requirements of the ATM at the stated input voltages
are:
10.0 A at 120 V
6.3 A at 230 V

MAINS INPUT CABLE

The ATMs are supplied either as 120 V or 220 - 240 V units. 120 V ATMs are
supplied with a power cable fitted with a NEMA type
5-15P power source connector. 220 - 240 V ATMs are supplied with an
unterminated power cable. Information about suitable power connectors is
supplied with the accessories. Power connectors must be wired as shown in
the diagram below:

Live (Brown)
V V V

V V V

Terminal Power
Neutral (Blue)
Connector Source
Ground (Yellow/Green) Connector
IEC 320 C14

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.8-2 JANUARY 2005
 NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

MAINS INPUT FILTER

The mains input filter is located inside the safe as shown in the folowing
illustration. The filter case is made in a conductive material and plated to
facilitate grounding. Its input is via an I.E.C. 320 C14 plug and its output is
via faston connectors.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.8-3
NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

POWER ISOLATION TRANSFORMER

Fuse Holder

On 220 - 240 V ATMs with the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) a 1000
W power isolation transformer is fitted. This is located in the safe on the
GBRU/GBNA cradle (see illustration) or beneath the currency dispenser and
is connected between the AC Inlet Filter and the UPS.
The transformer has the following external features:
IEC Inlet plug, chassis mount ,male, 250 Vac, 10 amp rated
Chassis mounted fuse holder to accommodate a 6.35 mm x 3.25 mm fuse
(10 amp slow blow ceramic 3AB - LittelFuse 326-010 or equivalent)
IEC outlet socket, chassis mount, female, 250 Vac, 10 amp rated.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.8-4 JANUARY 2005
 NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

The Uninterruptible Power Supply is an optional unit, located beneath the
module tray on top of the safe, that monitors the mains input and provides a
stabilized supply to the ATM. If the mains supply fails, the UPS will supply
the ATM from its integral battery-backed power supply. This supply is of
sufficient duration to permit the ATM to bring any active transactions to an
orderly termination before it shuts down.
The UPS is described in Chapter 26.2.

AC DISTRIBUTION BOX
The AC Distribution Box is located above the PC Core. The box contains one
IEC 320 input plug, five IEC 320 output sockets, a circuit breaker, and the
ATM ON/OFF rocker switch. A comb shaped bracket is fitted to the the box to
prevent the connectors from being pulled out accidentally (see the illustration
below).

The internal circuit diagram of the distribution box is shown in the sec-
tion “ATM AC Circuit Diagram”.
The arrangement of the box components is reversed between front and
rear access ATMs as shown in the illustrations below.

FRONT ACCESS AC DISTRIBUTION BOX

REAR ACCESS AC DISTRIBUTION BOX

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.8-5
NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

OUTPUT SOCKETS
The ac output sockets are dedicated to the following ATM modules:
PC Core
Statement Printer
Dispenser
Standard Power Supply Unit
Deposit Power Supply Unit.

CAUTION

The ac distribution sockets are reserved for the above 66XX

modules only and must not be used for connecting external
devices or tools.

CIRCUIT BREAKER
The circuit breaker cuts the ac live line before the ATM rocker switch. It
operates using a Taylor blade thermal sensing element and, when tripped, its
indicator button extends approximately 5mm (0.2 ins) beyond its set (flush)
position. The actuator button incorporates a reflective surface that gives the
appearance of being illuminated when extended and also the words “PRESS
RESET”.
The circuit breaker is rated as follows:
12 A @ 120 VAC
7.5 A @ 230 VAC.

ATM ON/OFF ROCKER SWITCH

The ATM ON/OFF Rocker Switch is a dual pole single throw switch that cuts
the live and neutral mains lines leading to the ac distribution box output
sockets. The switch is marked with the symbols “O” and “-”. The OFF
position is when the “O” is pushed in flush with the bezel of the switch.

NOTE: The positions of the “O” and “-” symbols on the rocker switch
reverse between front and rear access ATMs.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.8-6 JANUARY 2005
 NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

ATM POWER SUPPLY UNITS

There are two power supply units associated with the NCR 6674 and 6676
ATMs:
Standard ATM Power Supply Unit
Deposit ATM Power Supply Unit.
The PSUs are situated in a compartment alongside the PC Core. Lugs and
hooked brackets on the PSUs mate with slots and studs on the wall of this
compartment. When both power supply units are present, the arrangement is
as shown below, with the Standard PSU mounted above the Deposit PSU.

Deposit PSU

Standard PSU

STANDARD ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

The Standard ATM Power Supply Unit is an ac to dc switch mode PSU
specified at 355W. It has five identical output connectors supplying +5.15 V,
+12 V, and +24 V to the modules of the ATM. There is an additional +5 VSB
rail and a single connector providing auxiliary functions.
The Standard PSU is described in Chapter 26.3.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.8-7
NCR PERSONAS M SERIES ATMs AC DISTRIBUTION

DEPOSIT POWER SUPPLY UNIT

The Deposit Power Supply Unit is used to provide the additional power
required for the deposit function of the NCR 6674 and 6676 ATMs. The
power supply is specified at 600W with static dc load and it has a single +24 V
supply rail with an additional +5 VSB rail. The PSU has two identical output
connectors carrying +24 V, an auxiliary connector, and a +5VSB connector.
The Deposit Power Supply Unit is described in chapter 26.11.

ATM AC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

AC Distribution Box

V V V
N PC CORE

Uninterruptible
L

V V V
Power Supply
(Optional) N STATEMENT
UPS_IN connects ATM
E
to UPS_OUT when Circuit On/Off
UPS_IN UPS not present UPS_OUT Breaker Switch
L 2 1
L L
V V V

L
V V V
V V V

V V V

5 4 DISPENSER
N N N N
E E E E

AC_DIST_IN

TX_OUT L
V V V

V V V PSU_1
L N E N
(STANDARD)
E

Transformer 1 2 3
L
V V V

BOX_GND PSU_2
Fuse N
10A (DEPOSIT)
E
L N E
V V V
TX_IN
The Transformer is fitted only to 220 - 240 V ATMs with UPS.
TX_IN connects to TX_OUT when the Transformer is not present.

V V V
L N E
AC Inlet Filter
(In Safe)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.8-8 JANUARY 2005
 12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

CONTENTS

12.1 Inch and 15 Inch Touchscreens

Chapter 26.9

DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 26.9-1
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER/SENSOR ................................. 26.9-1
INTERFACE .................................................................................... 26.9-2

SELF TEST......................................................................................... 26.9-2

CALIBRATING THE TOUCHSCREEN........................................... 26.9-2

CONFIGURING AND ADJUSTING THE TOUCHSCREEN.......... 26.9-5

USING THE KEYPAD TO CALIBRATE AND ADJUST
THE TOUCHSCREEN .................................................................... 26.9-5
SETTING THE USER BUTTON BEHAVIOUR............................ 26.9-6
Click on Touch ............................................................................... 26.9-7
Click on Release............................................................................. 26.9-7
Drag and Drop................................................................................ 26.9-7
Double Click .................................................................................. 26.9-7
ADJUSTING FOR CURSOR OFFSET ........................................... 26.9-8
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN BOUNDARIES ................................ 26.9-9
EXAMINING THE TOUCHSCREEN WIRE VALUES .............. 26.9-10

FAULT FINDING ............................................................................ 26.9-10

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-i
12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-ii
 12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.9

12.1 Inch and 15 Inch Touchscreens

DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the 12.1 inch and 15 inch touchscreens used in the
NCR 6674 and 6676 ATMs.
The projected capacitive technology used in these touchscreens permits
them to be used for accurate touch detection in exterior TTW situations as
well as the in-lobby and vestibule environment.
The touchscreens are suitable for use with displays with a viewing area of
12.1 inches (307mm) diagonal and 15 inches (381 mm) diagonal respectively.
The touchscreens have anti-glare, thermally toughened glass on the front
viewing face and chemically toughened internal glass, laminated with a poly-
urethane interlayer containing the projected capacitive touch sensor. They are
available in privacy and
non-privacy variants.

TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER/SENSOR
The touchscreen controller, contained within the unit bezel, effectively divides
the screen into sensing cells to a resolution of
1 mm2, or less which are formed using microfine wire. The wires are
connected to the touchscreen controller and an oscillating frequency signal is
applied.
Touching the glass causes a change in the frequency of the signal at the
point touched. The co-ordinates of the point are then calculated by the control-
ler.
Since the toughened glass in front of the touchscreen sensor is non-con-
ductive, it does not prevent the position of a conductive object (finger, or even
gloved finger) being detected and calculated.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-1
12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

INTERFACE
The output from the touchscreen controller is terminated in a USB mini B
connector socket. A USB cable connects the touchscreen to one of the USB
hubs in the PC Core.

SELF TEST
A simple self test of the touchscreen sensors can be carried out on demand, by
selecting TOUCHSCREEN from the Device Self Test Menu. When the RUN
TEST button is selected either individually or in conjunction with other Self
Tests, the screen prompts the user to touch anywhere. On completion of the
self test, the result is displayed on a summary report, together with any other
simultaneous tests.

CALIBRATING THE TOUCHSCREEN

Selecting SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION from the SELF SERVICE
CONFIGURATION menu and selecting TOUCHSCREEN will display the
touchscreen window shown below.

20

USB Version 2.2.11

The bottom right of the window confirms that the USB data connection is
OK.
The following calibration procedures should be undertaken when:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-2
 12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

The terminal is initially installed.

The touchscreen is replaced or moved.
The touch area on the screen does not line up with the
corresponding image.
The monitor position is adjusted.

NOTE: Ensure that all modules are fully racked in and operating normally
before calibrating the touchscreen.

Touch the “Calibrate” button on the right-hand side of the window.

A screen is displayed with a red target at the top left and the words
“Please place your finger firmly on the target”, as shown above. Hold your
finger in the centre of the target until one bleep is heard and “Please remove
your finger from the target” is displayed.

NOTE: Important: When calibrating the touchscreen, extend one finger,

preferably the index finger, such that the pad of the fingertip is in contact
with the glass. Take care not to let the other fingers, thumb or rest of the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-3
12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

hand approach the touchscreen ahead of the extended finger.

The target then moves to a position top right of the screen (as shown in
the following illustration), then bottom right of the screen. Repeat the touch
procedure for each target position.
On completion of the calibration, the display will return to the touch-
screen window. Touch “Exit with Saving” to save the calibration and close the
touchscreen window or the “Calibrate” button to conduct another calibration.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-4
 12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

CONFIGURING AND ADJUSTING THE TOUCHSCREEN

The touchscreen window lets you set or adjust the operation of the
touchscreen. Any settings or adjustments made can be saved and the
touchscreen window closed by touching “Exit With Saving” button on the
right-hand side of the window. Alternatively, touching the “Exit Without
Saving” will close the window without implementing any changes made.

20

USB Version 2.2.11

USING THE KEYPAD TO CALIBRATE AND ADJUST

THE TOUCHSCREEN
The user keypad can be used as an alternative to touching the screen in the
event of a touchscreen error, as follows:

NOTE: The “Exit Without Save” is the active area by default. Pressing the
user ENTER key at any time while the Calibration window is displayed
will close the window without changing the existing calibration or set-
tings of the touchscreen.

In the event of the touchscreen being inoperable for any reason, you can
use the Tab key and navigation keys on an external keyboard connected to the
PC core, in the same way as a standard Windows interface, to select the “Cali-
brate” or “Exit With Saving” buttons, or to select other tab or screen options.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-5
12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

SETTING THE USER BUTTON BEHAVIOUR

20

USB Version 2.2.11

The User Actions window is displayed automatically when you first enter the
touchscreen window. If one of the other configuration options is required,
touch the relevant tab at the top of the window and refer to the appropriate
procedure
The User Actions function allows you to emulate the actions of a mouse
but using a finger on the touchscreen. Under normal ATM operating condi-
tions, the User Button Behaviour is set to ‘Click on touch’. However, you can
set the behaviour to any one of the following options, by touching the appro-
priate radio button.
Click on Touch
Click on Release
Drag and Drop
Double Click.

NOTE: When you select the “Calibrate” button, the User Button Behaviour
is “Click on touch” irrespective of the option selected.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-6
 12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

Click on Touch
This is the default action and is equivalent to pointing the screen cursor and
clicking a mouse button. When this option is selected, touching the front glass
will immediately activate the response equivalent to the point touched.

Click on Release
This option activates the response equivalent to the point touched only when
the finger is removed from the point.

Drag and Drop

This option allows you to point to a movable object on the screen and to move
it by dragging your finger in any direction within the screen area, then
removing your finger.

Double Click
This option allows you to emulate the action of a double mouse click by
touching the front glass twice within 500 milliseconds. However, since it is
unlikely that exactly the same pixel on the screen can be touched twice in
succession, a factor of error (Proximity) is set (Default 20 pixels). Touching
the screen twice within 500 milliseconds and within the set proximity of the
first touch will activate the double click response equivalent to the touched
point. You can increase, or decrease the Proximity using the “+” or “-” buttons
on the Double Click area of the window. The double click time of 500
milliseconds is not adjustable.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-7
12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

ADJUSTING FOR CURSOR OFFSET

This following description is provided for information only, since the cursor
offset is unlikely to require adjustment during normal operating conditions.
The “Offset” function allows you to correct any horizontal or vertical off-
set between the screen cursor and the touch point.
Adjust the cursor offset using the Cursor Up, Down, Left and Right but-
tons on the Modifiers area of the window. The amount of offset applied is
shown on the scale on the right of the area. (Blue - Vertical, Red - Horizontal).
The default value is 0.

USB Version 2.2.11

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-8
 12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN BOUNDARIES

NOTE: The function represented by the “Advanced” window is unlikely to

be required for normal field adjustments of the touchscreen.

The “Advanced” function allows you to adjust the horizontal and vertical
boundaries of the touchscreen. The operation of the dotted lines and “+” and
“-” buttons is explained on the “Advanced” window.

USB Version 2.2.11

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-9
12.1 INCH AND 15 INCH TOUCHSCREENS

EXAMINING THE TOUCHSCREEN WIRE VALUES

The “Wire Values” function allows you to examine the signal values on each
of the horizontal and vertical sensing wires of the touchscreen and is used as a
diagnostic tool when investigating problems with the touchscreen.
Touch any non-active area of the screen to display the signal strength at
the point touched, as shown below.
The top scale (red) shows the signal strengths on the horizontal sensor
wires and the bottom scale (blue) shows the signal strengths on the vertical
sensor wires.

USB Version 2.2.11

It is normal to see signal activity at a much lower level on wires
other than the area touched, However, the peak value (vertical and horizontal)
represents the signal levels at the touched point.

FAULT FINDING
There are no serviceable parts within the touchscreen. If the unit fails to
operate, check connections from the touchscreen to the PC Core and replace
the touchscreen if necessary. Alternatively, the fault could be in the PC Core
motherboard or in the USB harness.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.9-10
 SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

CONTENTS

Cable Information

ALARMS ............................................................................................ 26.10-1

ALARMS HARNESS ...................................................................... 26.10-1
Connector Pin Out.......................................................................... 26.10-2
CEN ALARMS HARNESS ............................................................. 26.10-2
Connector Pin Out.......................................................................... 26.10-3
ALARM DOOR SWITCH HARNESS ............................................ 26.10-3

AUDIO SYSTEMS............................................................................. 26.10-4

AUDIO JACK VOLUME CONTROL ............................................ 26.10-4
PRIVATE AUDIO VOLUME CONTROL...................................... 26.10-4
Connector Pin out........................................................................... 26.10-4
AUDIO LOOPBACK....................................................................... 26.10-4
HEADPHONE HARNESS............................................................... 26.10-5
Connector Pin out........................................................................... 26.10-5

CABINETRY...................................................................................... 26.10-6
CABINET HARNESS...................................................................... 26.10-6
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-10
SAFE AC HARNESS..................................................................... 26.10-11
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-11
SAFE DC ........................................................................................ 26.10-11
SAFE EXTENSION ....................................................................... 26.10-12
SAFE SHUTTER HARNESS ........................................................ 26.10-13
SAFE MEI ...................................................................................... 26.10-13
SAFE HEATER.............................................................................. 26.10-14
HUB EXTENSION ........................................................................ 26.10-14

CURRENCY DISPENSER............................................................... 26.10-15

RETRACTION HARNESS............................................................ 26.10-15
ICS RETRACTION HARNESS..................................................... 26.10-17
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.6-i
SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

ICS PRODUCT...............................................................................26.10-18
INTERLOCK HARNESS...............................................................26.1018

COIN DISPENSER ...........................................................................26.10-19

COIN DISPENSER HARNESS .....................................................26.10-19
Connector Pin Out ........................................................................26.10-19

CPM...................................................................................................2610-20
6676 CPM HARNESS ....................................................................26.10-20
Connector Pin out .........................................................................26.10-20
6676 CPM FACIA HARNESS .......................................................26.10-21

DISPLAY ..........................................................................................26.10-22
VIDEO CABLE 2200MM ..............................................................26.10-22
USB TYPE A TO MINI TYPE B 2M ............................................26.1022
USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 2M WITH FERRITE..........................26.10-23

EXTERNAL CABLING ...................................................................26.10-24

REMOTE STATUS MONITOR ....................................................26.10-24
REMOTE RELAY / NIGHT DEPOSIT .........................................26.10.24
CUSTOMER RS232 .......................................................................26.10-25

FACIA ...............................................................................................26.10-26
6676 FACIA HARNESS ................................................................26.10-26
FACIA SHUTTER..........................................................................26.10-29
FACIA MEI ....................................................................................26.10-29
ADVERT TUBE .............................................................................26.10-29
UPPER ADVERT ...........................................................................26.10-30
ADVERT BALLAST .....................................................................26.10-30
TASK LIGHT .................................................................................26.10-30
EPP ESD HARNESS ......................................................................26.10-30
EPP SDC INTERNAL HARNESS.................................................26.10-31
Connector Pin Out ........................................................................26.10-31
EPP EXTENSION ..........................................................................26.10-32
Connector Pin Out ........................................................................26.10-32

GBNA / GBRU..................................................................................26.10-33
GBNA DC.......................................................................................26.10-33
GBRU SHUTTER PATCH HARNESS .........................................26.10-33

INTEGRATED CAMERA................................................................26.10-34
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.6-ii AUGUST 2005
 SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

VIDEO CAMERA.......................................................................... 26.10-34

CAMERA VIDEO SYNC ADAPTOR .......................................... 26.10-34

MCRW .............................................................................................. 26.10-35

IMCRW COMMS .......................................................................... 26.10-35
DIP SMART COMMS ................................................................... 26.10-35
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-35

OPERATOR INTERFACE............................................................... 26.10-36

GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL (GOP) POWER HARNESS 26.10-36
DVI-D SINGLE LINK HARNESS (GOP) .................................... 26.10-37
EOP................................................................................................. 26.10-38

PC CORE .......................................................................................... 26.10-39

AC DISTRIBUTION BOX ............................................................ 26.10-39
AC CORE ....................................................................................... 26.10-40
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-40
FAN ................................................................................................ 26.10-40
PSU DUAL AC .............................................................................. 26.10-41
PCCM ............................................................................................. 26.10-41
5V BOOSTER ................................................................................ 26.10-42
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-42
POWERGOOD PATCH HARNESS ............................................. 26.10-43
F250 SDC HARNESS .................................................................... 26.10-43
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-43
F250 RS232 .................................................................................... 26.10-44
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-44
USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 2M ...................................................... 26.10-44
USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 3M ...................................................... 26.10-45
USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 4M ...................................................... 26.10-45

PRINTERS........................................................................................ 26.10-46
SERIAL RECEIPT PRINTER COMMS ....................................... 26.10-46
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-46
SERIAL JOURNAL PRINTER COMMS...................................... 26.10-46
Connector Pin Out........................................................................ 26.10-46
SERIAL P/T PASSBOOK PRINTER COMMS ............................ 26.10-47
P/T PASSBOOK AC ...................................................................... 26.10-47

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.6-iii
SVGA SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.6-iv AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.10

Cable Information
ALARMS

ALARMS HARNESS
(445-0680295)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

ALARM_P3 1 TAL_NC ALARM O/P 6

ALARM_P3 2 DAL_NO ALARM O/P 8
ALARM_P3 3 TAL_CM ALARM O/P 18
ALARM_P3 4 DAL_CM ALARM O/P 21
ALARM_P3 5 TAL_NO ALARM O/P 5
ALARM_P3 6 DAL_NC ALARM O/P 9
ALARM_P3 7 TAL_OUT MISC_IF_P6 1
ALARM_P3 8 SAL_NO ALARM O/P 19
ALARM_P3 9 TAL_IN MISC_IF_P6 2
ALARM_P3 10 SAL_CM ALARM O/P 7
ALARM_P3 12 SAL_NC ALARM O/P 20
ALARM_P3 14 CAL_NC ALARM O/P 23
ALARM_P3 15 GND SPLICE_1 1
ALARM_P3 16 CAL_CM ALARM O/P 10
ALARM_P3 17 GND SPLICE_1 1
ALARM_P3 18 CAL_NO ALARM O/P 22
ALARM_P3 19 GND SPLICE_1 1
ALARM_P3 20 CSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 1
ALARM_P3 21 GND SPLICE_1 1
ALARM_P3 22 DSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 2

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-1
CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

ALARM_P3 24 SSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 3

ALARM_P3 25 CTST_OUT ALARM O/P 3
ALARM P3 26 TSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 4
ALARM P3 27 CTST_IN ALARM O/P 16
ALARM P3 28 12V ALARM O/P 12
ALARM P3 29 12V RTN GND_1 1
GND_1 1 12V RTN ALARM O/P 25
GND_1 1 12V RTN ALARM O/P 1
SPLICE 1 1 GND MISC_IF_P10 8

Connector Pin Out

29 1
8 1
30 2
ALARM P3 MISC IF J10

CEN ALARMS HARNESS

(445-0681567)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

ALARM_P3 1 TAL_NC ALARM_O/P 6

ALARM_P3 2 DAL_NO ALARM_O/P 8
ALARM_P3 3 TAL_CM ALARM_O/P 18
ALARM_P3 4 DAL_CM ALARM_O/P 21
ALARM_P3 5 TAL_NO ALARM_O/P 5
ALARM_P3 6 DAL_NC ALARM_O/P 9
ALARM_P3 7 TAL_OUT MISC_IF_P6 1
ALARM_P3 8 SAL_NO ALARM_O/P 19
ALARM_P3 9 TAL_IN MISC_IF_P6 2
ALARM_P3 10 SAL_CM ALARM_O/P 7
ALARM_P3 12 SAL_NC ALARM_O/P 20
ALARM_P3 14 CAL_NC ALARM_O/P 23

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-2 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

ALARM_P3 15 GND SPLICE_1 1

ALARM_P3 16 CAL_CM ALARM_O/P 10
ALARM_P3 17 GND SPLICE_1 1
ALARM_P3 18 CAL_NO ALARM_O/P 22
ALARM_P3 19 GND SPLICE_1 1
ALARM_P3 20 CSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 1
ALARM_P3 21 GND SPLICE_1 1
ALARM_P3 22 DSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 2
ALARM_P3 24 SSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 3
ALARM_P3 25 CTST_OUT ALARM_O/P 3
ALARM_P3 26 TSTS_NC MISC_IF_P10 4
ALARM_P3 27 CTST_IN ALARM_O/P 16
ALARM_P3 28 12V ALARM_O/P 12
ALARM_P3 29 12V RTN GND_1 1
GND_1 1 12V RTN ALARM_O/P 25
GND_1 1 12V RTN ALARM_O/P 1
SPLICE_1 1 GND MISC_IF_P10 8

Connector Pin Out

29 1
8 1
30 2
ALARM P3 MISC IF P10

ALARM DOOR SWITCH HARNESS

(445-0683781)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

ALARM P2 1 BOLT N/O BOLT THROWN 4

ALARM P2 3 BOLT COM BOLT THROWN 1
ALARM P2 1 REED SW A DOOR CLOSED A
ALARM P2 4 REED SW B DOOR CLOSED B

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-3
CABLE INFORMATION

AUDIO SYSTEMS

AUDIO JACK VOLUME CONTROL

(445-0676972)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SWITCH 1 SWA CONN P1 1

SWITCH 2 SWB CONN P1 3

PRIVATE AUDIO VOLUME CONTROL

(445-0682057)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

H / P_SOCKET 1 AUDIO_LH AUDIO AMP P5 4

H / P_SOCKET 2 AUDIO_RH AUDIO AMP P5 5
H / P_SOCKET 3 DETECT AUDIO AMP P5 8
H / P_SOCKET 4 SHIELD GND AUDIO AMP P5 3
SWITCH 1 GND AUDIO AMP P5 2
SWITCH 2 SENSE AUDIO AMP P5 1

Connector Pin out

7 1
8 2
AUDIO AMP_P5

AUDIO LOOPBACK
(009-0011523)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

1 AUDIO LEFT CHANNEL 1

2 AUDIO RIGHT CHANNEL 2
3 ANALOG GROUND 3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-4 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

HEADPHONE HARNESS
(445-0679078)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

AUDIO OUT 1 SPKR LH HEADPHONE - S 1

AUDIO OUT 2 SPKR RH HEADPHONE - S 2
AUDIO OUT 3 DETECT HEADPHONE - S 3
AUDIO OUT 4 GROUND HEADPHONE - S 4

Connector Pin out

3 4
1 2

AUDIO OUT

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-5
CABLE INFORMATION

CABINETRY

CABINET HARNESS
(445-0683017)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

AUDIO AMP P3 1 SPEAKER LEFT A FACIA P2 14

AUDIO AMP P3 3 SPEAKER B FACIA P2 4
AUDIO CNTL P2 3 DATA + FACIA P1 1
AUDIO CNTL P2 4 DATA - FACIA P1 5
AUDIO CNTL P2 5 RESET + FACIA P1 2
AUDIO CNTL P2 6 RESET - FACIA P1 6
CHASSIS EARTH 2 E EARTH ISOL IN 3
CORE AUDIO 3 SHIELD AUDIO AMP P1 4
CORE AUDIO 1 LEFT AUDIO AMP P1 1
CORE AUDIO 2 RIGHT AUDIO AMP P1 3
CORE NETWORK 1 USER NETWORK 1
CORE NETWORK 2 USER NETWORK 2
CORE NETWORK 3 USER NETWORK 3
CORE NETWORK 4 USER NETWORK 4
CORE NETWORK 5 USER NETWORK 5
CORE NETWORK 6 USER NETWORK 6
CORE NETWORK 7 USER NETWORK 7
CORE NETWORK 8 USER NETWORK 8
EOP P5 1 DISABLE EOP P5 5
EOP P5 4 GND R/A S/V COM 1
EOP P5 3 SUPERVISOR R/A S/V N/C 1
EOP P5 2 NORMAL R/A S/V N/O 1
EOP SDC 3 DATA + JOURNAL SDC 3
EOP SDC 4 DATA - JOURNAL SDC 4
EOP SDC 5 RESET + JOURNAL SDC 5
EOP SDC 6 RESET - JOURNAL SDC 6
F250 1 DC 3 5V F250 2 DC 3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-6 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

F250 1 DC 1 5V RTN F250 2 DC 1

F250 1 DC 4 12V F250 2 DC 4
F250 1 DC 2 12V RTN F250 2 DC 2
F250 2 DC 4 12V TOP BOX FAN 1
F250 2 DC 2 12V RTN TOP BOX FAN 2
FACIA P1 3 DATA + EOP SDC 3
FACIA P1 7 DATA - EOP SDC 4
FACIA P1 4 RESET + EOP SDC 5
FACIA P1 8 RESET - EOP SDC 6
FILTER EARTH 1 EARTH CHASSIS EARTH 1 E
FILTER LIVE 1 LIVE ISOL IN 1
FILTER NEUTRAL 1 NEUTRAL ISOL IN 2
IMCRW P1 3 MEI 1A IMCRW MEI 3
IMCRW P1 2 MEI 1B IMCRW MEI 2
IMCRW P1 1 12V IMCRW MEI 1
ISOL OUT 1 LIVE UPS IN 1
ISOL OUT 2 NEUTRAL UPS IN 2
ISOL OUT 3 EARTH UPS IN 3
JOURNAL DC 6 CHASSIS GND STATEMENT P7 6
JOURNAL DC 3 POWERGOOD STATEMENT P7 3
JOURNAL SDC 3 DATA + STATEMENT SDC 3
JOURNAL SDC 4 DATA - STATEMENT SDC 4
JOURNAL SDC 5 RESET + STATEMENT SDC 5
JOURNAL SDC 6 RESET - STATEMENT SDC 6
MISC IF P12 15 5V F250 1 DC 3
MISC IF P12 3 5V RTN F250 1 DC 1
MISC IF P12 14 12V F250 1 DC 4
MISC IF P12 9 12V RTN F250 1 DC 2
MISC IF P3 8 BEEPER A FACIA P2 11
MISC IF P3 7 BEEPER B FACIA P2 1
MISC IF P3 3 GND EOP P4 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-7
CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

MISC IF P3 4 MODE EOP P4 3

MISC IF P3 1 LED EOP P4 4
MISC IF P4 3 DATA + AUDIO CNTL P2 3
MISC IF P4 4 DATA - AUDIO CNTL P2 4
MISC IF P4 5 RESET + AUDIO CNTL P2 5
MISC IF P4 6 RESET - AUDIO CNTL P2 6
PSU STD P3 5 5V MISC IF P12 15
PSU STD P3 7 5V RTN MISC IF P12 3
PSU STD P3 16 5V MM SENSOR DC 4
PSU STD P3 18 5V RTN MM SENSOR DC 1
PSU STD P3 20 12V MM SENSOR DC 5
PSU STD P3 19 12V RTN MM SENSOR DC 2
PSU STD P3 15 5V TEST CONNECTOR 5
PSU STD P3 17 5V RTN TEST CONNECTOR 1
PSU STD P3 20 12V TEST CONNECTOR 6
PSU STD P3 19 12V RTN TEST CONNECTOR 2
PSU STD P3 12 24V TEST CONNECTOR 8
PSU STD P3 14 24V RTN TEST CONNECTOR 4
PSU STD P3 6 5V SAFE HUB DC 2
PSU STD P3 8 5V RTN SAFE HUB DC 1
PSU STD P3 1 24V MISC IF P12 11
PSU STD P3 3 24V RTN MISC IF P12 10
PSU STD P3 10 12V MISC IF P12 14
PSU STD P3 9 12V RTN MISC IF P12 9
PSU STD P4 2 24V STATEMENT P7 8
PSU STD P4 4 24V RTN STATEMENT P7 4
PSU STD P4 6 5V STATEMENT P7 5
PSU STD P4 8 5V RTN STATEMENT P7 1
PSU STD P4 1 24V RECIEPT DC 8
PSU STD P4 3 24V RTN RECIEPT DC 4
PSU STD P4 5 5V RECIEPT DC 5

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-8 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

PSU STD P4 7 5V RTN RECIEPT DC 1

PSU STD P4 11 24V IMCRW DC 1
PSU STD P4 13 24V RTN IMCRW DC 2
PSU STD P4 10 12V EOP DC 4
PSU STD P4 9 12V RTN EOP DC 2
PSU STD P4 15 5V EOP DC 3
PSU STD P4 17 5V RTN EOP DC 1
PSU STD P7 8 SHUTDOWN PSU STD P7 4
PSU STD P7 1 POWERGOOD RECIEPT DC 3
PSU STD P7 1 POWERGOOD MISC IF P12 5
R/A S/V COM 1 GND FACIA P2 2
R/A S/V NC 1 SUP FACIA P2 12
R/A S/V NO 1 NORMAL FACIA P2 3
RECEIPT DC 5 5V JOURNAL DC 5
RECEIPT DC 1 5V RTN JOURNAL DC 1
RECEIPT DC 8 24V JOURNAL DC 8
RECEIPT DC 4 24V RTN JOURNAL DC 4
RECEIPT DC 3 POWERGOOD JOURNAL DC 3
RECEIPT DC 6 CHASSIS GND JOURNAL DC 6
SAFE RIGHT SDC RTN 3 DATA + SAFE LEFT SDC 3
SAFE RIGHT SDC RTN 4 DATA - SAFE LEFT SDC 4
SAFE RIGHT SDC RTN 5 RESET + SAFE LEFT SDC 5
SAFE RIGHT SDC RTN 6 RESET - SAFE LEFT SDC 6
SAFE SHUTTER 5 5V FACIA P2 15
SAFE SHUTTER 1 5V RTN FACIA P2 5
SAFE SHUTTER 6 24V FACIA P2 16
SAFE SHUTTER 2 24V RTN FACIA P2 6
SAFE SHUTTER 7 SOL FACIA P2 17
SAFE SHUTTER 3 RTN FACIA P2 7
SAFE SHUTTER 8 OPEN FACIA P2 18
SAFE SHUTTER 4 LOCK FACIA P2 8

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-9
CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

STATEMENT P7 6 CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND PRINTER 1

STATEMENT SDC 3 DATA + SAFE RIGHT SDC 3
STATEMENT SDC 4 DATA - SAFE RIGHT SDC 4
STATEMENT SDC 5 RESET + SAFE RIGHT SDC 5
STATEMENT SDC 6 RESET - SAFE RIGHT SDC 6
TEST CONNECTOR 5 5V AUDIO CNTL P1 5
TEST CONNECTOR 1 5V RTN AUDIO CNTL P1 1
TEST CONNECTOR 6 12V AUDIO AMP P4 1
TEST CONNECTOR 2 12V RTN AUDIO AMP P4 2
UPS OUT 1 LIVE AC DIST IN 1
UPS OUT 2 NEUTRAL AC DIST IN 2
UPS OUT 3 EARTH AC DIST IN 3

Connector Pin Out

1 6 13 1 13 1
14 2 14 2
IMCRW_DC STATEMENT_SDC JOURNAL_SDC

13 1 13 1 13 1
14 2 14 2 14 2
SAFE_LEFT_DC SAFE_RIGHT_SDC EOP_SDC

13 1 13 1 7 1
14 2 14 2 8 2
MISC_IF_P4 AUDIO_CNTL_P2 MISC_IF_P3

5 1 4 1 4 1

EOP_P5 EOP_P4 TOP_BOX_FAN

3 3 3 3 3
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2

ISOL_IN ISOL_OUT UPS_IN UPS_OUT AC_DIST_IN

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-10 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

SAFE AC HARNESS
(445-0682854)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

DISPENSER _OUT 1 LIVE AC_J1 1

DISPENSER _OUT 2 NEUTRAL AC_J1 2
DISPENSER _OUT 3 EARTH AC_J1 3

Connector Pin Out

3
2 1

DISPENSER_OUT

SAFE DC
(445-0680419)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

STD PSU P5 P6 1 24V SAFE DC 11

STD PSU P5 P6 2 24V SAFE DC 12
STD PSU P5 P6 3 24V RTN SAFE DC 3
STD PSU P5 P6 4 24V RTN SAFE DC 4
STD PSU P5 P6 15 5V SAFE DC 9
STD PSU P5 P6 16 5V SAFE DC 13
STD PSU P5 P6 17 5V RTN SAFE DC 1
STD PSU P5 P6 18 5V RTN SAFE DC 5
STD PSU P5 P6 19 12V RTN SAFE DC 2
STD PSU P5 P6 20 12V SAFE DC 10

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-11
CABLE INFORMATION

SAFE EXTENSION
(445-0680569)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SAFE_DC 1 5V RTN POWER_ADAPTOR 1

SAFE_DC 3 24V RNT POWER_ADAPTOR 3
SAFE_DC 4 24V RTN POWER_ADAPTOR 4
SAFE_DC 5 24V RTN POWER_ADAPTOR 5
SAFE_DC 6 24V RTN POWER_ADAPTOR 6
SAFE_DC 7 24V POWER_ADAPTOR 7
SAFE_DC 9 5V POWER_ADAPTOR 9
SAFE_DC 11 24V POWER_ADAPTOR 11
SAFE_DC 12 24V POWER_ADAPTOR 12
SAFE_DC 13 24V POWER_ADAPTOR 13
SAFE_DC 14 24V POWER_ADAPTOR 14
SAFE_DC 15 24V POWER_ADAPTOR 15
SAFE_MEI 1 MEI_A MEI_ADAPTOR 1
SAFE_MEI 2 MEI_B MEI_ADAPTOR 2
SAFE_MEI 3 12V MEI_ADAPTOR 3
SAFE_SHUTTER 3 RTN SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 3
SAFE_SHUTTER 4 LOCK SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 4
SAFE_SHUTTER 7 SOL SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 7
SAFE_SHUTTER 8 OPEN SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 8
SAFE_SHUTTER 1 5V RTN SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 1
SAFE_SHUTTER 2 24V RTN SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 2
SAFE_SHUTTER 5 5V SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 5
SAFE_SHUTTER 6 24V SHUTTER_ADAPTOR 6

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-12 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

SAFE SHUTTER HARNESS

(445-0680298)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SAFE_SHUTTER 3 RTN SHUTTER_P1 3

SAFE_SHUTTER 4 LOCK SHUTTER_P1 4
SAFE_SHUTTER 7 SOL SHUTTER_P1 8
SAFE_SHUTTER 8 OPEN SHUTTER_P1 9
SAFE_SHUTTER 1 5V RTN SHUTTER_P1 1
SAFE_SHUTTER 2 24V RTN SHUTTER_P1 2
SAFE_SHUTTER 5 5V SHUTTER_P1 6
SAFE_SHUTTER 6 24V SHUTTER_P1 7

SAFE MEI
(445-0680299)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SAFE MEI 3 12V MEI J1 1

SAFE MEI 1 MEI A MEI J1 2
SAFE MEI 2 MEI B MEI J1 3
MEI J1 1 12V MEI P1 1
MEI J1 2 MEI A MEI P1 2
MEI J1 3 MEI B MEI P1 3
MEI P1 1 12V FACIA MEI 1
MEI P1 2 MEI A FACIA MEI 2
MEI P1 3 MEI B FACIA MEI 3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-13
CABLE INFORMATION

SAFE HEATER
(445-0682855)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

HEATER 2 THERMO HEATER 5

HEATER_P1 1 LIVE HEATER_J1 1
HEATER_P1 2 NEUTRAL HEATER_J1 2
HEATER_P1 3 EARTH HEATER 3
HEATER_P1 3 EARTH HEATER_J1 3
HEATER_P1 1 LIVE HEATER 1
HEATER_P1 2 NEUTRAL HEATER 4

HUB EXTENSION
(445-0679418)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

HUB DC 1 5V RTN IO HUB 1

HUB DC 2 5V IO HUB 2

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-14 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

CURRENCY DISPENSER

RETRACTION HARNESS
(445-0682853)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

AC_P1 1 LIVE I / LOCK_P7 4

AC_P1 2 NEUTRAL I / LOCK_P7 3
AC_P1 3 EARTH I / LOCK_P7 2
CNTL_P1 8 I / L RTN I / LOCK_P2 7
CNTL_P1 16 I/L I / LOCK_P2 3
CNTL_P2 1 N/A SDC_P1 1
CNTL_P2 2 N/A SDC_P1 2
CNTL_P2 3 N/A SDC_P1 3
CNTL_P2 4 N/A SDC_P1 4
CNTL_P2 5 N/A SDC_P1 5
CNTL_P2 6 DATA SDC_P1 6
CNTL_P2 7 RESET + SDC_P1 7
CNTL_P2 8 RESET - SDC_P1 8
CNTL_P2 9 N/A SDC_P1 9
CNTL_P2 10 N/A SDC_P1 10
DC_P1 2 +12V RTN CNTL_P1 2
DC_P1 10 +12V CNTL_P1 10
DC_P1 1 +5V RTN CNTL_P1 1
DC_P1 1 +5V RTN MSC_P1 1
DC_P1 3 +24V RTN CNTL_P1 4
DC_P1 3 +24V RTN MSC_P1 2
DC_P1 4 +24V RTN I / LOCK_P2 5
DC_P1 5 +5V RTN CNTL_P1 1
DC_P1 9 +5V CNTL_P1 9
DC_P1 9 +5V MSC_P1 5
DC_P1 11 +24V CNTL_P1 12
DC_P1 11 +24V MSC_P1 6

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-15
CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

DC_P1 12 +24V I / LOCK_P2 1

DC_P1 13 +5V CNTL_P1 9
DISP_AC_P1 1 NEUTRAL I / LOCK_P8 5
DISP_AC_P1 2 LIVE I / LOCK_P8 4
DISP_AC_P1 3 EARTH I / LOCK_P8 6
I / LOCK_P2 2 I / L SW I / L_P1 1
I / LOCK_P2 6 I / L SW RTN I / L_P1 2
MSC_P1 3 DISP LOCK RTN CNTL_P1 6
MSC_P1 4 DISP LOCK CNTL_P1 5
MSC_P1 7 DISP SOL CNTL_P1 14
MSC_P1 8 DISP OPEN CNTL_P1 7
SDC_J1 1 N/A CNTL_P2 1
SDC_J1 2 N/A CNTL_P2 2
SDC_J1 3 N/A CNTL_P2 3
SDC_J1 4 N/A CNTL_P2 4
SDC_J1 5 N/A CNTL_P2 5
SDC_J1 6 DATA - CNTL_P2 6
SDC_J1 7 RESET + CNTL_P2 7
SDC_J1 8 RESET - CNTL_P2 8
SDC_J1 9 N/A CNTL_P2 9
SDC_J1 10 N/A CNTL_P2 10

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-16 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

ICS RETRACTION HARNESS

(445-0683762)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

AA_INP_P7 1 ICS_SAFE_P1 17
AA_INP_P7 2 ICS_SAFE_P1 9
AA_INP_P7 3 ICS_SAFE_P1 18
AA_INP_P7 4 ICS_SAFE_P1 10
DOOR_INP_P3 1 ICS_SAFE_P1 15
DOOR_INP_P3 2 ICS_SAFE_P1 3
DOOR_INP_P3 3 SPR 2 1
DOOR_INP_P3 4 SPR 2 2
DOOR_INP_P3 5 SPR 1 1
DOOR_INP_P3 6 SPR 1 2
DOOR_INP_P3 7 ICS_SAFE_P1 13
DOOR_INP_P3 8 ICS_SAFE_P1 1
DOOR_INP_P3 9 ICS_SAFE_P1 14
DOOR_INP_P3 10 ICS_SAFE_P1 2
ICS_SAFE_P1 5 ICS_SAFE_P1 19
ICS_SAFE_P1 6 ICS_SAFE_P1 20
ICS_SAFE_P1 7 ICS_SAFE_P1 21
ICS_SAFE_P1 8 ICS_SAFE_P1 22
LED_OPT_P8 1 ICS_SAFE_P1 11
LED_OPT_P8 2 ICS_SAFE_P1 23
LED_OPT_P8 3 ICS_SAFE_P1 12
LED_OPT_P8 4 ICS_SAFE_P1 24

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-17
CABLE INFORMATION

ICS PRODUCT
(445-0678514)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SAFE ICS 1 COM DOOR SW 1 COM
SAFE ICS 13 N/O DOOR SW 1 N/O
SAFE ICS 2 COM DOOR SW 2 COM
SAFE ICS 14 N/O DOOR SW 2 N/O
SAFE ICS 3 COM BOLT SW 1 1
SAFE ICS 15 N/C BOLT SW 1 2
SAFE ICS 4 COM BOLT SW 2 1
SAFE ICS 16 N/C BOLT SW 2 2
SAFE ICS 5 EXT ALARM 1 SAFE ICS 17
SAFE ICS 6 EXT ALARM 2 SAFE ICS 18
SAFE ICS 7 EXT ALARM 3 SAFE ICS 19
SAFE ICS 8 EXT ALARM 4 SAFE ICS 20
SAFE ICS 9 RTN ANTI AXE 2
SAFE ICS 10 RTN ANTI AXE 4
SAFE ICS 21 5V ANTI AXE 1
SAFE ICS 22 5V ANTI AXE 3
SAFE ICS 11 CATHODE GREEN LED C
SAFE ICS 23 ANODE GREEN LED A
SAFE ICS 12 CATHODE RED LED C
SAFE ICS 24 ANODE RED LED A

INTERLOCK HARNESS
(445-0676795)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

I / L_J1 1 I / L SW NO 1
I / L_J1 2 I / L SW RTN COM 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-18 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

COIN DISPENSER

COIN DISPENSER HARNESS

(445-0682928)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

24V_12V_AUX_P 3 COIN_DC 3
24V_12V_AUX_P 4 COIN_DC 1
24V_12V_AUX_J 1 24V_12_AUX_P 1
24V_12V_AUX_J 2 24V_12_AUX_P 2
24V_12V_AUX_J 3 24V_12_AUX_P 3
24V_12V_AUX_J 4 24V_12_AUX_P 4
COIN_FAS_SENSE 1 COIN_SENSE 1
COIN_FAS_SENSE 2 COIN_SENSE 2
COIN_FAS_SENSE 3 COIN_SENSE 3
COIN_FAS_SENSE 4 COIN_SENSE 4
GLOBETEC_E 4 GLOBETEC_E 6
GLOBETEC_E 7 GLOBETEC_E 8
GLOBETEC_E 2 RXD COIN_DISP_MAIN 5
GLOBETEC_E 3 TXD COIN_DISP_MAIN 6
GLOBETEC_E 5 GND COIN_DISP_MAIN 7

Connector Pin Out

3 4 4 3 4 3

1 2 2 1 2 1

COIN_FAS_SENSE COIN_SENSE COIN_DC

4 3 3 4

2 1 1 2

24V_12V_AUX_P 24V_12V_AUX_J

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 7 8 9
COIN_DISP_MAIN
GLOBETEC_E

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-19
CABLE INFORMATION

CPM

6676 CPM HARNESS

(445-0682927)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

24V_12 VAUX 3 S CPM_PWR 2

24V_12 VAUX 4 + 24V CPM_PWR 1
CPM_FACIA_J1 1 SHUTTER_C CPM_CTRL_P2 1
CPM_FACIA_J1 2 SHUTTER_RTN CPM_CTRL_P2 2
CPM_FACIA_J1 3 SHTR_O CPM_CTRL_P2 3
CPM_FACIA_J1 4 SHUTTER_ENA CPM_CTRL_P2 4
CPM_FACIA_J1 5 N/C CPM_CTRL_P2 5
CPM_FACIA_J1 6 + 12V CPM_CTRL_P2 6
CPM_FACIA_J1 7 MEI_A CPM_CTRL_P2 7
CPM_FACIA_J1 8 MEI_B CPM_CTRL_P2 8
PC_CORE_USB 1 USB CPM_USB 1

Connector Pin out

5 6 7 8 2 3 4 8 7 6 5

1 2 3 4 1 1 2 4 3 2 1

CPM_FACIA_J1 CPM_PWR 24V_12V_AUX CPM_CTRL_P2

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-20 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

6676 CPM FACIA HARNESS

(445-0683121)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENTS PIN

CPM_FACIA_PI 1 LOCK SHUTTER PCB 7

CPM_FACIA_PI 2 RTN SHUTTER PCB 3
CPM_FACIA_PI 3 OPEN SHUTTER PCB 8
CPM_FACIA_PI 4 SOL SHUTTER PCB 9
CPM_FACIA_PI 6 + 12V CPM_MEI 1
CPM_FACIA_PI 8 MEI_B CPM_MEI 2
CPM_FACIA_PI 7 MEI_B CPM_MEI 3
SHUTTER_AUX 1 24V RTN SHUTTER PCB 5
SHUTTER_AUX 2 5V RTN SHUTTER PCB 4
SHUTTER_AUX 3 24V SHUTTER PCB 11
SHUTTER_AUX 4 5V SHUTTER PCB 10

8 7 6 5 3 4 12 11 10 9 8 7
4 3 2 1 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1

CPM_FACIA_P1 SHUTTER_AUX SHUTTER_PCB

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-21
CABLE INFORMATION

DISPLAY

VIDEO CABLE 2200MM

(009-0020046)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 1 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 1

(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 2 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 2
(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 3 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 3
(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 6 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 6
(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 7 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 7
(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 8 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 8
(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 10 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 10
(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 13 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 13
(STRAIGHT CONNECTOR) 14 (45 DEGREE CONNECTOR) 14

Connector Pin Out

5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 10 9 8 7 6
15 14 13 12 11 15 14 13 12 11

(STRAIGHT) (45 DEGREE)

USB TYPE A TO MINI TYPE B 2M

(009-0019626)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

USB A 1 V BUS (RED) USB B 1

USB A 2 D - (WHITE) USB B 2
USB A 3 D + (GREEN) USB B 3
USB A 4 GND (BLACK USB B 4
USB A SHELL SHIELD USB B SHELL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-22 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 2M WITH FERRITE

(445-0683018)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

USB A 1 V BUS (RED) USB B 1

USB A 2 D - (WHITE) USB B 2
USB A 3 D + (GREEN) USB B 3
USB A 4 GND (BLACK USB B 4
USB A SHELL SHIELD USB B SHELL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-23
CABLE INFORMATION

EXTERNAL CABLING

REMOTE STATUS MONITOR

(445-0676977)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

MISC IF J3 1 LED 0 REMOTE STATUS 2

MISC IF J3 2 LED 1 REMOTE STATUS 3
MISC IF J3 3 LED 2 REMOTE STATUS 4
MISC IF J3 4 5V FUSED REMOTE STATUS 1

REMOTE RELAY / NIGHT DEPOSIT

(445-0676976)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

MISC DRIVER P1 5 GND NIGHT DEPO 2 2

MISC DRIVER P1 6 GND NIGHT DEPO 1 2
MISC DRIVER P1 7 DEP SOL RTN NIGHT DEPO 1 3
MISC DRIVER P1 8 DEP SOL NIGHT DEPO 1 1
MISC DRIVER P1 13 BAG SWITCH NIGHT DEPO 1 4
MISC DRIVER P1 14 DOOR SWITCH NIGHT DEPO 2 1
MISC DRIVER P1 15 RELAY 1 REMOTE RELAY 2
MISC DRIVER P1 16 RELAY 2 REMOTE RELAY 1
MISC IF P11 1 RELAY MISC DRIVER P1 10
MISC IF P11 2 NIGHT DEPO MISC DRIVER P1 9
MISC IF P11 3 5V MISC DRIVER P1 4
MISC IF P11 4 24V RTN MISC DRIVER P1 3
MISC IF P11 6 BAG MISC DRIVER P1 11
MISC IF P11 7 5V MISC DRIVER P1 2
MISC IF P11 8 24V MISC DRIVER P1 1
MISC IF P11 12 DOOR MISC DRIVER P1 12

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-24 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

CUSTOMER RS232
(445-0677470)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

CORE RS232 1 CORE RS232 OUT 1

CORE RS232 2 CORE RS232 OUT 2
CORE RS232 3 CORE RS232 OUT 3
CORE RS232 4 CORE RS232 OUT 4
CORE RS232 5 CORE RS232 OUT 5
CORE RS232 6 CORE RS232 OUT 6
CORE RS232 7 CORE RS232 OUT 7
CORE RS232 8 CORE RS232 OUT 8
CORE RS232 9 CORE RS232 OUT 9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-25
CABLE INFORMATION

FACIA

6676 FACIA HARNESS

(445-0682926)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

ADVERT_GND 1 ADVERT GND LIGHT BOX 3

CAMERA_DC 2 12V SMART_DIP_DC 2
CAMERA_DC 1 12V RTN SMART_DIP_DC 1
EPP_A 14 SENSE FDK_RIGHT 8
EPP_A 7 BOTT FDK_RIGHT 7
EPP_A 13 LOW - MID FDK_RIGHT 6
EPP_A 6 UP - MID FDK_RIGHT 5
EPP_A 12 TOP FDK_RIGHT 4
EPP_A 5 COMM FDK_RIGHT 2
EPP_A 11 SENSE FDK_LEFT 8
EPP_A 4 BOTT FDK_LEFT 7
EPP_A 10 LOW - MID FDK_LEFT 6
EPP_A 3 UP - MID FDK_LEFT 5
EPP_A 9 TOP FDK_LEFT 4
EPP_A 2 COMM FDK_LEFT 2
FACIA_J1 2 RESET + EPP_SDC_A 2
FACIA_J1 6 RESET - EPP_SDC_A 6
FACIA_J1 3 DATA + EPP_SDC_A 3
FACIA_J1 7 DATA - EPP_SDC_A 7
FACIA_J1 4 RESET + EPP_SDC_A 4
FACIA_J1 8 RESET - EPP_SDC_A 8
FACIA_J1 1 DATA + EPP_SDC_A 1
FACIA_J1 5 DATA - EPP_SDC_A 5
FACIA_J2 11 BEEPER_A BEEPER_A 1
FACIA_J2 1 BEEPER_B BEEPER_B 1
FACIA_J2 14 SPEAKER_A SPEAKER_A 1
FACIA_J2 4 SPEAKER_B SPEAKER_B 1
FACIA_J2 17 SOL SHUTTER_PCB 9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-26 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

FACIA_J2 7 RTN SHUTTER_PCB 3

FACIA_J2 18 OPEN SHUTTER_PCB 8
FACIA_J2 8 LOCK SHUTTER_PCB 7
FACIA_J2 2 GND F/A_S/V_COM 1
FACIA_J2 12 SUPERVISOR F/A_S/V_NC 1
FACIA_J2 3 NORMAL F/A_S/V_NO 1
MISC_IF_P16 12 COIN_MEI 3
MISC_IF_P16 10 COIN_MEI 2
MISC_IF_P16 8 COIN_MEI 1
MISC_IF_P16 1 MEI_5A SAFE_LEFT_MEI 3
(DISPENSER _MEI)
MISC_IF_P16 3 MEI_5B SAFE_LEFT_MEI 2
(DISPENSER_MEI)
MISC_IF_P16 2 12V SAFE_LEFT_MEI 1
(DISPENSER_MEI)
MISC_IF_P16 5 MEI_6A MISC_IF_P8 15
MISC_IF_P16 7 MEI_6B MISC_IF_P8 12
MISC_IF_P16 4 12V PRINTER_MEI 1
MISC_IF_P16 9 MEI_7A RECIEPT_MEI 3
MISC_IF_P16 11 MEI_7B RECIEPT_MEI 2
MISC_IF_P16 6 12V RECIEPT_MEI 1
MISC_IF_P8 7 MEI_1A DIP_MEI 3
MISC_IF_P8 9 MEI_1B DIP_MEI 2
MISC_IF_P8 2 12V DIP_MEI 1
MISC_IF_P8 7 MEI_1A IMCRW_J1 3
MISC_IF_P8 9 MEI_1B IMCRW_J1 2
MISC_IF_P8 2 12V IMCRW_J1 1
MISC_IF_P8 11 MEI_2A SAFE_RIGHT_MEI 3
(PPD_MEI)
MISC_IF_P8 13 MEI_2B SAFE_RIGHT_MEI 2
(PPD_MEI)
MISC_IF_P8 4 12V SAFE_RIGHT_MEI 1
(PPD_MEI)
MISC_IF_P8 15 MEI_PASS A PRINTER_MEI 3
MISC_IF_P8 12 MEI_PASS B PRINTER_MEI 2

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-27
CABLE INFORMATION

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

PSU_STD_P2 6 + 5V SHUTTER_PCB 10
PSU_STD_P2 8 + 5V RTN SHUTTER_PCB 4
PSU_STD_P2 12 + 24V SHUTTER_PCB 11
PSU_STD_P2 13 + 24V RTN SHUTTER_PCB 5
PSU_STD_P2 2 24V LIGHT_BOX_VEST 1
PSU_STD_P2 4 24V RTN LIGHT_BOX_VEST 4
PSU_STD_P2 11 + 24 V 24_12V_AUX 4
PSU_STD_P2 14 + 24V RTN 24_12V_AUX 3
PSU_STD_P2 10 12V 24_12V_AUX 2
PSU_STD_P2 9 + 12V RTN 24_12V_AUX 1
PSU_STD_P2 5 5V 12.1”_DC 1
PSU_STD_P2 7 5V RTN 12.1”_DC 3
PSU_STD_P2 16 + 5V LED_VEST 1
PSU_STD_P2 18 + 5V RTN LED_VEST 2
PSU_STD_P2 6 + 5V SHUTTER_AUX 4
PSU_STD_P2 8 + 5V RTN SHUTTER_AUX 2
PSU_STD_P2 12 + 24V SHUTTER_AUX 3
PSU_STD_P2 13 + 24V RTN SHUTTER_AUX 1
PSU_STD_P2 10 +12V 12.1”_DC 2
PSU_STD_P2 9 +12V RTN 12.1”_DC 4
PSU_STD_P2 1 24V 15”_DC 1
PSU_STD_P2 3 24V RTN 15”_DC 2
PSU_STD_P2 20 12V CAMERA_DC 2
PSU_STD_P2 19 12V RTN CAMERA_DC 1
PSU_STD_P2 15 5V EPP_A 1
PSU_STD_P2 17 5V RTN EPP_A 8
PSU_STD_P2 2 24V LIGHT_BOX 1
PSU_STD_P2 4 FACIA LIGHT LIGHT_BOX 4

Connector Pin Out

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-28 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

FACIA SHUTTER
(445-0679781)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SHUTTER _J1 1 5V RTN SHUTTER PCB 4

SHUTTER _J1 2 24V RTN SHUTTER PCB 5
SHUTTER _J1 3 RTN SHUTTER PCB 3
SHUTTER _J1 4 LOCK SHUTTER PCB 7
SHUTTER _J1 6 5V SHUTTER PCB 10
SHUTTER _J1 7 24V SHUTTER PCB 11
SHUTTER _J1 8 SOL SHUTTER PCB 9
SHUTTER _J1 9 OPEN SHUTTER PCB 8

FACIA MEI
(445-0679782)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

MEI P1 1 12V FACIA MEI 1

MEI P1 2 MEI A FACIA MEI 2
MEI P1 3 MEI B FACIA MEI 3

ADVERT TUBE
(445-0677532)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

BALLAST 1 LAMP HOLDER 1 1

BALLAST 2 LAMP HOLDER 1 2
BOX GND 1 SPLICE 1 1
BALLAST 3 SPLICE 1 1
SPLICE 1 1 LAMP HOLDER 2 2
BALLAST 4 LAMP HOLDER 2 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-29
CABLE INFORMATION

UPPER ADVERT
(445-0684246)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

LIGHT_BOX_VEST 1 24V UPPER_ADVERT 1

LIGHT_BOX_VEST 3 ADVERT GND UPPER_ADVERT 3
LIGHT_BOX_VEST 4 F/L UPPER_ADVERT 4

ADVERT BALLAST
(445-0676979)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

LIGHT BOX 1 24V BALLAST 1 POS

LIGHT BOX 3 ADVERT GND BOX GND
LIGHT BOX 4 F/L BALLAST 1 NEG
BALLAST 1 POS 24V BALLAST 2 POS
BALLAST 1 NEG F/L BALLAST 2 NEG

TASK LIGHT
(445-0684247)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

RESISTOR 2 5V TASK_LIGHT 1
TASK_J1 1 5V RTN TASK_LIGHT 2
TASK_J1 2 5V RESISTOR 1

EPP ESD HARNESS

(445-0684341)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

ONE 1 TWO 1
TWO 1 THREE 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-30 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

EPP SDC INTERNAL HARNESS

(445-0683295)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

EPP_P1 1 5V BRICK_P1 1
EPP_P1 3 GND BRICK_P1 3
EPP_P1 4 GND BRICK_P1 4
EPP_P1 5 KEYBOARD_SYNC BRICK_P1 5
EPP_P1 6 SEC_RESET_LDC BRICK_P1 6
EPP_P1 8 GND BRICK_P1 8
EPP_P1 9 MOSI BRICK_P1 9
EPP_P1 10 MISO BRICK_P1 10
EPP_P1 11 SCLK BRICK_P1 11
EPP_P1 12 SS BRICK_P1 12

Connector Pin Out

2 22 21 1
1 21 22 2
EPP_P1 BRICK_P1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-31
CABLE INFORMATION

EPP EXTENSION
(445-0679774)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

EPP 3 5V EPP B 1
EPP 4 5V RTN EPP B 8
EPP 5 COMM EPP B 5
EPP 11 SENSE EPP B 11
EPP 12 SENSE EPP B 14
EPP 13 COMM EPP B 2
EPP 21 BOTT EPP B 7
EPP 22 LOW MID EPP B 13
EPP 23 UP MID EPP B 6
EPP 24 TOP EPP B 12
EPP 25 BOTT EPP B 4
EPP 26 LOW MID EPP B 10
EPP 27 UP MID EPP B 3
EPP 28 TOP EPP B 9
EPP B 1 DATA + EPP 3
EPP B 8 DATA + EPP 4
EPP SDC B 4 RESET + EPP SDC 7
EPP SDC B 5 DATA - EPP SDC 6
EPP SDC B 6 RESET - EPP SDC 8
EPP SDC B 7 DATA - EPP SDC 6
EPP SDC B 8 RESET - EPP SDC 8

Connector Pin Out

29 1 13 1
30 2 14 2
EPP EPP SDC

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-32 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

GBNA / GBRU

GBNA DC
(445-0680567)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

PSU DEPO P9 1 24V RTN GBNA DC 6

PSU DEPO P9 2 24V RTN GBNA DC 7
PSU DEPO P9 3 24V RTN GBNA DC 3
PSU DEPO P9 4 24V GBNA DC 14
PSU DEPO P9 5 24V GBNA DC 15
PSU DEPO P9 6 24V RTN GBNA DC 4
PSU DEPO P9 7 24V RTN GBNA DC 5
PSU DEPO P9 8 24V GBNA DC 11
PSU DEPO P9 9 24V GBNA DC 12
PSU DEPO P9 10 24V GBNA DC 13
PSU DEPO P11 6 SHUTDOWN CNTL PSU DEPO P11 3

GBRU SHUTTER PATCH HARNESS

(445-0682028)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

CAP_1 1 SOL SHUTTER_PCB 9

CAP_1 2 RTN SHUTTER_PCB 3
SHUTTER_HARNESS 3 RTN SHUTTER_PCB 3
SHUTTER_HARNESS 7 LOCK SHUTTER_PCB 7
SHUTTER_HARNESS 8 OPEN SHUTTER_PCB 8
SHUTTER_HARNESS 4 5V RTN SHUTTER_PCB 4
SHUTTER_HARNESS 5 24V RTN SHUTTER_PCB 5
SHUTTER_HARNESS 10 5V SHUTTER_PCB 10
SHUTTER_HARNESS 11 24V SHUTTER_PCB 11
SHUTTER_PCB 9 SOL SHUTTER_HARNESS 9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-33
CABLE INFORMATION

INTEGRATED CAMERA

VIDEO CAMERA
(445-0682027)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

BNC SYNC C CORE CAM ADPT 5

BNC SYNC SHLD SHIELD CAM ADPT 6
BNC VIDEO C CORE CAM ADPT 1
BNC VIDEO SHLD SHIELD CAM ADPT 2
CAMERA DC 1 12V RTN CAM ADPT 4
CAMERA DC 2 12V CAM ADPT 3

CAMERA VIDEO SYNC ADAPTOR

(445-0682059)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

CAM ADPT 3 +12V CAMERA_CNI 8

CAM ADPT 1 VID OUT CAMERA_CNI 5
CAM ADPT 5 SYNC IN CAMERA_CNI 9
CAM ADPT 4 GND CAMERA_CNI 7
CAM ADPT 2 VID SHIELD CAMERA_CNI 4
CAM ADPT 6 SYNC SHIELD CAM ADPT 2
CAM ADPT 4 BLC CAMERA_CNI 2

Connector Pin Out

4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CAM_ADPT CAMERA_CNI

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-34 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

MCRW

IMCRW COMMS
(445-0676734)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

IMCRW CORE 1 DCD IMCRW COMMS 1

IMCRW CORE 2 TXD IMCRW COMMS 2
IMCRW CORE 3 RXD IMCRW COMMS 3
IMCRW CORE 4 DSR IMCRW COMMS 4
IMCRW CORE 5 SIGNAL GND IMCRW COMMS 5
IMCRW CORE 6 DTR IMCRW COMMS 6
IMCRW CORE 7 CTS IMCRW COMMS 7
IMCRW CORE 8 RTS IMCRW COMMS 8

DIP SMART COMMS

(445-0676735)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

DIP SMART CORE 2 DCD DIP SMART COMMS 5

DIP SMART CORE 3 TXD DIP SMART COMMS 6
DIP SMART CORE 4 RXD DIP SMART COMMS 9
DIP SMART CORE 5 DSR DIP SMART COMMS 10
DIP SMART CORE 7 SIGNAL GND DIP SMART COMMS 8
DIP SMART CORE 8 DTR DIP SMART COMMS 7
DIP SMART DC 2 CTS DIP SMART COMMS 3
DIP SMART DC 1 RTS DIP SMART COMMS 4

Connector Pin Out

13 1
14 2
DIP SMART COMMS

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-35
CABLE INFORMATION

OPERATOR INTERFACE

GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL (GOP) POWER HARNESS

(445-0683201)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

JOURNAL_P 1 JOURNAL_J 1
JOURNAL_P 2 JOURNAL_J 2
JOURNAL_P 3 JOURNAL_J 3
JOURNAL_P 4 JOURNAL_J 4
JOURNAL_P 5 JOURNAL_J 5
JOURNAL_P 6 JOURNAL_J 6
JOURNAL_P 7 JOURNAL_J 7
JOURNAL_P 8 JOURNAL_J 8
JOURNAL_P 4 UOP POWER 2
JOURNAL_P 8 UOP POWER 3
STATEMENT_J 1 JOURNAL_J 1
STATEMENT_J 5 JOURNAL_J 5
STATEMENT_P 1 STATEMENT_J 1
STATEMENT_P 2 STATEMENT_J 2
STATEMENT_P 3 STATEMENT_J 3
STATEMENT_P 4 STATEMENT_J 4
STATEMENT_P 5 STATEMENT_J 5
STATEMENT_P 6 STATEMENT_J 6
STATEMENT_P 7 STATEMENT_J 7
STATEMENT_P 8 STATEMENT_J 8
UOP_PWR 3 UOP_PWR 1

Connector Pin Out

5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5

1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1

JOURNAL_J JOURNAL_P STATEMENT_J STATEMENT_P

3 2 1

UOP_PWR
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-36 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

DVI-D SINGLE LINK HARNESS (GOP)

(009-0020419)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

DVI -D 1 TMDS DATA 2 - DVI - D 1

DVI -D 2 TMDS DATA 2 + DVI - D 2
DVI -D 3 TMDS DATA 2 SHIELD DVI - D 3
DVI -D 6 DCC CLOCK DVI - D 6
DVI -D 7 DCC DATA DVI - D 7
DVI -D 9 TMDS DATA 1 - DVI - D 9
DVI -D 10 TMDS DATA 1 + DVI - D 10
DVI -D 11 TMDS DATA 1 SHIELD DVI - D 11
DVI -D 14 POWER + 5V DVI - D 14
DVI -D 15 GND (+ 5V & HV SYNC) DVI - D 15
DVI -D 16 HOT PLUG DETECT DVI - D 16
DVI -D 17 TMDS DATA 0 - DVI - D 17
DVI -D 18 TMDS DATA 0 + DVI - D 18
DVI -D 19 TMDS DATA 0 SHIELD DVI - D 19
DVI -D 22 TMDS CLOCK SHIELD DVI - D 22
DVI -D 23 TMDS CLOCK + DVI - D 23
DVI -D 24 TMDS CLOCK - DVI - D 24
DVI -D SHIELD GND DVI - D SHIELD

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-37
CABLE INFORMATION

EOP
(445-0676731)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

DC / DC 1 4 12V MODULE 7
DC / DC 1 5 GND MODULE 1
RESISTOR 1 GND DC / DC 1 2
RESISTOR 2 12V MODULE 7
UNI HARNESS 1 GND DC / DC 1 2
UNI HARNESS 1 GND MODULE 1
UNI HARNESS 2 GND MODULE 2
UNI HARNESS 3 5V DC / DC 1 1
UNI HARNESS 3 5V MODULE 5
UNI HARNESS 4 12V MODULE 6

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-38 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

PC CORE

AC DISTRIBUTION BOX
(445-0676729)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

AC IN E EARTH BOX GND 1

AC IN L LIVE FUSE IN
AC IN N NEUTRAL ROCKER SW 5
BOX GND 2 EARTH DISP E
BOX GND 3 EARTH PSU1 E
DISP E EARTH STATEMENT E
DISP L LIVE STATEMENT L
DISP N NEUTRAL STATEMENT N
FUSE OUT LIVE ROCKER SW 2
PSU 1 E EARTH PSU 2 E
PSU 1 L LIVE PSU 2 L
PSU 1 N NEUTRAL PSU 2 N
ROCKER SW 1 LIVE DISP L
ROCKER SW 1 LIVE PSU 1 L
ROCKER SW 4 NEUTRAL DISP N
ROCKER SW 4 NEUTRAL PSU 1 N
STATEMENT E EARTH CORE E
STATEMENT L LIVE CORE L
STATEMENT N NEUTRAL CORE N
ALARM J3 21 GND SPLICE 1
SPLICE 1 GND MISC IF J10 8

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-39
CABLE INFORMATION

AC CORE
(445-0680294)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

CORE OUT 1 LIVE CORE AC 1

CORE OUT 2 NEUTRAL CORE AC 2
CORE OUT 3 EARTH CORE AC 3

Connector Pin Out

3 3
2 1 1 2

CORE_OUT CORE_AC

FAN
(445-0680359)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

MISC AUX P 1 MISC AUX J 1

MISC AUX P 2 MISC AUX J 2
MISC AUX P 2 FAN 2
MISC AUX P 3 MISC AUX 3
MISC AUX P 4 MISC AUX 4
MISC AUX P 5 MISC AUX 5
MISC AUX P 6 MISC AUX 6
MISC AUX P 6 FAN 1
MISC AUX P 7 MISC AUX J 7
MISC AUX P 8 MISC AUX J 8

Connector Pin Out

8 5 5
4 1 1 4
MISC AUX P MISC AUX J

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-40 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

PSU DUAL AC
(445-0676730)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

PSU 1 1 LIVE PSD STD 1

PSU 1 2 NEUTRAL PSD STD 2
PSU 1 3 EARTH PSD STD 3
PSU 2 1 LIVE PSD DEPO 1
PSU 2 2 NEUTRAL PSD DEPO 2
PSU 2 3 EARTH PSD DEPO 3

PCCM
(445-0676980)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

CORE PCCM 2 TD PCCM OUT 2

CORE PCCM 3 RDD PCCM OUT 3
CORE PCCM 4 RTS PCCM OUT 4
CORE PCCM 5 CTS PCCM OUT 5
CORE PCCM 6 DSR PCCM OUT 6
CORE PCCM 7 SGND PCCM OUT 7
CORE PCCM 8 RLSD PCCM OUT 8
CORE PCCM 15 TSET PCCM OUT 15
CORE PCCM 17 RSET PCCM OUT 17
CORE PCCM 18 WCA PCCM OUT 18
CORE PCCM 20 DTR PCCM OUT 20
CORE PCCM 22 CI PCCM OUT 22
CORE PCCM 24 EXTSET PCCM OUT 24
CORE PCCM 25 WIN PCCM OUT 25

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-41
CABLE INFORMATION

5V BOOSTER
(445-0682053)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

JOURNAL_P 1 JOURNAL_J 1
JOURNAL_P 2 JOURNAL_J 2
JOURNAL_P 3 JOURNAL_J 3
JOURNAL_P 4 JOURNAL_J 4
JOURNAL_P 5 JOURNAL_J 5
JOURNAL_P 6 JOURNAL_J 6
JOURNAL_P 7 JOURNAL_J 7
JOURNAL_P 8 JOURNAL_J 8
STATEMENT_J 1 JOURNAL_J 1
STATEMENT_J 5 JOURNAL_J 5
STATEMENT_P 1 STATEMENT_J 1
STATEMENT_P 2 STATEMENT_J 2
STATEMENT_P 3 STATEMENT_J 3
STATEMENT_P 4 STATEMENT_J 4
STATEMENT_P 5 STATEMENT_J 5
STATEMENT_P 6 STATEMENT_J 6
STATEMENT_P 7 STATEMENT_J 7
STATEMENT_P 8 STATEMENT_J 8

Connector Pin Out

5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

JOURNAL_J STATEMENT_J

8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

JOURNAL_P STATEMENT_P

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-42 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

POWERGOOD PATCH HARNESS

(445-0680996)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

PSU_DEPO_P11 3 SHUTDOWN RTN PSU_DEPO_J11 3

PSU_DEPO_P11 6 SHUTDOWN PSU_DEPO_J11 6
PSU_STD_P7 1 POWERGOOD PSU_DEPO_P11 4
PSU_STD_P7 1 POWERGOOD PSU_STD_P7 1
PSU_STD_P7 2 POWERGOOD RTN PSU_DEPO_P11 1
PSU_STD_P7 2 POWERGOOD RTN PSU_STD_P7 2
PSU_STD_P7 4 SHUTDOWN RTN PSU_STD_P7 4
PSU_STD_P7 8 SHUTDOWN PSU_STD_P7 8

F250 SDC HARNESS

(445-0676974)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

MISC IF J5 5 DATA + F250 1 SDC 5
MISC IF J5 6 DATA - F250 1 SDC 6
MISC IF J5 7 RESET + F250 1 SDC 7
MISC IF J5 8 RESET - F250 1 SDC 8
F250 1 SDC 5 DATA + F250 2SDC 5
F250 1 SDC 6 DATA - F250 2SDC 6
F250 1 SDC 7 RESET + F250 2SDC 7
F250 1 SDC 8 RESET - F250 2SDC 8

Connector Pin Out

13 1 13 1 13 1
14 2 14 2 14 2
Misc IF J5 SDC 1 SDC 2

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-43
CABLE INFORMATION

F250 RS232
(445-0676975)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SDC RS232 J4 5 TXD SDC RS232 OUT 2
SDC RS232 J4 7 RXD SDC RS232 OUT 3
SDC RS232 J4 9 RTS SDC RS232 OUT 4
SDC RS232 J4 11 CTS SDC RS232 OUT 5
SDC RS232 J4 13 DSR SDC RS232 OUT 6
SDC RS232 J4 14 RCVRDY SDC RS232 OUT 19
SDC RS232 J4 15 GND SDC RS232 OUT 7
SDC RS232 J4 16 DTR SDC RS232 OUT 20
SDC RS232 J4 21 RESET SDC RS232 OUT 10

Connector Pin Out

29 1
30 2
J4

USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 2M

(009-0019602)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

USB A 1 V BUS (RED) USB B 1

USB A 2 D - (WHITE) USB B 2
USB A 3 D + (GREEN) USB B 3
USB A 4 GND (BLACK USB B 4
USB A SHELL SHIELD USB B SHELL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-44 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 3M

(009-0019621)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

USB A 1 V BUS (RED) USB B 1

USB A 2 D - (WHITE) USB B 2
USB A 3 D + (GREEN) USB B 3
USB A 4 GND (BLACK USB B 4
USB A SHELL SHIELD USB B SHELL

USB TYPE A TO TYPE B 4M

(009-0018826)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

USB A 1 V BUS (RED) USB B 1

USB A 2 D - (WHITE) USB B 2
USB A 3 D + (GREEN) USB B 3
USB A 4 GND (BLACK USB B 4
USB A SHELL SHIELD USB B SHELL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-45
CABLE INFORMATION

PRINTERS

SERIAL RECEIPT PRINTER COMMS

(445-0676741)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SERIAL RECEIPT CORE 2 RXD SERIAL RECEIPT 7

SERIAL RECEIPT CORE 3 TXD SERIAL RECEIPT 5
SERIAL RECEIPT CORE 4 DTR SERIAL RECEIPT 4
SERIAL RECEIPT CORE 5 SIGNAL GND SERIAL RECEIPT 11
SERIAL RECEIPT CORE 6 DSR SERIAL RECEIPT 9
SERIAL RECEIPT CORE 7 RTS SERIAL RECEIPT 8
SERIAL RECEIPT CORE 8 CTS SERIAL RECEIPT 6

Connector Pin Out

13 1
14 2
SERIAL RECEIPT

SERIAL JOURNAL PRINTER COMMS

(445-0676742)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

SERIAL JOURNAL CORE 2 RXD SERIAL JOURNAL 7

SERIAL JOURNAL CORE 3 TXD SERIAL JOURNAL 5
SERIAL JOURNAL CORE 4 DTR SERIAL JOURNAL 4
SERIAL JOURNAL CORE 5 SIGNAL GND SERIAL JOURNAL 11
SERIAL JOURNAL CORE 6 DSR SERIAL JOURNAL 9
SERIAL JOURNAL CORE 7 RTS SERIAL JOURNAL 8
SERIAL JOURNAL CORE 8 CTS SERIAL JOURNAL 6

Connector Pin Out

13 1
14 2
SERIAL JOURNAL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-46 AUGUST 2005
 CABLE INFORMATION

SERIAL P/T PASSBOOK PRINTER COMMS

(445-0676744)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

PT PASSBOOK CORE 1 PT PASSBOOK 1

PT PASSBOOK CORE 2 RXD PT PASSBOOK 2
PT PASSBOOK CORE 3 TXD PT PASSBOOK 3
PT PASSBOOK CORE 4 DTR PT PASSBOOK 6
PT PASSBOOK CORE 5 SIGNAL GND PT PASSBOOK 7
PT PASSBOOK CORE 6 DSR PT PASSBOOK 20
PT PASSBOOK CORE 7 RTS ENB PT PASSBOOK 5
PT PASSBOOK CORE 8 CTS SEL PT PASSBOOK 4

P/T PASSBOOK AC
(445-0676732)

FROM COMPONENT PIN SIGNAL TO COMPONENT PIN

PT PASSBOOK OUT 1 LIVE PT PASSBOOK AC 1

PT PASSBOOK OUT 2 NEUTRAL PT PASSBOOK AC 2
PT PASSBOOK OUT 3 EARTH PT PASSBOOK AC 3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.10-47
CABLE INFORMATION

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.10-48 AUGUST 2005
 DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CONTENTS

Deposit ATM Power Supply Unit

Chapter 26.11

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................ 26.11-1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................. 26.11-2

THEORY OF OPERATION .......................................................... 26.11-2
MOUNTING METHOD ................................................................ 26.11-2
PSU Replacement......................................................................... 26.11-3
INPUT SPECIFICATION .............................................................. 26.11-3
Voltage ......................................................................................... 26.11-4
Input Current ................................................................................ 26.11-4
Inrush Current .............................................................................. 26.11-4
DC OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 26.11-4
DC Output Voltage....................................................................... 26.11-4
Voltage Dropout........................................................................... 26.11-6
Output Isolation............................................................................ 26.11-6
OVERLOAD PROTECTION ........................................................ 26.11-6
RESTART AFTER SHUTDOWN ................................................. 26.11-6
POWER SUPPLY GOOD SIGNAL .............................................. 26.11-6

PSU CONNECTORS........................................................................ 26.11-7

AC CONNECTION........................................................................ 26.11-7
PSU AC Input Connector............................................................. 26.11-7
Input Fuse..................................................................................... 26.11-7
DC OUTPUT CONNECTORS ...................................................... 26.11-8
DC Output Connectors J9 and J10 ............................................... 26.11-8
Auxiliary Connector J11 .............................................................. 26.11-9
Connector J13............................................................................... 26.11-9

STRAPPING ..................................................................................... 26.11-9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.11-i
DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

ADJUSTMENTS...............................................................................26.11-9

TEST TOOLS..................................................................................26.11-10

HISTORY........................................................................................26.11-10
SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY - 600W...............................26.11-10

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.11-ii JANUARY 2005
 DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.11

Deposit ATM Power Supply Unit

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the ac to dc switch mode power supply unit (PSU) that
is an additional power supply for the deposit function of NCR 6674 and 6676
ATMs. The power supply is specified at 600W with static dc load and it has a
single +24 V supply rail with an additional low power auxiliary +5 VSB rail.
Features of the PSU include:
UL and CSA Recognition/Certification
Operation at supply ranges 90 Vac - 136 Vac and 198 Vac - 264 Vac with-
out manual configuration
Power good signal for providing diagnostics
Shutdown control input to switch off all supply rails
Protection circuit to prevent damage to the PSU from overvoltage or short
circuit conditions
Internal cooling fan.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.11-1
DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

THEORY OF OPERATION
The following block diagram illustrates the various functions and connections
within the power supply unit.

J9 and J10
J8
L Fuse
+24V DC Distribution
N Filter AC DC
E
Regulation & Connectors

J11 and J13

Shutdown
PSU Control
Shutdown Monitor Remote LED
& Indicator
Control

+5V Power Good

Auxiliary +5V
AC DC Auxiliary
Regulation

MOUNTING METHOD
The power supply is situated in the ATM within a compartment next to the PC
Core. The deposit PSU is mounted below the standard PSU.
The wall of the compartment alongside the PC Core is formed of two
parts, a fixed rear panel and a removable front panel. A lug at the rear of the
PSU fits into a slot on the fixed panel and a bracket at the front of the PSU
hooks over a threaded stud and is secured by a single nut. The arrangement is
repeated on both sides of the PSU so that it can be suitably attached in front
and rear access ATMs.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.11-2 JANUARY 2005
 DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Deposit PSU

Standard PSU

Fixed Panel

Removable
Panel

PSU Replacement
The removable panel of the PSU compartment permits the removal of the PSU
from the ATM as follows:
1. Remove the PC Core.
2. Unplug the inlet connectors on both PSUs.
3. Remove the securing nuts from both PSUs.
4. Remove the securing nut at the top of the removable panel.
5. Lift the removable panel clear of its locating slot in the top box shelf.
6. Pull the PSUs forward to free them from the slots in the rear panel.
7. Turn the PSUs into the PC Core compartment so that you can see the dc
output connectors at its rear.
8. Unplug the dc output connectors and lift the PSUs out of the ATM.

INPUT SPECIFICATION

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.11-3
DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Voltage
The PSU can operate with a single phase input voltage ranging from 90 V to
264 V rms, 47 to 63 Hz. Voltage range selection is automatic.

Input Current
The maximum input current under normal operating conditions is as follows:

Input Voltage Frequency Range Maximum Input

Range
Range (V rms) (Hz) Current (A)
115 90 - 136 47 - 63 8.8
230 180 - 264 47 - 63 4.4

Inrush Current
The inrush current, measured at full output load (during a cold or warm start
and for a max of one cycle):
40 A peak at 115 Vrms input, measured at TA = 20 deg C
40 A peak at 230 Vrms input, measured at TA = 20 deg C

DC OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS

DC Output Voltage
The following table defines the dc output specification of the PSU:

Performance Requirements DC1 DC2 Units

Nominal Voltage 24 +5 VSB Vdc
Current Static - Maximum 25 1 0.6 Adc
Current Static - Minimum 0.25 0 Adc
Current Dynamic -2 0 Adc
3
Total Voltage Drift
Minimum Voltage 22.8 4.90 Vdc
Maximum Voltage 25.2 5.25 Vdc

Max. Ripple and Noise 4 240 50 mV p-p

Maximum Output Power <-----600 continuous-----> W

NOTE: 1. The current taken from any one pin on the output connectors
should be limited to 7 A max.

NOTE: 2. The 24 V output is capable of delivering 25 A continuously. At

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.11-4 JANUARY 2005
 DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

an ambient temperature of 25oC, the 24 V output current limit is between

28-A and 33 A. The current limit circuits, however, allow the following
dynamic output currents repeated continuously (also shown in the figure
below) without the power supply shutting down or without loss of regula-
tion or power good signal or false tripping of OCP circuit.

Idle static load - 3 A for 5 seconds, followed by:

Start-up dynamic load - 31 A for 750 µ s, 12.5 A for 250 µ s, repeated for
2 seconds, di/dt not to exceed 0.2 A/ µ s, followed by:
Operating dynamic load - 31 A for 1 ms, 17.5 A for 1 ms, repeated for 60
seconds, di/dt not to exceed 0.2 A/ µ s.
31.0A
31
27.5

22.5

20

17.5A
12.5

10
3.0A
750 250
us us
0
Idle Start Up (Max. 2 Sec.) Operation (Max.60 Sec.)
5 Sec 1ms 1ms

NOTE: 3. The total voltage drift consists of the following: line regulation,
load regulation (with all load variations), dynamic load, temperature
warm-up drift, ripple and noise, interaction and manufacturing tolerances.

NOTE: 4. The maximum allowed ripple/noise output of the power supply is

defined in the table above. This is measured over a bandwidth of 0 Hz to
20 MHz at the power supply connector. A 10 µ F tantalum capacitor in
parallel with a 0.1 µ F capacitor ceramic capacitor is placed at the point of
measurement. For measurement purposes a X1 oscilloscope probe must
be tied directly across the pins of the above capacitors. The plastic probe
tip and earth clip must be removed and the tip soldered directly to the +ve
line of the voltage being measured, directly on the pin of the capacitor.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.11-5
DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Three turns of tinned copper wire must be wrapped around the earth band
of the probe, with a leadout brought down adjacent to the probe tip. This
band must be soldered directly on to the -ve terminal of the capacitor.

Voltage Dropout
An input voltage change to 50% of nominal for one half cycle will not cause
the outputs to exceed the specified tolerance limits. Subsequent to any input
under voltage, outage, dip, or interruption, the PSU shall automatically restart
and function normally when the input voltage returns to within its operating
range. No input voltage interruption shall cause the output levels to latch off in
a non-recoverable state requiring manual power cycling.

Output Isolation
The secondary winding and circuit for the 24 V output is independent from
that of the
+5 VSB output.

OVERLOAD PROTECTION
The PSU will shut down to prevent itself from damage in the event of:
Overvoltage:
For the +5 VSB output the voltage limit is 6.8 V
For the +24 V output the voltage limit is 32.0 V
Overcurrent
Short circuit
Overpower
Abnormal temperature rise

NOTE: In each of the above occurrences of shutdown (except overvoltage),

the 5.0 VSB output remains normal.

RESTART AFTER SHUTDOWN

If the PSU is shutdown by its protection circuits because of overcurrent, short
circuit, or overpower, then it will automatically attempt to restart. If the fault
condition continues, the PSU will go into “tick mode” where it will continue
to shutdown and attempt to restart until power is removed or the fault is
removed.
If the protection circuits have shut down the PSU because of overvoltage
or temperature rise then the PSU will latch off until the input voltage is cycled.

POWER SUPPLY GOOD SIGNAL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.11-6 JANUARY 2005
 DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

The PSU Good signal is generated by the power supply to indicate that the dc
outputs are present and to indicate that the line voltage is present and within
its specified range. The signal is TTL compatible; a logic low shows a failure
condition and a logic high shows a normal condition. The output providing
this is the collector of a transistor connected to the +5 VSB output via a
1kilohm resistor. The signal is generated when the power supply has been
switched off for at least one (1) second and is then switched on again without
any failures
When the power supply has been switched off or the mains input has
failed, the power supply good signal must go low a minimum of seven (7) mil-
liseconds before the +24 V dc voltage falls below its normal regulated range.
The seven millisecond delay is measured with the power supply in normal
operation, with maximum load and minimum line voltage. When the PSU
Good signal goes low it must stay low for a minimum of 90 milliseconds.
On power up the PSU Good signal must go high between 200 and 500
milliseconds after the +24 V dc output has reached its normal regulated volt-
age.

PSU CONNECTORS

AC CONNECTION
Connection of the ac supply to the PSU is via the ATM Input Connector, the
Uninterruptible Power Supply, the Line Circuit Breaker, and the ATM Line
Switch.

PSU AC Input Connector

The ac is connected to the PSU at AC Connector J1 which is a standard
chassis mounted IEC 3-way inlet connector. The PSU input circuit
incorporates a fuse and a power line filter.

Input Fuse
The PSU is protected by an internal 10 A slow blow ceramic UL/CSA
approved fuse. This is not a field replaceable item.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.11-7
DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

DC OUTPUT CONNECTORS

J9

1 0
J1 J1

3
J1

DC Output Connectors J9 and J10

Connectors J9 and J10 are 10-way Molex Mini-Fit Jr. series connectors (39-
29-1103) with identical pinout as shown below:

Latch
10 9 8 7 6
24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
RTN RTN
5 4 3 2 1
24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
RTN RTN RTN

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.11-8 JANUARY 2005
 DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

Auxiliary Connector J11

Connector J11 is a 2 x 3-way Molex Mini-Fit Jr. connector with gold flash
terminals (39-28-1063). The connector provides connection for a remote
status LED, shutdown control (PSON), Power Good, and all associated return
circuits:

Latch
6 5 4
PSON LED POWER
GOOD
3 2 1
PSON LED PGOOD
RTN RTN RTN

Connector J13
PSU connector J13 is a 2 x 2-way Molex Mini-Fit Jr. connector (39-28-1043)
carrying the +5 VSB and return.

Latch
4 3
5 VSB 5 VSB
RTN
2 1
5 VSB 5 VSB
RTN

NOTE: All the above pinout diagrams represent looking on the face of the
connector.

STRAPPING
The ATM Cabinet Harness links PSU connector J11 pin 6 (PSON) to
connector J11 pin 3 (PSON RTN). The signal PSON is intended to provide a
remote shutdown capability to the PSU and is a future development. Without
this link the PSU will not start up.

ADJUSTMENTS
The PSU is supplied pre-set. There are no field adjustments.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
JANUARY 2005 26.11-9
DEPOSIT ATM POWER SUPPLY UNIT

TEST TOOLS
None.

HISTORY

SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY - 600W

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
009-0019195

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.11-10 JANUARY 2005
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

CONTENTS

Moving Key Keyboards

Chapter 26.12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................. 26.12-1

KEYBOARD ARRANGEMENT .................................................. 26.12-1
Numeric-Tactile Keyboard........................................................... 26.12-1
EPP Qwerty Keyboard ................................................................. 26.12-2
FDK-Tactile Keyboard................................................................. 26.12-2
CARDHOLDER KEYBOARD...................................................... 26.12-2
FUNCTION DISPLAY KEY KEYBOARD.................................. 26.12-2
KEYBOARD IDENTIFICATION ................................................. 26.12-3
Numeric/Numeric-Tactile Keyboard Identification ..................... 26.12-3
FDK/FDK-Tactile Keyboard Identification ................................. 26.12-3

TEST TOOLS ................................................................................... 26.12-3

STRAPPING ..................................................................................... 26.12-3

ADJUSTMENTS .............................................................................. 26.12-3

TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................... 26.12-3

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 26.12-3

DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................ 26.12-4

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................. 26.12-4
PS/2 QWERTY KEYBOARD ....................................................... 26.12-4
Qwerty Detect Test....................................................................... 26.12-4
Identity Test.................................................................................. 26.12-4
Qwerty Character Detect Test ...................................................... 26.12-4
EPP ENCRYPTOR KEYBOARD ................................................. 26.12-4
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-i
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

Alpha (Numeric) Key Detect Test................................................26.12-4

Communications Echo Test..........................................................26.12-5
Identify Command Test ................................................................26.12-5
SDC Turnaround Test...................................................................26.12-5
PS2 Keyboard Test .......................................................................26.12-5
LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS .............................................................26.12-5
S_DATA .......................................................................................26.12-5
Tallies ...........................................................................................26.12-5

MODULE REPLACEMENT............................................................26.12-6
CARDHOLDER KEYBOARD REPLACEMENT ........................26.12-6
FDK REPLACEMENT...................................................................26.12-9

CONNECTORS/CABLES ..............................................................26.12-15
SDC INTERFACE BOARD .........................................................26.12-15
Heater Connector J2 ...................................................................26.12-15
SDC Connector (J3)....................................................................26.12-15
Combined Power, FDK & FOP Connector (J4) .........................26.12-15
FDK KEYBOARD CONNECTORS............................................26.12-16
EPP QWERTY KEYBOARD CONNECTOR .............................26.12-17
FDK/EPP KEYBOARD HARNESS ............................................26.12-18

HISTORY........................................................................................26.12-19
12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, NON-SR,
WITHOUT PRIVACY .................................................................26.12-19
12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, NON-SR,
WITH PRIVACY..........................................................................26.12-19
12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, WITH SR,
WITHOUT PRIVACY .................................................................26.12-19
12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, WITH SR,
WITH PRIVACY..........................................................................26.12-19

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-ii
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.12

Moving Key Keyboards

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the Moving Key Keyboards installed on the facia of
NCR Personas M Series ATMs.
The moving key keyboards are:
Cardholder keyboard:
Numeric
Alphanumeric
FDK (Function Display Key).
The cardholder and FDK keyboards on the Personas M-Series are termed
tactile (click action).

KEYBOARD ARRANGEMENT
The following illustrations show typical keyboard arrangements.

Numeric-Tactile Keyboard

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-1
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

EPP Qwerty Keyboard

FDK-Tactile Keyboard

CARDHOLDER KEYBOARD
The numeric and alphanumeric cardholder keyboard modules do not contain
any internal replaceable parts. The numeric pin pad and the alphanumeric
assembly of the EPP Qwerty keyboard are replaceable separately.

FUNCTION DISPLAY KEY KEYBOARD

The Function Display Keys (FDK) keyboard is positioned over the front of the
LCD screen. The FDK keyboards are connected through a harness to a
connector on the Encrypting Pin Pad SDC Interface Board.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-2
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

The FDK keyboard does not contain any replaceable parts.

KEYBOARD IDENTIFICATION
The host firmware identifies the numeric and FDK keyboards by their unique
codes. These codes are achieved by linking certain pins of the keyboards
membrane connector.

Numeric/Numeric-Tactile Keyboard Identification

The numeric keyboard identification code is achieved by linking pin 6 and pin
12 of the numeric keyboard membrane connector.

FDK/FDK-Tactile Keyboard Identification

The FDK keyboard identification code is achieved by linking pin 1 and pin 2
of the FDK keyboard membrane connector.

NOTE: Both membrane connectors have pin 1 and pin 2 linked.

TEST TOOLS
None.

STRAPPING
None.

ADJUSTMENTS
Refer to the “FDK Replacement” procedure in this chapter.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the “Diagnostics” section of this chapter.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
None.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-3
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

DIAGNOSTICS

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS
On ATMs running Platform Aptra XFS4 the Device Diagnostic Menu permits
you to select either “PS/2 Qwerty Keyboard” or “EPP Encryptor Keyboard”
leading to the tests described below.

PS/2 QWERTY KEYBOARD

The options offered on the PS/2 QWERTY KEYBOARD diagnostic menu
are:
Qwerty Detect Test
Identity Test
Qwerty Character Detect Test

Qwerty Detect Test

The Qwerty Detect test returns a Hex code when a key is pressed.

Identity Test
The Identity test returns the statement:
“Standard 101/102-Key or Microsoft Natural PS/2 Keyboard”

Qwerty Character Detect Test

The Qwerty Character Detect test returns characters associated with the
character code for the key pressed.

NOTE: Non-character keys, such as shift, left/right arrows, are not

reported.

EPP ENCRYPTOR KEYBOARD

The options offered on the EPP ENCRYPTOR KEYBOARD diagnostic menu
are:
Alpha (Numeric) Key Detect Test
Communications Echo Test
Identify Command Test
SDC Turnaround Test
PS2 Keyboard Test.

Alpha (Numeric) Key Detect Test

The Alpha (Numeric) Key Detect test displays a two digit number
representing the key pressed. The test runs continuously and stops if a key
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-4
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

depression is not detected within seven seconds.

NOTE: This test does not report key presses from the PS/2 keyboard.

Communications Echo Test

The Communications Echo test reports “Operation Successful”.

Identify Command Test

The Identify Command test returns details of the EPP Security Module: Serial
Number, SDC Driver (software level in SDC board), DAPI and ESW version,
Mode (Secure).

SDC Turnaround Test

The SDC Turnaround test carries out a turnaround test between the SDC
service and the module.

PS2 Keyboard Test

The PS2 Keyboard test returns the message “Got Keypress Test Passed”.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the keyboards are:

S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the keyboards are:

S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error)
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault)
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention)

Tallies
None.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-5
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

MODULE REPLACEMENT

CARDHOLDER KEYBOARD REPLACEMENT

To replace the cardholder keyboard, proceed as follows:
1. Open the ATM facia fully.
2. Remove and retain the two nuts securing the keyboard backing plate to
the facia.

NOTE: The nuts are further apart on the 6674 ATM than they are on the
6676 ATM as shown in the illustrations below.

Backing Plate Retaining Nuts (6674)

Backing Plate Retaining Nuts (6676)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-6
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

3. Lower the facia fully so that you can reach the underside of the keyboard
shelf and remove and retain the two Phillips head screws securing the
keyboard surround.

4. Grip the edge of the keyboard surround, slide it towards you out of its
locating keyhole slots, until you can lift it over the keyboard.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-7
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

5. Unplug the cable connectors from the keyboard and lift the keyboard and
backing plate assembly away from the shelf.

6. Remove and retain the two screws securing the keyboard to its backing
plate.
Replacement of the keyboard is the reversal of the above procedure.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-8
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

FDK REPLACEMENT
Replace the FDK assembly as follows:

NOTE: Retain all removed screws and brackets for use with the replace-
ment FDKs.

On front access ATMs with the bottom hinged panel remove the panel as
follows:
1. Open the facia fully and allow the bottom panel to hang.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-9
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

2. Remove the bottom panel as follows:

On the 6674 ATM, remove the two screws 1 and 2 and loosen the two
screws A and B (upper picture).
On the 6676 ATM, remove the four screws, 1, 2, 3, and 4 and loosen
screw A (lower picture).

A
B

A 4
3

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-10
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

3. Lower the facia and lock it in its mid position.

Facia Lock

On the 6672 ATM lift the bottom panel so the heads of the loosened
screws A and B pass out of the keyhole slots, and set the panel aside.
On the 6676 ATM lift the bottom panel so that the head of screw A passes
out of the keyhole slot and set the panel aside.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-11
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

Proceed with removal of the FDK assembly, as follows:

1. Raise the facia fully.

FDK Mounting Plates

FDK Connectors

2. Cut cable ties securing the harnesses to the FDK mounting plates.
3. Unplug the POWER and SIGNAL connectors from the display.
4. Unscrew the nut holding the ground wire to the display and take off the
ground wire.
5. Unplug the left and right FDK connectors.
6. Support the FDK/LCD assembly and remove the four screws securing the
FDK mounting plates to the facia metalwork.
7. Grasp the LCD handle and lift the LCD/FDK assembly from the ATM.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-12
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

With the LCD/FDK assembly on a bench:

1. Unscrew the two thumb wheel screws on the LCD display, tilt the display
upwards at the screw end and slide it out of the locating slots in the FDK
moulding.

2. Remove the screws attaching the FDK mounting plates to the FDK plas-
tic moulding and remove the plates.

NOTE: On ATMs with the 12.1 inch display the mounting plates also
secure a small facia infill strip to the bottom of the FDK moulding. Retain

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-13
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

this strip for use with the replacement FDKs.

Replacement of the FDKs is the reverse of the above procedures with the
following additions:
1. Make good all cable ties.
2. On the 6676 ATM take care that the FDK assembly is attached centrally
in the facia opening and there is not a gap between it and the facia crown.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-14
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

CONNECTORS/CABLES

SDC INTERFACE BOARD

J3

J2

J4

Heater Connector J2
The heater connector (J2) is a two-way connector with the following pinout:

+24V 1 2 GND

SDC Connector (J3)

The SDC connector (J3) is a 10-way connector with the following pinout:

N/C 1 2 N/C
DATA+ 3 4 DATA-
RESET+ 5 6 RESET-
N/C 7 8 N/C
SDC_GND 9 10 N/C

Combined Power, FDK & FOP Connector (J4)

The combined power, FDK & FOP connector (J4) is a 26-way connector with

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-15
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

the following pinout:

+5V 1 2 GND
SCAN_IN0b 3 4 N/C
AUDIT_LEDb 5 6 LEDV
N/C 7 8 N/C
FDK_LEFTb 9 10 FDK_RIGHTb
SCAN_IN0b 11 12 SCAN_FOP_IN1b
SCAN_FOP_IN2b 13 14 N/C
N/C 15 16 N/C
N/C 17 18 N/C
SCAN_OUT0b 19 20 SCAN_OUT1b
SCAN_OUT2b 21 22 SCAN_OUT3b
SCAN_OUT4b 23 24 SCAN_OUT5b
SCAN_OUT6b 25 26 SCAN_OUT7b

FDK KEYBOARD CONNECTORS

The key arrays of the FDK keyboards are brought out on separate eight-way
connectors with the following pinout:

Left FDK Right FDK

N/C 1 N/C
COMM 2 COMM
N/C 3 N/C
TOP 4 TOP
UP_MID 5 UP_MID
LOW_MID 6 LOW_MID
BOTT 7 BOTT
SENSE 8 SENSE

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-16
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

EPP QWERTY KEYBOARD CONNECTOR

The EPP Qwerty keyboard connects to the PC Core via a length of cable
terminated by a PS/2 male pin connector as shown below:.

5 6

3 4

1 2

Pin Signal Direction Description

1 DATA I/O Serial data
2 N/C - No connection
3 GND - Signal ground
4 VCC - +5V power
5 CLOCK I/O Data clock
6 N/C - No connection

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-17
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

FDK/EPP KEYBOARD HARNESS

J4 EPP EPP_B EPP_A

FDK_RIGHT
12 SENSE SENSE

V V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V V V V 14 14 8

V V V V V V
10
21 BOTT BOTT
19 7 7 7
22 LOW_MID LOW_MID
20 13 13 6
23 UP_MID UP_MID
21 6 6 5
24 TOP TOP
22 12 12 4
5 COMM COMM
3 5 5 2
FDK_LEFT
11 SENSE SENSE

V V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V V V V

V V V V V V

V V V V V V
9 11 11 8
SDC Interface Board

25 BOTT BOTT
23 4 4 7
26 LOW_MID LOW_MID
24 10 10 6
27 UP_MID UP_MID
25 3 3 5
28 TOP TOP
26 9 9 4
13 COMM COMM
11 2 2 2

J2

Standard
3 +5V +5V
V V

V V
V V

V V

1
V V

1 1 15

PSU
4 +5V RTN +5V RTN
2 8 8 17
30-Way
26-Way
Connector Connector
J3 EPP_SDC EPP_SDC_B EPP_SDC_A FACIA_J1
5 DATA+
V V V V
V V V V

V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V

V V V V V V V V

3 1 1 1
6 DATA-
4 5 5 5
7 RESET+
5 2 2 3
8 RESET-
6 6 6 6
DATA+
3 3 2
DATA-
7 7 7
RESET+
4 4 4
10-Way
RESET-
Connector 8 8 8
14-Way
Connector
EPP Extension Harness Facia Harness

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-18
 MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

HISTORY

12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, NON-SR, WITHOUT PRIVACY

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
445-0680227

12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, NON-SR, WITH PRIVACY

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
445-0680228

12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, WITH SR, WITHOUT PRIVACY

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
445-0680229

12.1 INCH FDK ASSEMBLY, WITH SR, WITH PRIVACY

Old Part New Part Change Interchange-

Comments
Number Number Number ability
445-0680228

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-19
MOVING KEY KEYBOARDS

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.12-20
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

CONTENTS

Cash Acceptor and Recycler

Chapter 26.13

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................ 26.13-1

DESCRIPTION................................................................................. 26.13-2
MOVEMENT OF NOTES ............................................................. 26.13-2
Note Categorization...................................................................... 26.13-3
Accept (Primary Receipt of Notes) .............................................. 26.13-4
Deposit (Secondary Receipt of Notes) ......................................... 26.13-6
Refund (Cancel Deposit) .............................................................. 26.13-8
Dispense (GBRU Only) ............................................................... 26.13-9
Capture ......................................................................................... 26.13-9
SPECIFICATION......................................................................... 26.13-11
Currency ..................................................................................... 26.13-11
Mechanism ................................................................................. 26.13-11
Power Requirement .................................................................... 26.13-12

SENSORS AND ACTUATORS .................................................... 26.13-12

PRE-ACCEPTOR......................................................................... 26.13-14
SEPARATOR ............................................................................... 26.13-15
ESCROW / RESERVOIR ............................................................ 26.13-16
UPPER TRANSPORT ................................................................. 26.13-18
BV ENTRY TRANSPORT .......................................................... 26.13-19
BILL VALIDATION STRUCTURE ........................................... 26.13-19
LOWER TRANSPORT................................................................ 26.13-20
LOWER BASE............................................................................. 26.13-21
CURRENCY CASSETTE............................................................ 26.13-22
STATUS TEST OUTPUT............................................................ 26.13-23

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT ..................................................... 26.13-24

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-i
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

GBNA/GBRU TO ATM CONNECTORS ...................................26.13-24

Power Input Connector ...............................................................26.13-24
Interlock Switch Connections.....................................................26.13-25
Communication...........................................................................26.13-25
PCB CONNECTORS ...................................................................26.13-26
Power Supply Unit......................................................................26.13-26
Main Upper PCB ........................................................................26.13-28
Separator PCB ............................................................................26.13-29
Lower PCB .................................................................................26.13-30

TEST TOOLS..................................................................................26.13-31

ADJUSTMENTS.............................................................................26.13-31
GBNA/GBRU TO FACIA SHUTTER ALIGNMENT ................26.13-31
LOWER MODULE TO UPPER MODULE ................................26.13-33
PUSH LATCH ..............................................................................26.13-34
INTERLOCK SWITCH................................................................26.13-36
BELT TENSION...........................................................................26.13-38
GEAR TIMING ............................................................................26.13-38

FRU/MODULE REPLACEMENT .................................................26.13-40

FRU LOCATIONS .......................................................................26.13-41
FRUs IN THE UPPER MODULE................................................26.13-43
Bill Validator BV Unit - Removal..............................................26.13-43
Bill Validator BV Unit - Replacement .......................................26.13-46
BV Fan - Removal ......................................................................26.13-46
BV Fan - Replacement................................................................26.13-47
Pre-Acceptor - Removal .............................................................26.13-47
Pre-Acceptor - Replacement .........................................................26.13-50
Escrow and Reservoir - Removal ...............................................26.13-53
Escrow and Reservoir - Replacement.........................................26.13-59
Separator PCB (Mounted on Separator) - Removal ...................26.13-61
Separator PCB - Replacement ....................................................26.13-62
Gas Strut - Removal ......................................................................26.13-62
Gas Strut - Replacement .............................................................26.13-64
Separator - Removal ...................................................................26.13-64
Separator - Replacement.............................................................26.13-66
Removable Reject Bin - Removal ..............................................26.13-67
Main Upper PCB - Removal.......................................................26.13-68
Main Upper PCB - Replacement ................................................26.13-69
Upper Transport - Removal ........................................................26.13-70
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-ii AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Upper Transport - Replacement ................................................. 26.13-73

BV Entry Transport - Removal .................................................. 26.13-75
BV Entry Transport - Replacement............................................ 26.13-77
Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Removal ........... 26.13-77
Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Replacement..... 26.13-79
BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport Main
Timing Belt - Removal............................................................... 26.13-80
BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport Main
Timing Belt - Replacement ........................................................ 26.13-83
LOWER MODULE ...................................................................... 26.13-83
Push Latch - Removal ................................................................ 26.13-83
Push Latch - Replacement.......................................................... 26.13-84
Lower PCB - Removal ............................................................... 26.13-86
Lower PCB - Replacement......................................................... 26.13-88
Lower Transport - Removal ....................................................... 26.13-89
Lower Transport - Replacement................................................. 26.13-92
Currency Cassette (Deposit/GBNA, Recycler/GBRU,
With/Without Keylock).............................................................. 26.13-92
Power Supply - Removal............................................................ 26.13-93
Power Supply - Replacement ..................................................... 26.13-94
Power Supply Fuses .................................................................. 26.13-94
Reed Switches - Removal .......................................................... 26.13-95
Reed Switches - Replacement .................................................... 26.13-96
Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Removal ................. 26.13-96
Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Replacement........... 26.13-97
HARNESSES ............................................................................... 26.13-97
Cassette Connector Harness - Removal ..................................... 26.13-98
Cassette Connector Harness - Replacement............................. 26.13-100
Link Harnesses ......................................................................... 26.13-100
GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Removal........................ 26.13-101
GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Replacement ................. 26.13-106
Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Removal ...................... 26.13-107
Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Replacement................ 26.13-113
Upper Module Link Cable - Removal...................................... 26.13-113
Upper Module Link Cable - Replacement ............................... 26.13-116

TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................ 26.13-116
FRU LOCATIONS..................................................................... 26.13-117
Shutter ..................................................................................... 26.13-119
Pre-acceptor ............................................................................. 26.13-119
Separator .................................................................................. 26.13-120
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-iii
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Separator Transport .................................................................26.13-121

Pre Bill Validator (BV Entry Transport) .................................26.13-121
Bill Validator ...........................................................................26.13-122
Post Bill Validator (BV Exit Transport) ..................................26.13-123
Escrow .....................................................................................26.13-123
Reservoir ..................................................................................26.13-125
Bunch (Top) Transport ............................................................26.13-125
Reject Transport .......................................................................26.13-126
Reject Bin Area and Cassette Transport ..................................26.13-127
Lower Transport ......................................................................26.13-128
Cassettes ..................................................................................26.13-129
Miscellaneous ...........................................................................26.13-130

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS .................................................26.13-130

DISPENSE FUNCTIONALITY.................................................26.13-130
Security .....................................................................................26.13-131
Dispense Authorization ............................................................26.13-131
CLEAR IN ..................................................................................26.13-132
ACCEPT .....................................................................................26.13-132
ENCASH.....................................................................................26.13-132
REFUND.....................................................................................26.13-133
STATUS......................................................................................26.13-133
REPORT DEFINITIONS ...........................................................26.13-133
DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 1 .................................26.13-133
DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 2 .................................26.13-133
SHUTTER TEST ........................................................................26.13-134
SET NOTES................................................................................26.13-134
STACK........................................................................................26.13-134
PRESENT ...................................................................................26.13-134
DISPENSE ..................................................................................26.13-134
TEST CASH UNITS...................................................................26.13-134
TEST GUIDE LIGHT.................................................................26.13-134
DISPENSE RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE ..................................26.13-135
MOTOR TEST............................................................................26.13-135
SAVE STATISTICS ...................................................................26.13-135
SAVE BV INFO .........................................................................26.13-135
M_STATUS AND M_DATA.....................................................26.13-135

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS............................................................26.13-135
S_DATA .....................................................................................26.13-135
TALLIES ....................................................................................26.13-136
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-iv AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................ 26.13-137

GBNA / GBRU........................................................................... 26.13-137
CURRENCY CASSETTE.......................................................... 26.13-137

STRAPPING ................................................................................. 26.13-137

HISTORY ..................................................................................... 26.13-137

MECHANICAL.......................................................................... 26.13-138
Module: Pre-Acceptor (140 mm) R/A ..................................... 26.13-138
Module: Pre-Acceptor (178 mm) F/A ...................................... 26.13-138
Module: Separator .................................................................... 26.13-139
Module: Escrow and Reservoir ................................................ 26.13-139
Module: Upper Transport (Removable Reject Bin) ................. 26.13-139
Module: Upper Transport (Fixed Reject Bin) .......................... 26.13-140
Module: BV Entry Transport ................................................... 26.13-140
Module: BV Entry Transport (FO)........................................... 26.13-140
Module: Lower Transport (GBRU4)........................................ 26.13-140
Module: Lower Transport (GBNA2) ....................................... 26.13-141
Module: Lower Transport (GBNA4) ....................................... 26.13-141
SENSORS................................................................................... 26.13-141
Module: BV Module (Line Magnetic Sensor) ......................... 26.13-141
Module: BV Module (Line Magnetic Sensor plus
Serial Number Option) ............................................................. 26.13-141
ELECTRONIC ........................................................................... 26.13-141
Module: Main Upper PCB ....................................................... 26.13-142
Module: Separator PCB ........................................................... 26.13-142
Module: Lower PCB (GBRU).................................................. 26.13-142
Module: Lower PCB (GBNA) ................................................. 26.13-142
Module: Reed Switch PCB ...................................................... 26.13-142
Module: Power Supply............................................................. 26.13-143
Module: Recycle Motor ........................................................... 26.13-143
Module: Deposit Motor Assembly........................................... 26.13-143
Module: BV Fan....................................................................... 26.13-144
Module: BV Fan, Large ........................................................... 26.13-144
MEDIA CONTAINERS............................................................. 26.13-144
Module: Currency Cassette (Recycle)...................................... 26.13-144
Module: Currency Cassette (Recycle with Keylock) ............... 26.13-144
Module: Currency Cassette (Deposit) ...................................... 26.13-145
Module: Currency Cassette (Deposit with Keylock) ............... 26.13-145
Module: Reject Bin (Removable) ............................................ 26.13-145
Module: Reject Bin (Removable with Keylock)...................... 26.13-145
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-v
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

HARNESSES..............................................................................26.13-145
Module: Cassette Connector Harness.......................................26.13-146
Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper) ...............................................26.13-146
Module: Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper,URCN).....................26.13-146
Module: Cable Assembly (BV Power) .....................................26.13-146
Module: 100 Base-T Cable (BV LAN) ....................................26.13-146
Module: Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper, Power) ................26.13-147
Module: Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper, Signal) ................26.13-147
Module: Cable Assembly (ATM Power)..................................26.13-147
Module: USB Cable Assembly.................................................26.13-148
Module: Cable Assembly (Shutter/MEEI) ...............................26.13-148
TIMING BELTS .........................................................................26.13-148
Module: Carrier Timing Belt ....................................................26.13-148
Module: Main Timing Belt, Upper Transport ..........................26.13-148
CABINET ...................................................................................26.13-148
Module: Upper Base .................................................................26.13-149
Module: Lower Base (GBRU 4 Cassettes)...............................26.13-149
Module: Lower Base (GBNA 2 Cassette) ................................26.13-149
Module: Lower Base (GBNA 4 Cassette) ................................26.13-149
Module: Push Latch..................................................................26.13-149
Module: Gas Strut Assembly....................................................26.13-150

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-vi AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.13

Cash Acceptor and Recycler

INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Global Bunch Recycle Unit (GBRU) and the
Global Bunch Note Acceptor (GBNA) used in NCR M-Series ATMs. Both
devices can transport a bunch of banknotes from the facia entry slot to a
separator and then perform recognition and validation processes on these
notes. Notes not recognized as banknotes may be returned to the entry slot, or
captured, depending upon the mode of operation of the device. Additionally
the GBRU can dispense notes from the currency cassettes to the entry slot.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-1
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

DESCRIPTION
The diagram below names the units in the GBNA/GBRU.
Reject Bin
Pre-Acceptor
Counterfeit
Separator
Reservoir
& Reject
Escrow
Capture
BV

Cassette

4 3 2 1

NOTE: In this description and throughout the chapter the terms “left” and
“right” are regarded as when looking directly on the pre-acceptor of the
GBNA/GBRU. The Pre-acceptor is regarded as the “front”.

MOVEMENT OF NOTES
The movement of notes through the GBRU and GBNA is considered under
the following headings:
Note Categorization
Accept
Deposit
Reject
Dispense (GBRU Only)
Capture
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-2 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Note Categorization
For notes in general circulation four categories of condition have been
defined. The way in which banknotes are handled by the GBNA/GBRU is
controlled by the mode of operation of the device (termed the Categorization
Mode, 0 to 3). The following table briefly describes the action taken by the
device for the four defined categories of notes against the four Categorization
Modes.

<---------------------------------------Note Category------------------------------------
------->

1 - Not 3 - Elements not

recognized as 2 - Elements clearly
banknote identified as authenticated. 4 - Banknotes
because of counterfeit. Suspect fully
wrong image or Image and banknotes. authenticated
format, format Image format as genuine. All
transport error, recognized but and authentication
large dog-eared one or more authentication checks
or missing authentication features (IR, UV, delivered
sections, hand features (IR, UV, magnetism, positive results.
written notes, magnetism, security thread) May be used for
separating security thread) recognized, but recycling.
cards, etc., or missing or out tolerance and/or
wrong currency. of tolerance. quality
deviations. In
most cases
unfit or soiled
Categorizatio banknotes. Not
n Mode to be recycled.
Accept for
Return to Return to Return to
0 - Non-ECB processing. Return
cardholder. cardholder cardholder.
on cancel.
Accept for Accept for
1 - ECB Special Return to Capture. No
processing. No processing. Return
(Germany) cardholder. return.
return on cancel. on cancel.
Return to Accept for
Return to Capture. No
2 - (China) cardholder. Processing. Return
cardholder. return.
on Cancel.
Accept for Accept for
3 - ECB Return to Capture. No
processing. Return processing. Return
Standard cardholder. return.
on cancel. on cancel.
Note: 1. ECB = European Central Bank
Note: 2. ECB6 = Suspected counterfeit note retention (in BNAs). Named after
article 6 European Central Bank Council Regulation 1338/2001.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-3
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Accept (Primary Receipt of Notes)

Reject Reject

ECB6
Suspect
Cassette

On an Accept the GBNA/GBRU transfers a bunch of notes (maximum 25mm

height) from the facia to the Separator via the Pre-acceptor.
The Separator takes notes from the bunch and transfers them to the BV
consecutively, where their characteristics are checked by an optical line sen-
sor, a magnetic sensor, a UV sensor and a thickness sensor. Depending upon
the check results, notes are transferred to the Escrow if genuine, or to a Reser-
voir if rejected. Notes in the Reservoir are bunched up and returned to the
facia slot.
In the ECB6 mode, if a note is identified as counterfeit, it is transferred to
the counterfeit area of the Reject Bin. Depending upon the settings, suspect
notes can be distributed to a Suspect Cassette, Escrow, or a Reservoir.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-4 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

The following table summarizes the flow of notes for an Accept.

Categorization Mode/Destination
Source Category of Notes Non-ECB6 Mode ECB6 Mode
Pre- All Separator Separator
acceptor
Separator Cat. 4 Genuine Escrow Escrow
Damaged Escrow Escrow
Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Germany: Suspect
cassette
China: Reservoir
Standard: Escrow
(by parameter)
Cat. 2 Counterfeit Not applicable Counterfeit area
Cat. 1 Not recognized Reservoir Reservoir
Overflow of Escrow Reservoir Reservoir

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-5
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Deposit (Secondary Receipt of Notes)

ECB 6
Suspect
Cassette

During the Deposit the bunch of notes in Escrow is lifted up and transferred to
the Separator.
The Separator takes each note from the bunch and transfers it to the BV
unit consecutively, where its characteristics are checked by the Optical line
sensor, Magnetic sensor, UV sensor and Thickness sensor. Depending upon
the check results, each note is transferred by denomination to a corresponding
cassette, or to the reject area in Reject Box if damaged. If identified as coun-
terfeit, the note is transferred to the counterfeit area of the Reject Bin.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-6 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

The following table summarizes the flow of notes for a Deposit.

Categorization Mode/Destination
Source Category of Notes Non-ECB6 Mode ECB6 Mode
Escrow All Separator Separator
Separator Cat. 4 Genuine Storage cassettes Storage cassettes
Damaged Reject area Suspect cassette
Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Germany: Suspect
cassette
China: Reject area
Standard: Suspect
cassette
(by parameter)
Cat. 2 Counterfeit Not applicable Counterfeit area
Cat. 1 Not recognized Reject area Reject area
Overflow of Deposit or recy- Configured Cassette Configured Cassette
cle storage cassette or Reject area or Reject area

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-7
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Refund (Cancel Deposit)

During a Refund (cancelled deposit) the bunch of notes in the Escrow is lifted
up and returned to the facia slot via the Pre-acceptor.
The following table summarizes the flow of notes for the Refund.

Category of
Source Destination
Notes
Escrow All Pre-acceptor

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-8 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Dispense (GBRU Only)

ECB6
Suspect
Cassette

The Dispense function is available on the GBRU only.

Notes from a cassette are checked at Bill Validation unit and transferred
to the Escrow.
The following table summarizes the flow of notes for a Dispense.

Categorization Mode/Destination
Source Category of Notes Non-ECB6 Mode ECB6 Mode
Storage Cat. 4 Genuine Escrow Escrow
cassette
Damaged Reject area Reject area
Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Reject area (default0
Escrow or
Suspect cassette
(configurable)
Cat. 2 Counterfeit Not applicable Counterfeit area
Cat. 1 Not recognized Reject area Reject area
Overfeed from storage cas- Reject area Reject area
sette

Capture
On a Capture any notes left behind by a cardholder are taken back to the
Separator, and those left in the Escrow are also taken back to the Separator.
The Separator takes notes from the bunch and transfers them to the BV
consecutively, where their characteristics are checked by the Optical line
sensor, Magnetic sensor, UV sensor and Thickness sensor. All the notes are
transferred to a specified location which may be, the Reject Area, the Capture

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-9
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Area, or Bill Cassettes.

ECB 6
Suspect
Cassette

The following table summarizes the flow of notes for a Capture.

Categorization Mode/Destination
Source Category of Notes Non-ECB6 Mode ECB6 Mode
Pre- Cat. 4 Genuine Reject or Capture Reject or Capture
acceptor / area or optionally to area or optionally to
Damaged
Escrow / configured cassettes configured cassettes
Reservoir Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Reject or Capture
area or optionally to
configured cassettes
Cat. 2 Counterfeit Not applicable Counterfeit area
Cat. 1 Not recognized Captured area Captured area or
or optional retract to optional retract to
reject area reject area.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-10 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

SPECIFICATION

Currency
The GBRU and GBNA can accept banknotes of the following dimensions:
Width = 60mm - 86 mm
Length = 120 mm - 182 mm

Mechanism
Banknotes are handled by the GBRU and GBNA as follows:
Feed method - Placed in a bunch of notes up to 25 mm thick (200 flat
notes)
Feed direction - Long edge of notes presented to inlet
Dispensable notes - Dispensed in a bunch up to 25 mm thick (200 flat
notes)
Feed speed - 7 banknotes per second
Speed of transport:
Main transport - 1200 mm/sec.
Pre-acceptor/bunch - 160 mm/sec.
Top transport/bunch - 140 mm/sec.
Number of cassettes: Configured for 2 or 4 cassettes

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-11
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Capacity of cassettes:
Deposit type cassette - 2300 notes
Recycling type cassette (GBRU) - 2000 notes
Capacity of removable reject bin:
Counterfeit compartment - 10 notes
Capture compartment - 200 notes
Reject compartment - 200 notes
Capacity of fixed reject bin (GBNA):
Counterfeit compartment - 10 notes
Capture compartment - 200 notes
Capacity of escrow - 25 mm bunch (200 flat notes)
Recycling capability (GBRU) - Up to 4 denominations

Power Requirement
The power requirement for the GBNA/GBRU is as follows:
Input voltage = +24 Vdc and +24 Vdc interlocked
Internally generated supplies +12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, and +5 Vdc
Peak current measured at GBNA/GBRU input connector = 30 A

SENSORS AND ACTUATORS

The diagram below shows the positions of sensors and actuators throughout
the GBNA/GBRU. The sections that follow name the sensors and actuators in

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-12 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

each functional unit and briefly describe their functions.

Pre - Acceptor Separator Escrow / Reservoir Upper Transport
Unit Unit Unit Unit

Reject Bin

BV Unit

Lower
Transport
Unit

Currency
Cassette

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-13
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

PRE-ACCEPTOR

POLC
PDSS

PDMG
PTHC
PDPC PRPC

PAMG

PSxS PASS PTCS

PATM
PACM PTPC
PABM

PHMG PBPC

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

PABM X X Stepper Motor Belt drive
PATM X X Stepper Motor Tray drive
PACM X X Stepper Motor Clamp drive
PAMG X X Linear Solenoid Accept Stopper drive
PDMG X X Linear Solenoid Dispense Stopper drive
PHMG X X Linear Solenoid Hook drive
PTHC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Upper Transport home
position
POLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect overload
PDPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray delivery position
PRPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray release hook position
PCEC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect carrier end position
PBPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect belt transfer pulse
PTPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray pulse
PS1S X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Shutter 1
PS2S X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Shutter 2
PS3S X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Shutter 3
PS4S X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Shutter 4
PTCS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Clamp
PASS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Accept-Stopper

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-14 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

PDSS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Dispense-Stopper

SEPARATOR

SRMG
SPUC

SESM
SPBC SFOC SFIC
SEFM
SSUC

SSEC SEPM SSRS

SPPC SSLS
SSLC SFPC SSOS
SPCC
SDOS LSDOS SDIS LSDIS
Back:SCDC
Front:SHDC
SBLC SEDM

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

SEPM X X Stepper Motor Pusher drive
SESM X X Stepper Motor Stage drive
SEFM X X Stepper Motor Pick drive
SEDM X X Stepper Motor Deskew drive
SRMG X X Linear Solenoid Return Roller drive
SPUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher upper position
SSUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Stage upper position
SSLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Stage lower position
SPPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher press position
SPBC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher bridge position
SSEC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Separator empty
SFPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Feed Roller phase
SCDC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the centre of the Deskew
lever
SHDC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the home position of the
Deskew lever
SFOC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the width of note in left
position.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-15
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

SFIC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the width of note in right
position.
SPCC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher pulse check
SBLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect BV Entry Unit lock state
SSLS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Pre-check skew - left
SSRS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Pre-check skew - right
SSOS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Pre-check skew - Outside
SDIS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect Deskew - in position
SDOS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect Deskew - out position

ESCROW / RESERVOIR

EELS ESCM
EERS ECRC
EEUC ECHC
ECPC ECCC ERUC

ERLS
ERRS

ERSM ERRC

EDLS
EDRS
ERLC
EBMG

ETSS EERC
ESPC EESM

ESMG EELC
EECS

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

EESM X X Stepper Motor Escrow Stage drive
ERSM X X Stepper Motor Reservoir Stage drive
ESCM X X Stepper Motor Carrier drive
EBMG X X Rotary Solenoid ESC-B Gate drive
ESMG X X Rotary Solenoid Escrow Stopper drive
ECHC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier home position

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-16 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

ECCC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier clear position
ECPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier push-back position
ERUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reservoir stage upper
position
ERRC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reservoir Stage release
position
ERLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reservoir Stage lower
position
EERC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stage release posi-
tion
EEUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stage upper posi-
tion
EELC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stage lower posi-
tion
ESPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stopper position
ECRC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier Reservoir position
EELS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-L Detect Escrow empty - left
EECS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-L Detect Escrow empty - centre
EERS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-L Detect Escrow empty - right
ETSS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-L Detect the top of stacked notes
ERLS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes that pass in the door-
way of Reservoir area - left
ERRS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes that pass in the door-
way of Reservoir area - right
EDLS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes that pass in the door-
way of Escrow area - left
EDRS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes that pass in the door-
way of Escrow area - right

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-17
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

UPPER TRANSPORT

UULC UEFS
UFFC

UEMG
UERS

UDMG URFC

UECS
UTMM
UCFC

URLC
UGDS
UGLC
UGAS
URHS
UAMG UCMG ULPC

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

UTMM X X DC Brushless Motor Main Transport drive
UAMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-A Gate drive
UCMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-C Gate drive (Reject Bin gate)
UDMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-D Gate drive (Captured area
gate)
UEMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-E Gate drive (Reject area
gate)
UULC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Upper-Lock state
URLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reject-Lock state
UCFC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Capture area full
UFFC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Forgery area full
URFC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reject area full
ULPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Lower Base position state
UGLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Guide Lock state
UGAS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for (UA-UC) Gate
UGDS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for (UD-UE) Gate
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-18 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

URHS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes remaining at rear
hole
UECS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes that pass through the
entrance of the Capture area
UEFS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes that pass through the
entrance of the Forgery area
UERS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes that pass through the
entrance of the Reject area

BV ENTRY TRANSPORT

UFHS

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

UFHS X N/A Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes remaining at front
entry slot

BILL VALIDATION STRUCTURE

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-19
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

The arrangement of sensors in the Bill Validation Unit is as shown below:

Optical Line Sensor Magnetic Sensor Thickness Sensor

Optical Line Sensor UV Sensor

(Optional)

LOWER TRANSPORT

LFHS LRHS
LT3S BLLC

L4MG L3MG L2MG L1MG

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

L(1-4) X (X) Rotary Solenoid Cassette gate drive
MG
BLLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Lower Transport Lock state
LT3S X N/A Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for L3/L4 Gate
LFHS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes remaining at entry
LRHS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes remaining at exit

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-20 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

LOWER BASE

BS4M BF4M BS3M BF3M BS2M BF2M BS1M BF1M

D4C D3C D2C D1C

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

BS X X Stepper Motor Cassette Stage drive
(1-4)M
BF X N/A Stepper Motor Cassette Pick drive
(1-4)M
D(1-4) X X Custom Magnetic Detect Cassette denominations (4
(0-4)C Switch bit)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-21
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

CURRENCY CASSETTE

CL[1-4]S CP[1-4]C CD[1-4]C

CR[1-4]S
CE[1-4]C
CS[1-4]C
C[1-4]MG
CV[1-4]C
CT[1-4]S

CO[1-4]C

CF[1-4]C

Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

C(1-4)MG X X Linear Solenoid Cassette Feed Roller Lock drive
CF(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Cassette full
CE(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Cassette empty
CP(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Stage press position
CS(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Feed Roller status
CV(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Vaned Wheel phase
CD(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Stage decompress posi-
tion
CO(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Feed Roller Lock state
CL(1-4)S X X Infrared Sensor/LED-S Detect notes that pass through
doorway - left
CR(1-4)S X X Infrared Sensor/LED-S Detect notes that pass through
doorway - right
CT(1-4)S X X Infrared Sensor/LED-L Detect the top of stacked notes

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-22 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

STATUS TEST OUTPUT

The following table describes the data returned from the STATUS test. It
comprises 64 bytes of data which reflect the state of the sensors in the device -
one bit for each sensor. Use this data with the previous illustrations.

Bit
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 PCEC PBPC PRPC PTPC PDPC POLC PTHC
2 PHPC ERLC ERRC ERUC ECPC ECCC ECHC
3 PLPC ETLC ESPC EERC EELC EEUC
4 PDAC SSEC SSLC SSUC SPBC SPPC SPUC
5 SBLC SHDC SCDC SFPC SPCC SFOC SFIC
6 UGLC ULPC URFC UFFC UCFC URLC UULC
7 ETRS PDSS PASS PTCS PS4S PS3S PS2S PS1S
8 ETLS EECS EERS EELS
9
10 FLD FLT LOCK ST SW2 SW1
11 SHOC SHCC ILOF BLLC
12
13 C1SET D13C D12C D11C D10C
14 C2SET D23C D22C D21C D20C
15 C3SET D33C D32C D31C D30C
16 C4SET D43C D42C D41C D40C
17 CE1C C1NR CT1S NE1C NF1C CF1C
18 CV1C CC1C CO1C CD1C CS1C CP1C
19 CE2C C2NR CT2S NE2C NF2C CF2C
20 CV2C CC2C CO2C CD2C CS2C CP2C
21 CE3C C3NR CT3S NE3C NF3C CF3C
22 CV3C CC3C CO3C CD3C CS3C CP3C
23 CE4C C4NR CT4S NE4C NF4C CF4C
24 CV4C CC4C CO4C CD4C CS4C CP4C
25 UERS UEFS UECS UFHS URHS UGDS UGAS
26 SDOS SDIS SSOS SSLS SSRS
27 EDRS EDLS ERRS ERLS
28
29 LFHS LT3S
30 CR4S CL4S CR3S CL3S CR2S CL2S CR1S CL1S
31-56 BLANK
57 FL5VES4 FL5VSE4 FL5VRV FL5VES2 FL5VUB FL5VSE2 FL5VPA
58 FL24VRV FL24VES FL24VUB FL24VSE
59 FL5VCS4 FL5VCS3 FL5VCS2 FL5VCS1 FL5VRV FL5VEX FL5VSH FL5VLT
60 FL5VCS5 FL24VSH FL24VEX FL24VCS FL24VLT FL24VLB2 FL24LB1
61-64 BLANK

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-23
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT

GBNA/GBRU TO ATM CONNECTORS

Electrical connection between the GBNA/GBRU and the ATM consists of:
24 V dc supply lines from the ATM to the GBNA/GBRU
MEEI control lines from the GBNA/GBRU to the ATM
Facia shutter power and control lines from the GBNA/GBRU to the ATM
USB communications signals between GBNA/GBRU and the ATM PC
Core.
The dc, MEEI, and shutter lines are terminated in plugs that connect into
Molex Mini-fit Jnr receptacles at the end of the cradle channel. The USB
cable is routed past these receptacles, led up the side wall of the safe, and
plugged into a socket on the 7-port USB hub.

Power Input Connector

The power input connector is a 16-way Minifit Jr. dual row receptacle with the
following pinout:

N/C 1 9 N/C
N/C 2 10 N/C
+24 V_RTN 3 11 +24 V
+24 V_RTN 4 12 +24 V
+24 V_RTN 5 13 +24 V
+24 V_RTN 6 14 +24 V
N/C 7 15 +24 V
N/C 8 16 N/C

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-24 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Interlock Switch Connections

Connection between the Power Input Connector and the PWR Connector on
the GBNA/GBRU Power Supply Unit is via an interlock switch wired as
shown in the following diagram.
PWR
PWR

V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
1
+24 V I/L
V V V V V V V V V V

1 2
+24 V I/L +24 V RTN
2 3
+24 V RTN
3 4
Power Supply Unit

4 +24 V RTN
5
+24 V RTN
5 6
+24 V I/L
6 7
+24 V I/L
7 8
8 9
9 10
10 11
+24 V
12
+24 V
13
+24 V
V V V

NO1 14
+24 V
NC1 15
Interlock Switch

COM1 16
V V V

NO2
NC2
COM2

Communication
The GBNA/GBRU communicates with the host ATM via a USB connection
between the module control board and the ATM PC Core.
Interface type - USB1.1
Speed - 12 Mbit/sec.
Connector - USB Type A (plug)

Shutter / MEEI Control - The GBNA/GBRU controls the ATM’s facia

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-25
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

shutter and MEEIs as follows:

Shutter - The shutter is connected to an 8-way Minifit Jr. dual row receptacle
with the following pinout:

+5 V RTN 1 5 +5 V
+24 V RTN 2 6 +24 V
+24 V RTN 3 7 SOL
LOCK 4 8 OPEN

Where,
The dc voltages are output power line voltages and returns.
SOL is a TTL output signal, HI = Close, LO = Open
LOCK (Shutter Closed) is a TTL input signal, High active.
OPEN (Shutter Open) is a TTL input signal, High active.

MEEI - The MEEIs are connected to a 4-way Minifit Jr. dual row receptacle
with the following pinout:

MEI_A 1 3 +12 V
MEI_B 2 4 N/C

Where,
The +12 V is an output power line voltage.
MEI_A is a TTL, open collector output signal, Low active
MEI_B is a TTL, open collector output signal, Low active

PCB CONNECTORS
This section identifies the board connectors on GBNA/GBRU pcbs.

Power Supply Unit

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-26 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

The connections on the PSU are as follows:

BPWR
UPWR
PWR

LPWR

PWR - +24 V dc supply from ATM via interlock switch.

BPWR - +12 V, -12 V, and +5 V output to BV Unit.
UPWR - +24 V and +5 V output to Main Upper PCB.
LPWR - +5 V and +24 V output to Lower PCB.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-27
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Main Upper PCB

UB2 RV2S UB3

SE1 RVS2PH
UB1
RV2MG

JTAG
SE2

SE4

URCN

UPCN
UPWR

SPWR

Connectors on the Main Upper PCB are as follows:

UB2 - Upper transport photo-interrupters, and IR sensors.
RV2S - Escrow IR sensors.
UB3 - Upper transport solenoids.
RV2PH - Pre-acceptor photo interrupters.
UB1 - Upper transport photo- interrupters, and IR sensors.
RV2MG - Not used
JTAG - Not used
UPWR - +24 V and +5 V from PSU.
DCMP/DCMS - Upper transport dc motor.
SPWR - +24 V and +5 V to Separator PCB

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-28 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

UPCN - Logic lines to Lower PCB.

URCN - Logic lines to Separator PCB
SE4 - Separator and Escrow pulse motors.
SE2 - Escrow IR sensors,
SE1 - Separator IR sensors, Pre-acceptor T-sensors and IR sensors.

Separator PCB
SE6 SE5 JTAG SE7 PA1

ES3

ES1
SPWR

ES2

URCN

Connectors on the Separator PCB are as follows:

SE6 - Separator pulse motors and solenoid.
SE5 - Separator photo-interrupters.
JTAG - Not used
SE7 - Separator and Pre-acceptor photo-interrupters.
PA1 - Pre-acceptor solenoids and pulse motors.
SPWR - +24 V and +5 V in from Main Upper PCB.
URCN - Logic lines from Main Upper PCB.
ES2 - Escrow pulse motors and solenoids.
ES1 - Escrow photo-interrupters.
ES3 - Escrow photo-interrupters.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-29
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Lower PCB
RSVS RV1PH LB1 LB2 LB3 LB5 EXT LB4 TERM

LT1
LPWR

LT2
UPCN
SHT
BV

ICS USB

CS1 CS2 CS5 CS3 CS4

Connectors on the Lower PCB are as follows:

RSVS - Not used.
RV1PH - Not used.
LB1 - Lower base pulse motors 1 and 2.
LB2 - Lower base lead switches 1 and 2.
LB3 - Lower base pulse motors 3 and reed switch 3.
LB5 - Not used.
EXT - Not used.
LB4 - Lower base pulse motors 4 and reed switch 4.
TERM - Factory debug facility.
LT1 - IR sensors, solenoids, and photo-interrupter.
LT2 - IR sensor, solenoids, and photo-interrupter.
SHT - Shutter and MEEI lines to ATM.
USB - USB connection from ATM.
CS4 - Recycle cassette position 4.
CS3 - Recycle cassette position 3.
CS5 - Not used.
CS2 - Recycle cassette position 2.
CS1 - Recycle cassette position 1.
ICS - Future development.
BV - LAN connection to BVU.
UPCN - Logic connection to Main Upper PCB.
LPWR - +24 V and +5 V power from PSU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-30 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

TEST TOOLS
The Separator Belt Adjustment Tool is supplied with the GBNA/GBRU and is
attached to the rear right side of the Escrow. (refer to the section, “Gear
Timing”).

ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE: In the following adjustments the terms “left” and “right” are
regarded as when looking directly on the pre-acceptor of the GBNA/
GBRU. The Pre-acceptor is regarded as the “front”.

GBNA/GBRU TO FACIA SHUTTER ALIGNMENT

It may be necessary to adjust the GBNA/GBRU module position with respect
to the facia shutter if, after replacement of the module, one of the following
conditions exists:
With the facia locked, the gap between the shutter and the front edge of
the pre-acceptor is not even across the width of the shutter
The gap between the shutter and pre-acceptor is excessive or the shutter is
fouled by the pre-acceptor
The GBNA/GBRU does not latch.
Make the adjustment as follows:
1. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU.
2. Remove the interlock switch cover (two screws).

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-31
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. Slacken the two screws that secure the interlock switch. Move the switch
fully back on its screws (towards the rear of the safe).

4. Slacken the six screws (three per slide) that secure the upper module to
the slides and move the module in the elongated holes in the rails, either
forward towards the facia, or back, into the safe, to achieve the necessary
adjustment.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-32 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

5. Check that the upper module is resting on the top surface of each of the
mushroom studs in the slides (two per slide).

6. Check that the upper module is parallel with the slides.

7. Tighten the six screws in the rails, rack in the GBNA/GBRU so that it
latches, and check the alignment of the pre-acceptor to facia.

Check for even gap between shutter and pre-acceptor

8. Proceed to adjust the lower module to the upper module.

LOWER MODULE TO UPPER MODULE

The lower module is attached to its slides by mushroom studs and screws in
the same way as the upper module. The lower module should be adjusted with
respect to the upper module to make sure that the upper and lower transports
are properly aligned.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-33
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Proceed as follows:
1. Rack out the lower module.
2. Slacken the screws securing the lower module to its slides (three per
slide) and move the module in the elongated holes in the rails, either for-
ward or back, so that the screws are in the same relative position as the
screws in the upper module rails.
3. Check that the lower module is resting on the top surface of each of the
mushroom studs in the slides (two per slide).
4. Check that the lower module is parallel with the slides.
5. Tighten the six screws in the rails.
6. Proceed to adjust the Push Latch.

PUSH LATCH
The push latch latches the lower module to the upper. It is located on the lower
module at the left-hand side in front access ATMs and at the right-hand side in
rear access ATMs.
Adjust the lower module latch as follows:
1. Rack out the lower module
2. Loosen the two screws attaching the latch bracket and move the bracket
forward on the screws. Screw in the two screws but do not fully tighten.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-34 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. Rack in the lower module and push it in firmly against the rubber stop-
pers at the rear.

4. Maintain the pressure against the stoppers and check that the distance
from the end of the lower unit rail inward to the face of the lower unit is
5mm - 5.5mm.

5. Maintain the pressure against the stoppers and, with a flat blade screw-
driver, push the latch bracket inwards until the tongue of the latch springs
into the square hole in the upper module.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-35
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

6. Tighten the two screws securing the latch bracket.

7. Check that the measurement obtained in step 4 is maintained when the

lower module is held by the latch alone.
8. Rack the lower module out and in several times to check the action of the
latch.
9. Proceed to adjust the interlock switch.

INTERLOCK SWITCH
Adjust the interlock switch as follows:
1. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU.
2. Remove the interlock switch cover and and slacken the two screws that
secure the interlock switch. Move the switch fully back on its screws
(towards the rear of the safe).
3. Screw in the two screws but do not fully tighten.
4. Check that the interlock switch actuator will strike the centre of the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-36 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

switch plunger and adjust the actuator if necessary.

5. Push in and latch the GBNA/GBRU module.

6. Move the interlock switch forward until is actuated (middle of plunger
movement).
7. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU module and tighten the two screws that
secure the interlock switch.
8. Rack in the GBNA/GBRU module and check the actuation of the switch.
9. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU module and replace the interlock switch
cover.
10. Rack in the GBNA/GBRU module and check that the actuator enters the
interlock switch cover.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-37
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

BELT TENSION

Screw Tension Bracket Assembly

L1 (=147)
L2 (=75)
P D

P = 500 +_ 50g D = 3mm

(5.1 +_ 0.5N)

Adjust the main drive belt tension as follows:

1. Check for a deflection of 3 mm when load P is applied at position L2.
2. Slacken the Tension Bracket securing screw and move the bracket to
achieve the deflection.
3. Tighten the bracket securing screw.

GEAR TIMING
Transport gears are linked by the separator drive belts. A separator belt
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-38 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

adjustment tool is provided to ensure that both parts of the transport are
correctly in phase after the belts have been removed and replaced during a
service call. The adjustment is required on both sides of the Separator.
Proceed as follows:
1. Take off the separator belt adjustment tool from the rear right side of the
escrow.

Separator Belt
Adjustment Tool

2. Remove the right-hand side separator belt cover.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-39
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. Fit the separator belt adjustment tools into the slots in both gears.

4. Put the belt on to the gears.

5. Repeat the adjustment on the left-hand side of the separator.
6. Remove the tool from the gears and return it to its mounting on the
escrow.
7. Replace the gear covers.

FRU/MODULE REPLACEMENT

NOTE: 1. The illustrations in this section are from a mix of front and rear
access ATMs and may not look identical to the GBNA/GBRU you are
repairing. They should, however, enable you to identify the components
referred to.

NOTE: 2. Throughout these FRU replacement procedures make sure that

all connectors are replaced securely and harnesses are routed correctly
and neatly. Replace and make good all cable ties, check for fouling condi-
tions and replace all cable identification labels damaged or lost during
servicing.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-40 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

NOTE: 3. Throughout these procedures each of the references to right-hand

side, left-hand side, front and rear is based on the following illustration.

Front

Top

Right Side
Rear

FRU LOCATIONS
The FRUs referenced in this section are identified in the following two
illustrations.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-41
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Separator Separator to Escrow/Reservoir

Pre-acceptor Escrow/Reservoir
Timing Belts
Upper Transport

Removable
Reject Bin

BV Entry
Transport

Bill Validator
Gas Strut
(BV) and Fan

Lower Transport
4 3 2 1

Currency
Cassettes

The illustration above shows the GBRU viewed from the right-hand side.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-42 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Separator to
Escrow/Reservoir
Main Upper Upper Transport Timing Belt Pre-acceptor
PCB

Separator PCB
Main Timing Upper Module
Belt Link Cable
BV Entry
Transport
Push Latch
(Rear Access)
Lower
Transport

Deposit Motor

Recycler Motor
Lower PCB
Power Supply (Reed Switches
PCB behind)

The illustration above shows the GBRU viewed from the left-hand side.

FRUS IN THE UPPER MODULE

Bill Validator BV Unit - Removal

1. Pull up the top module until the gas strut is fully extended.
2. On the left-hand side:
Disconnect the connector labelled BPWR and the blue LAN cable from

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-43
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

the BV unit.

Connectors

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-44 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. On the right-hand side:

Remove the screw from the base of the gas strut. Hold up the top module
slightly while moving the bottom of the strut backwards to change the
pivot position.

4. On the right side of the BV entry transport, loosen one screw and push up
the gear bracket to disengage. Tighten the screw again to hold the gear in
place.

Gear Securing Screw

5. Remove one screw securing the BV unit to the upper module base.
6. Pull out the BV unit to the right to remove (including the covers on the
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-45
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

side).

Bill Validator BV Unit - Replacement

To replace the BV unit, reverse the above procedure.

BV Fan - Removal
1. Remove the BV unit as described in above procedure.
2. Remove one screw from the front edge of the BV unit cover and remove
the top cover.

Screw

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-46 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. Disconnect the connector from the board and pull up the fan to remove.
Fan Connector

BV Fan - Replacement
To replace the BV fan, reverse the above procedure.

Pre-Acceptor - Removal

All lengths of pre-acceptor are removed and attached by using the following
procedure:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-47
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

1. On the left-hand side of the upper module remove the separator PCB cov-
ers.
Early units have two side covers. Remove four screws from the upper
cover first and then four screws from the lower cover.
Screw (4 Places)

Screws
On later units remove the timing belt cover and then the one piece side
cover. Loosen the screws “L” and remove screws “R” shown in the fol-
lowing photographs.
R

L L

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-48 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

L L

R R R
2. Make a note of the cable routing before disconnecting connectors.
3. Cut the cable tie and disconnect the connectors labelled as follows:
Separator PCB: PA1, SE7
In-line: PA3, SE7 and RV2PH.

On Board Connectors Cable Tie In - Line Connectors

4. Pull up the front of the pre-acceptor unit using the green handle on the
right-hand side until the stay bar locks the unit in a raised position.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-49
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

5. On the right-hand side:

Loosen one screw on the pre-acceptor securing bracket (located above the
stay bar), and push down to disengage the bracket.

Screw

6. Pull up the pre-acceptor unit until it is fully vertical and lift off to remove.

PRE-ACCEPTOR - REPLACEMENT
To replace the pre-acceptor, reverse the above procedure paying special
attention to the following:
Lower the pre-acceptor onto the mounting studs before attaching the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-50 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

securing bracket and tightening the screw.

Securing Bracket Mounting Stud

Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.
When a pre-acceptor is being fitted to a GBRU with separator assembly
009-0019425 or 009-0020242 the following rework is necessary to the separa-
tor pusher while the pre-acceptor is removed:
1. Move the pusher to the top of its travel and identify the tabs on the pusher.

2. Use an engineer’s rule and scribe to mark a line across both tabs in line

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-51
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

with the edge of the pusher.

3. Cut off the tabs using a small hacksaw or side cutters while holding the
pusher firmly to prevent displacement of timing belts. Place a piece of
paper to catch debris.

4. Use a file to smooth the cut sections and check that no part projects
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-52 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

beyond 0.5 mm out from the edges of the pusher.

5. Wind the pusher to the bottom of its travel.
6. Put the new pre-acceptor on its mounting but do not connect the cables.
7. Manually wind the pusher up and down and check that it does not contact
the pre-acceptor guides at either side.
8. If you are satisfied that the pusher is not obstructed, complete the replace-
ment of the pre-acceptor.
9. Return the pusher to its top position.

Escrow and Reservoir - Removal

Before the escrow and reservoir can be removed, the pre-acceptor must be
removed.
1. Pull up the top module until the gas strut is fully extended.
2. On the right-hand side:
Remove the two escrow belt covers (one screw and three screws).

3. Remove one screw and washer (above the locating stud) securing the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-53
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

escrow to the separator.

4. Remove the forward belt between the escrow and the separator.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-54 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

5. On the left-hand side:

Loosen two screws from the escrow belt cover (old type) and pull the
cover up to remove.

or,
On the new type belt cover loosen two screws (L) and remove the top

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-55
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

screw (R) and pull the cover up to remove.

R

L L

6. Remove one screw and washer (above the locating stud) securing the
escrow to the separator

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-56 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

7. Remove the forward belt between the escrow and the separator.

8. Disconnect the connectors joined to the escrow, labelled as follows:

From separator PCB: ES1, ES2, ES3
In line: ES4, ES5 and ESCM.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-57
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

9. Lift up the lower part of the escrow and the reservoir to detach it from the
separator lower locating studs and then slowly lift up the entire FRU to
detach it from the mounting studs. Make sure all the cables are discon-
nected when removing the FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-58 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Escrow and Reservoir - Replacement

To replace the escrow and reservoir, reverse the above procedure paying
special attention to the following:
1. Hold the escrow/reservoir at an angle of approximately 45o and lower it
onto the mounting studs on each side of the separator.

Mounting Stud

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-59
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

2. Lower the escrow onto the locating stud on each side of the separator.
Make sure there is no gap at the joints on each side before replacing the
securing screws.

3. When replacing the belts on the escrow/reservoir, set the belt timing (on
each side) by using the tool attached to the escrow. Refer to ‘Adjust-
ments’ for more details.
4. Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-60 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Separator PCB (Mounted on Separator) - Removal

1. On the left-hand side of the upper module remove the separator pcb cov-
ers as described in “Pre-Acceptor - Removal” in this chapter.
2. Make a note of cable routing in the area of the separator pcb before dis-
connecting the connectors and removing the pcb.
3. Cut the cable tie and disconnect three connectors labelled PA1/2/3.

On Board Connectors Cable Tie Routing Bracket In - Line Connectors

4. Carefully cut the cable ties from the front of the cable routing bracket.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-61
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

5. Disconnect all connecters from the separator pcb. Make a note of all con-
nectors removed.

6. Remove four screws securing the pcb to the mounting bracket.

7. Remove the Separator PCB from the bracket.

Separator PCB - Replacement

To replace the separator pcb, reverse the above procedure.
Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.

GAS STRUT - REMOVAL

1. On the right-hand side:
Remove the screw at the top of the gas strut.

WARNING

Support the separator unit while detaching the gas strut.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-62 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

2. Remove the bush and detach the gas strut from the separator.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-63
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. Remove one screw from the base of the gas strut and detach the strut.

Screw

Gas Strut - Replacement

To replace the gas strut, reverse the above procedure paying special attention
to the following:
Observe the disposal instructions labelled on the gas strut.

Separator - Removal

Before the separator can be removed, the pre-acceptor, escrow and reservoir,
and the separator pcb must be removed.
1. On the right-hand side:
Remove the screw at the top of the gas strut.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-64 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

WARNING

Support the separator unit while detaching the gas strut.

2. Remove the bush and detach the gas strut from the separator.

3. From the right-hand side:

Unhook the harness from behind the separator pcb.

Harness Clamp

4. Loosen the screw on the cam lever mounted on each side of the BV
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-65
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

entry transport, and release each cam lever by pushing down.

5. Carefully remove the separator by lifting slightly forwards, observing the

notch direction on the cam levers.

Separator - Replacement

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-66 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

To replace the separator, reverse the above procedure paying special attention
to the following:
Present the separator at an angle of 45o observing the notch direction on
the cam levers.
Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.

Removable Reject Bin - Removal

1. Push the button at rear left-hand side to eject the reject bin.
2. Using the green handle, pull the bin up (front access ATMs) or backwards
(rear access ATMs) remove the bin.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-67
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Main Upper PCB - Removal

The main upper pcb is mounted on the upper transport and is removed as
follows:
1. On the left-hand side:
Remove three screws and loosen one screw from the main upper pcb
cover. Pull up the cover to remove.

Loosen

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-68 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

2. Carefully cut any restraining cable ties and disconnect all connectors
from the main upper pcb. Make a note of all connectors removed.

3. Remove four screws from the main upper pcb. Detach the pcb from the
mounting bracket.

Main Upper PCB - Replacement

To replace the main upper pcb, reverse the above procedure paying special
attention to the following:
Before securing the board, observe the correct cable routing at the lower
left corner of the pcb.
Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-69
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Upper Transport - Removal

The removable reject bin and main upper pcb must be removed before the
upper transport can be removed.
1. On the left-hand side of the module, at the rear:
Loosen one screw from the rear end of the link cable cover. Slide the
cover backwards to detach it from the tang at the front. Remove the cover.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-70 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

2. Remove the two screws from the upper transport base; one at each side of
the transport (viewed from above).

3. Remove the two screws from the rear transport base at the rear end
beneath the reject bin area:
Fixed type reject bin:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-71
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Removable type reject bin:

4. On the left-hand side:

Detach the belt from under the tension roller.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-72 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

5. At the rear end of the main tension belt:

Remove the remaining screw from the belt cover near the base of the
upper transport. Remove the cover and detach the belt from the gear.

Gear Belt Cover Screw Belt

6. Carefully lift up and detach the upper transport from the upper module
base.

Upper Transport - Replacement

To replace the upper transport, reverse the above procedure paying special
attention to the following:
1. Replace and secure the upper transport first. Make sure the reference
holes on the transport are placed exactly on the reference bosses on the
upper base before securing with the screws removed in steps 2 and 3.
2. Attach the main belt to the upper transport gear and replace the belt cover,
as removed in step 5.
3. Replace the middle part of the main belt under the tension roller, as
removed in step 4.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-73
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

4. Refer to the Adjustments section to check the main belt tension. Check
the belt does not foul other cables and connectors in the area before
replacing the link cable cover.
5. Present the link cable cover slightly to the rear of the cable bracket. Slide
the cover towards the front to engage the remaining screws at the rear end
and the tang at the front. Make sure all cables are securely and neatly con-
tained before replacing the cover screws.

Tang

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-74 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

BV Entry Transport - Removal

The pre-acceptor, escrow, reservoir and link cable bracket must be removed,
and the tension roller belt detached, before removing the BV entry transport.

1. On the right-hand side:

Remove one screw from the gear bracket on the side of the BV entry
transport and move the bracket fully up, to access more screws under the
bracket.

Screw (4 Places) Gear Bracket

2. On each side:
Remove two screws securing the BV entry transport to the upper module
base.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-75
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. On the left-hand side:

At the front of the link cable assembly, disconnect the connector (UFHS)
attached to the BV entry transport.

4. Pull up the BV entry transport to remove, making sure the main tension
belt is fully detached.

Reference Hole

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-76 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

BV Entry Transport - Replacement

Replacement of the BV entry transport is the reverse of the above procedure
paying special attention to the following:
1. When replacing the BV entry transport, make sure the reference holes of
the transport are placed exactly on the reference bosses of the upper base.
2. Refer to the “Adjustments” section to check the main belt tension. Check
that the belt does not foul other cables and connectors in the area before
replacing the link cable cover.

Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Removal

1. On the right-hand side:

Remove one screw from the small belt cover and remove the cover.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-77
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

2. Remove the forward belt between the escrow and the separator.

3. On the left-hand side:

Loosen two screws from the escrow belt cover (old type) and pull the
cover up to remove.

or,
On the new type belt cover loosen two screws (L) and remove the top
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-78 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

screw (R) and pull the cover up to remove.

R

L L
4. Remove the forward belt between the escrow and the separator.

Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Replacement

When replacing the belts on the escrow/reservoir, set the belt timing (on each
side) by using the tool attached to the escrow. Refer to the “Adjustments”
section for more details.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-79
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport Main

Timing Belt - Removal

1. Open up the top module using the green handle until the gas strut is fully
extended.
2. On the left-hand side of the main upper transport:
Remove three screws and loosen one screw from the main upper pcb
cover. Pull up the cover to remove.

Loosen

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-80 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. Loosen one screw from the rear end of the link cable cover. Slide the
cover backwards to detach it from the tang at the front. Remove the cover.

4. Pull out the main timing belt from under the tension roller.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-81
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

5. At the rear end of the main tension belt:

Remove the remaining screw from the belt cover near the base of the
upper transport. Remove the cover and detach the belt from the gear.

Gear Belt Cover Screw Belt

6. Feed the belt through towards the front of the module, past the tension
roller bracket and then detach the belt from the BV entry transport at the
front of the module.

Belt

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-82 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport Main

Timing Belt - Replacement
To replace the main tension belt, reverse the above procedure paying special
attention to the following:
1. Attach the belt to the BV entry transport first.
2. Feed the belt through the tension roller bracket but leave loose.
3. Attach the main belt to the upper transport gear and replace the belt cover,
as removed in step 5.
4. Replace the belt under the tension roller, as removed in step 4. Refer to
‘Adjustments’ to check the main belt tension. Check the belt does not foul
other cables and connectors in the area before replacing the link cable
cover.
5. Present the link cable cover slightly to the rear of the cable bracket. Slide
the cover towards the front to engage the remaining screws at the rear end
and the tang at the front. Make sure all cables are securely and neatly con-
tained before replacing the cover screws.

LOWER MODULE

Push Latch - Removal

1. Rack out the lower module.
2. On the left-hand side (front or rear depending on variant):
Remove two screws securing the push latch to the left-hand side of the
lower module (rear access illustration shown). Remove the latch assem-

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-83
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

bly.

Push Latch - Replacement

To assemble the replacement push latch, proceed as follows:
1. Attach the latch and spacer to the bracket using four screws provided.
2. Rear access units: secure the latch to left bracket holes, and the spacer to
right bracket holes (as illustrated below).
3. Front access units: secure the latch to right bracket holes, and the spacer

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-84 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

to left bracket holes (opposite of illustration below).

Spacer

Bracket

Latch

4. Secure the push latch assembly to the lower module using two screws
provided. Attach screws in diagonally opposite holes.
5. After replacing the push latch, refer to ‘Adjustments’ for more details of
how to check the facia, upper module and lower module alignment.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-85
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Lower PCB - Removal

There are two variants of the lower pcb; GBRU4/GBNA4, and GBNA2.
Remove the lower pcb as follows:
1. On the left-hand side:
Remove one screw and the cable retaining clip from the cable entry hole.
Disconnect the USB and SHT/MEI connectors at the front of the lower
module.

USB

SHT/MEI

2. Remove four screws securing the pcb cover to the lower transport. Detach
the cover.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-86 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. Remove two screws on the cable cover under the slide channel at the base
of the lower module.

4. Disconnect two or four connectors labelled CS1/2/3/4.

Connectors

5. Disconnect all connecters from the lower pcb. Make a note of all connec-
tors removed.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-87
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

6. Remove four screws securing the lower pcb to the lower module and
detach the cover.

7. Detach the pcb and the Mylar sheet fitted behind.

Lower PCB - Replacement

To replace the lower pcb, reverse the above procedure.
Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-88 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Lower Transport - Removal

1. At the front left corner of the lower module:

Press the tab on the rivet-tie to detach it from the motor assembly.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-89
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

2. With the lower transport open, on the inside of the cassette housing:
Remove three screws from the cable cover.

3. Feed the cable through to the inside of the cassette housing.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-90 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

4. Loosen two screws on the hinge spring bracket at the rear end of the
lower transport. Push the bracket forward to loosen.

5. Close the lower transport.

6. Loosen a screw on the stopper bracket at the front end of the lower trans-
port. Pull up the bracket to release the stopper.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-91
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

7. With the lower transport almost fully open, carefully slide the transport
forward and detach it from the hinges.

8. Remove the washer at the front hinge.

Lower Transport - Replacement

To replace the lower transport, reverse the above procedure, paying special
attention to the following:
1. Make sure a washer is replaced at the front hinge.
2. Observe the D-cut shape of the rear hinge spring bracket.
3. Check the belt for fouling after replacing the cable cover inside the cas-
sette housing.

Currency Cassette (Deposit/GBNA, Recycler/GBRU,

With/Without Keylock)
For details of how to configure the cassettes, refer to chapter 26.15 in this
publication Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-92 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Power Supply - Removal

1. On the left-hand side of the module:

Disconnect one connector labelled PWR and remove four screws secur-
ing the power supply cover to the lower module. Detach the cover.

2. Remove the rivet-tie from the cover.

3. Disconnect all connecters from the pcb. Make a note of all connectors
removed.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-93
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

4. Remove four screws securing the pcb to the lower module.

5. Detach the power supply pcb and Mylar sheet fitted behind.

Power Supply - Replacement

To replace the power supply pcb, reverse the above procedure.
Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.

Power Supply Fuses

1. Access the power supply pcb as described above.

2. Remove and replace the fuses as required using only those that meet the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-94 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

specifications.

10 Amp 30 Amp

Reed Switches - Removal

1. Open the lower transport and remove the cassettes.
2. Viewed from the right-hand side of the module:
Remove two screws securing the cassette guide to the inside left wall of
the cassette housing. Detach the guide.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-95
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. From inside the cassette housing, remove two screws securing the pcb to
the lower base. Pull out the pcb slightly.

4. Disconnect one connector (labelled D1C, D2C, D3C or D4C) from the
back of the reed switch pcb.

Reed Switches - Replacement

To replace the reed switch, reverse the above procedure.

Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Removal

NOTE: The recycler motor is the larger of the two motors. The deposit
motor is the smaller of the two. On BNA variants, only deposit motors are
fitted. On recycler variants, both recycler and deposit motors are fitted.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-96 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

1. On the left-hand side of the module:

Disconnect all the connectors from the motor(s) you wish to remove:
2. On recycler motors: Two connectors labelled: BF1M and BS1M
3. On deposit motors: One connector labelled BS1M.
4. To remove the recycler motor, remove two screws securing the motor to
the assembly bracket.

5. To remove the deposit motor, remove three screws securing the motor
assembly to the lower base. Detach the recycler motor, if one is fitted, as
described above.

Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Replacement

To replace the motor assembly, reverse the above procedure.

HARNESSES
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-97
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Cassette Connector Harness - Removal

The cassette connector harness is connected to the bottom edge of the lower
pcb and is routed through to the base of each cassette housing.
1. On the left-hand side of the module:
Remove two screws securing the cable cover to the lower base unit under
the slide channel.

2. Disconnect two or four connectors labelled CS1/2/3/4.

Connectors

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-98 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

3. On the base of the cassette housing, remove two screws from the cable
cover and remove the cover from the base.

4. On the outside left of the lower module, feed the CS cable through the
cable clamp under the slide rail and pull up the cable clamp to the inside
of the cassette housing.
5. Remove three screws securing the connector assembly bracket to the base
of the cassette. Detach the connector assembly bracket.

6. Remove two screws securing the connector to the assembly bracket and

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-99
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

detach the connector. Detach one ground screw/cable.

Cassette Connector Harness - Replacement

To replace the cassette connector and assembly bracket, reverse the above
procedure paying special attention to the following:
Neatly fold and tape the length of each cable according to its position in
the lower module.

Link Harnesses
For the purposes of these replacement procedures the following link harnesses
are defined:
GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link
Upper to Lower Module Link
Upper Module Link.
Each of the link harnesses consists of separately orderable cable assem-
blies. If a single cable assembly is to be replaced then the old cable should be
stripped out from the link harness and its replacement should be tied in and
routed in the same way. The procedures also assume replacement of the artic-
ulated cable guard. If this is not necessary the existing guard should be left in
place and opened up to remove and replace the cable.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-100 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Removal

The GBNA/GBRU to ATM link cable is routed in an articulated cable guard
along one of the module support rails and is then turned up to the GBNA/
GBRU interlock switch and tied into a channel along the side of the module
cradle. The cable consists of three components parts:
Cable Assembly (ATM Power) - 24 V dc supply lines from the ATM to
the GBNA/GBRU
Cable Assembly (Shutter/MEEI) - MEEI and facia shutter power and
control lines from the GBNA/GBRU to the ATM
USB Cable Assembly - USB communications signals between GBNA/
GBRU and the ATM PC Core.
The dc, MEI, and shutter lines are terminated in plugs that connect into
Molex Mini-fit Jnr receptacles at the end of the cradle channel. The USB
cable is routed past these receptacles, led up the side wall of the safe, and
plugged into a socket on the 7-port USB hub.

NOTE: The length of cable runs varies between front and rear access
ATMs. As you strip out the damaged cable, take note of anchor points and
how the excess length is tied in.

Remove the GBNA/GBRU to ATM link cable as follows:

1. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU.
2. Unplug the USB communications cable from the USB Hub and cut the
cable ties to free it from the harness.

3. Unplug the dc power, MEI, and shutter cables from the sockets at the
inboard end of the cradle channel.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-101
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

4. Rack in the GBNA/GBRU and then rack out only the lower module.
5. Cut the cable ties that fasten the harness to the cable channel.
6. Remove the interlock switch cover and unplug the spade connectors from
the interlock switch.
7. Unscrew the single screw attaching the articulated cable guard to the cra-
dle. Retain the screw.

NOTE: Push the walls of the cable guard apart so that a few of the retaining
bars can be taken out allowing the cable to be held back and the head of
the screw to be reached.

8. Unscrew the two M4x8 screws attaching the cable guard to the side of the
lower module.
9. Unscrew the screws attaching the two plastic securing rings. Retain the
screws and rings.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-102 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

NOTE: At this point the harness splits and enters the cassette compartment
via two openings. The USB, MEI, and shutter cables are routed towards
the Lower PCB and the power lines are routed to the power supply unit.

10. Open the lower module and remove the cassettes.

11. In cassette position 1 take off the bright metal covers on the side wall and
base that cover the dc power harness (two screws in each cover).

12. In cassette position 2 take off the bright metal cover on the side wall that
covers the USB and MEI/shutter harness (2 screws).
13. In cassette position 3 free the USB and MEI/shutter harness from the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-103
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

retaining tangs.

14. On the base of cassette position 4 take off the Y-shaped bright metal cover
over the USB and MEI/shutter harness.

15. Unplug the power harness from the power supply unit PWR connector.
16. Take off the power supply cover (4 screws) and press out the cable tie
securing the power input cable to the cover.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-104 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

17. Push the grommet out of the hole in the GBNA/GBRU base and unclip
the grommet from the dc power harness. Retain the grommet.

18. Feed the dc power harness back into cassette position 1.

19. Take off the USB retaining bracket from the Lower PCB cover.

20. Unplug the USB cable and MEI/shutter harness from the USB and SHT
connectors on the Lower PCB.
21. Push the grommet out of the hole in the GBNA/GBRU base and unclip
the grommet from the USB cable and MEI/shutter harnesses. Retain the
grommet.
22. Unclip and retain the ferrite cores from both harnesses. Take note of the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-105
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

exact position of the cores (distance from connectors) on the cables.

23. Feed the harnesses back into cassette position 4.

24. Lift the harness assembly away from the GBNA/GBRU.

GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Replacement

Replacement of the GBNA/GBRU to ATM link cable is the reverse of the
above procedure, taking care with the following:
Clip all the retaining bars into the new cable guard.
Replace all cable ties, retainers, and grommets.
Put the ferrite cores on the new cables in the previously noted positions.
Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.
Connect the interlock switch as shown in the following illustration.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-106 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Refit all removed covers.

COM 2

NO 2

NO 1
COM 1

NOTE: The illustration above shows the interlock switch in a front access
ATM. In a rear access ATM COM1 is at the top of the switch.

Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Removal

The upper to lower module link cable is routed in an articulated cable guard
attached to the side of the lower module and to the underside of the upper
module. The cable consists of: the following component parts:
Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper Power) - DC power lines to the bill val-
idator unit and the main upper pcb
100 Base-T Cable (BV LAN) - LAN cable between lower pcb and the bill
validator unit
Cable assembly (BV Power)
Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper, Signal) - Data cable between the lower
pcb and the main upper pcb.

NOTE: The length of cable runs varies between front and rear access
ATMs. As you strip out the damaged cable, take note of anchor points and
how the excess length is tied in.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-107
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Remove the upper to lower module link cable as follows:

1. Rack out the lower module of the GBNA/GBRU.
2. Unplug the BPWR and UPWR connectors from the power supply unit
and the LAN connector (blue cable) and UPCN connector from the lower
pcb.

3. Take off the harness loop cover (3 screws).

4. Unclip the grommet from the harness and retain the grommet.

NOTE: Take note of how the harness is looped you will require to loop the
replacement harness in the same way.

Grommet

5. Open the lower module and remove the cassette from position 2.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-108 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

6. Take off the bright metal panel on the side wall of the cassette housing
covering the upper to lower link cable.

7. Feed the cable up from the power supply area, through the cassette hous-
ing and out of the access hole next to the cable guard.

8. Close the lower module.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-109
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

9. Unscrew the 2 screws holding the cable guard to the side of the lower
module.

NOTE: Push the side walls of the cable guard apart and unclip two or three
cable retaining bars from the cable guard to allow the cable to be held
back away from the heads of the screws.

10. Remove the single screw (M3x6) attaching the cable guard to the under-
side of the upper module.

11. Remove the bracket from the cable guard (1 screw) and retain the bracket
and screw.
12. Rack in the lower module until it is latched and then rack out the whole
GBNA/GBRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-110 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

13. Open the reservoir /escrow unit until it is supported on the gas strut.
14. Take off the cover from the main upper pcb (4 screws).

Loosen

15. Remove the screw from the long cable cover, slide the cover to the left
out of its locating tang, and lift it off.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-111
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

16. Unplug the cable from the UPWR and UPCN connectors on the Main
Upper PCB.

NOTE: The UPCN connector is the second from bottom at the left-hand
side of the board.

17. Unplug the cables from the BPWR and LAN connectors on the BV unit.

18. Free the cables from any retaining cable ties and lift the harness assembly
away from the GBNA/GBRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-112 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Replacement

Replacement of the upper to lower module link cable is the reverse of the
above procedure, taking care with the following:
Clip all the retaining bars into the new cable guard.
Fit the cable guard bracket to the new cable guard.
Replace all cable ties and grommets.
Loop the new harness in the same way as the old.
Refit all removed covers.

Upper Module Link Cable - Removal

The upper module link cable is made up of two cable assemblies:
Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper)
Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper, URCN)
These cables carry the following signal and supply lines from the main
upper pcb:
Separator pcb: power and communications
Separator: infra-red sensors and detectors, pulse motor
Escrow: infra-red sensors and detectors, pulse motor.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-113
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

NOTE: It is important that the cable routing is followed exactly. As you

strip out the damaged cable, take note of anchor points and how the cable
is tied in.

Remove the upper module link cable as follows:

1. Take off the main upper pcb cover (4 screws).

Loosen

2. Take off the covers over the separator pcb as described in the section
“Pre-Acceptor - Removal”.
3. Open the top transport until it is supported by the gas strut.
4. Remove the screw from the long cable cover, slide the cover to the left
out of its locating tang, and lift it off.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-114 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

5. From the main upper pcb unplug the cables from the following connec-
tors: SPWR, URCN, SE1, SE2, SE4, RV2S.

6. Ease the cables away from the board and out of the long channel cutting
cable ties as necessary.

7. Cut cable ties securing the cable where it turns up out of the long channel.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-115
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

8. From the separator pcb unplug the cables from the SPWR and URCN
connectors.

9. Separate the in-line connectors, SE1, RV2PH, PA3, SEFM, ESCM, ES5
and ES4.
10. Lift the upper module link cable away from the GBNA/GBRU cutting
restraining cable ties as necessary.

Upper Module Link Cable - Replacement

Replacement of the upper module link cable is the reverse of the above
procedure, taking care with the following:
Replace all cable ties and grommets.
Loop the new harness in the same way as the old.
Refit all removed covers.

TROUBLESHOOTING
The tables in this section provide recommended corrective actions for the
error messages listed. Verification and isolation procedures are not
documented. The FRU Replacement and Adjustment corrective actions
referenced in this table are all contained within this chapter. All of the sensors
in the device are self-cleaning under normal operating conditions. However, if
any sensors do become dirty as a result of misuse for example, NCR
recommends cleaning these with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
1. Refer to the NCR publications B006-6273 Diagnostic Status Code Note-
book and B006-6524 GBNA/GBRU Error Code Specification for details

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-116 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

of the GBNA/GBRU M-status and device error codes mapped to FRU

locations.
2. For details on the location of sensors and their names, refer to the section
“Sensors and Actuators”
3. For more details on adjustments, refer to the “Adjustments” section in
this chapter
4. For FRU removal and replacement procedures, refer to the “FRU/Module
Removal” section in this chapter.

FRU LOCATIONS
The following illustrations identify the locations of each of the FRUs
referenced in this section. The top illustration is viewed from the left-hand

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-117
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

side of the device, the bottom is viewed from the right-hand side.
Separator Separator to Escrow/Reservoir
Pre-acceptor Escrow/Reservoir
Timing Belts
Upper Transport

Removable
Reject Bin

BV Entry
Transport

Bill Validator
Gas Strut
(BV) and Fan

Lower Transport
4 3 2 1

Currency
Cassettes

Separator to
Escrow/Reservoir
Main Upper Upper Transport Timing Belt Pre-acceptor
PCB

Separator PCB
Main Timing Upper Module
Belt Link Cable
BV Entry
Transport
Push Latch
(Rear Access)
Lower
Transport

Deposit Motor

Recycler Motor
Lower PCB
Power Supply (Reed Switches
PCB behind)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-118 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Shutter

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Unable to determine Inspect_Now/ The shutter is attached to the rear side of
Shutter position Repair the ATM facia.
Check for damage or jam condition.
Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes. Check for misalignment - refer to
Adjustments.

Pre-acceptor

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Pre-Acceptor Mecha- Inspect_Now/ Replace FRU.
nism Failure Repair
Pre-Acceptor Sensor Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.
Other Pre-Acceptor Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Pre-Acceptor Trans- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
port Sensor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Pre-Acceptor Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-119
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Separator

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Separator Pusher Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Jammed Up Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Separator Pusher Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Jammed Down Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Separator Stage Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Jammed Up Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Separator Stage Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Jammed Down Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Separator's feed & pick Replace_Soon/ Replace FRU.
roller rubber worn Replace

Other Separator Failure Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.

Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Separator Sensor Dirty Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-120 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Separator Transport

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Separator Transport Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Sensor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

Other Separator Trans- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.

port Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

Pre Bill Validator (BV Entry Transport)

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Pre-Bill Validator Trans- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
port Sensor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Pre-Bill Validator Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-121
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Pre-Bill Validator Trans- Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
port Sensor Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.

Bill Validator

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Bill Validator Fan Slow Inspect_Soon/ Replace FRU.
Repair
Bill Validator Failure Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Bill Validator Sensor Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.
Bill Validator Battery Replace_Soon/ Replace FRU.
Low Replace
Bill Validator Battery Replace_Now/
Out Replace

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-122 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Post Bill Validator (BV Exit Transport)

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Post-Bill Validator Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Sensor Fail- Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
ure notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Post-Bill Valida- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
tor Transport Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Post-Bill Validator Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
Transport Sensor Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.

Escrow

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Escrow Transport Sen- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
sor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-123
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Other Escrow Transport Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Escrow Transport Sen- Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
sor Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.
Escrow Jammed Up Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Escrow Jammed Down Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Escrow Sensor Failure Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Escrow Jam Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Escrow Failure Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Escrow Sensor Dirty Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-124 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Reservoir

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Reject Reservoir Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
jammed up Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Reject Reservoir Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
jammed down Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Reject Reservoir Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

Bunch (Top) Transport

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Bunch Transport Sen- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
sor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-125
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Other Bunch Transport Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

Reject Transport

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Reject Transport Sen- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
sor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Reject Transport Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Reject Transport Sen- Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
sor Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-126 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Reject Bin Area and Cassette Transport

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Captured Area Not Not_Configured No action.
Present Not_Configured
Cassette Transport Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Sensor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Cassette Transport Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Motor Rotate trouble Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Cassette Trans- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
port Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Cassette Transport Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
Sensor Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-127
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Lower Transport

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Lower Transport Sen- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
sor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Lower Transport Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-128 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Cassettes

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Cassette 1/2/3/4 Stage Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Mechanism jammed Up Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Cassette 1/2/3/4 Stage Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
jammed down Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Cassette 1/2/3/4 Sen- Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
sor Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Cassette 1/2/3/4 Pick Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Fail Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Other Cassette 1/2/3/4 Inspect_Now/ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed
notes.
Otherwise, replace FRU.
Cassette 1/2/3/4 Sen- Clean_Soon/ Self-cleaning.
sor Dirty Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean
with a dry, lint-free cloth. If damaged,
replace FRU.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-129
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Miscellaneous

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Hardware Failure Inspect_Now/ Upper control board failure. Inspect and
Repair replace or repair.
Download failure Inspect_Now/ Re-install BV software or reboot.
Repair
Communications failure Inspect_Now/ Check cables (USB etc) and reboot.
Repair

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

Level 1 tests for the GBNA/GBRU are:
1. Clear In*
2. Accept
3. Encash
4. Refund
5. Status *
6. Report Definitions
7. Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 1 *
8. Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 2 *
9. Shutter Test
10. Set Notes
11. Stack
12. Present
13. Dispense *
14. Test Cash Units *
15. Test Guide Light
16. Dispense Run-To-Run Sequence *
17. Motor Test *
18. Save Statistics
19. Save BV Info

NOTE: Looping is available on the tests marked (*) above.

DISPENSE FUNCTIONALITY
The following tests will only be available when the GBRU supports dispense
operations:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-130 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Set Notes
Stack
Present
Dispense
Test Cash Units
Dispense Run-To-Run sequence.

Security
The following tests are not offered unless access to the safe has been
identified (see “Dispense Authorization” below):
Stack
Present
Dispense
Test Cash Units
Encash
Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 2.

Dispense Authorization
To authorize diagnostic dispense tests on the GBRU proceed as follows:
1. Enter GBRU/GBNA diagnostics.
2. Press and hold down switch ST on the Main Upper PCB.
3. Wait for the seven segment LED displays to change from 0 0 to to ≡ ≡
and release the switch.
Press
Switch

LEDII LEDI

SW1 SW2 ST

Display Changes

LEDII LEDI

SW1 SW2 ST
4. Wait for diagnostics to reload with the secure options added.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-131
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

CLEAR IN
The CLEAR INtest causes a mechanical reset of the device to be attempted. If
successful, any notes found in the device (other than in the cassette areas) will
be cleared into the reject area.
If the device is successfully cleared, a DEVICE CLEARED message is
displayed. If not, a DEVICE NOT CLEARED message is displayed along
with the appropriate M_STATUS and M_DATA.

ACCEPT
The ACCEPT test enables the GBNA/GBRU to accept a bunch of notes. On
receipt of the hardware's response to the enable, the returned M_STATUS and
M_DATA fields are displayed.
If the M_CODE from the response is not GOOD PENDING the test will
terminate with a Fail status. Otherwise, you are prompted to enter a bunch of
notes. If no notes are entered within 15 seconds, the test times out; the GBRU
is disabled, a NO NOTES ENTERED message is displayed and the test termi-
nates.
If notes were entered a PROCESSING NOTES message is displayed
while the notes are being validated.
If any (or all) of the notes are subsequently rejected as invalid, the invalid
notes are presented at the exit slot and a PLEASE REMOVE NOTES message
is displayed. If the notes in the slot are not removed within 15 seconds, they
will be retracted to the reject area and a NOTES RETRACTED message dis-
played.
If all notes have been accepted or once the invalid notes have been
removed from the exit slot (either manually within the required timeframe or
by the Retract operation completing), a NOTES PROCESSED message is dis-
played along with the total number of each denomination of notes accepted. If
ECB Article 6 is applied, each denomination will be reported per category.

ENCASH
The ENCASH test displays a warning that money is about to be moved into
non-refundable storage bins and you are asked to confirm the operation
through an OK button. If you do not confirm within 10s, the test automatically
cancels.
If the test cancels, any notes in the Escrow will remain there and a NO
NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed.
When the OK button is clicked, the GBRU stores notes from the Escrow
to the cassettes according to the sorting defined. When the test response is
received, the returned M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed.
A NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed if the command succeeds;
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-132 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

otherwise a NO NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed.

REFUND
The REFUND test attempts to refund any notes currently held in the Escrow
back to the facia. When the test response is received, the returned M_STATUS
and M_DATA fields are displayed.
The GBRU moves any notes currently held in the Escrow to the exit slot
and displays a PLEASE REMOVE NOTES prompt. A NO NOTES
REFUNDED message is displayed if there were no notes in the escrow to
refund.
If the notes are not removed within 15s, they are retracted to the Retract
area and a NOTES RETRACTED message is displayed. Completion of the
Retract operation or manual removal of the notes from the exit slot terminates
the test.

NOTE: If ECB Article 6 is applied, then it is possible that some notes (in
Cat. 2 and possibly Cat. 3) will be retained in the device on issuance of
the refund according to the ECB rules applied.

STATUS
The STATUS test interrogates the GBRU status. When the test response is
received, the reported M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed. Sensor
data is also displayed using 64 bytes of data, one bit for each sensor. This can
be used as a sensor test when looping is selected. See “STATUS TEST
OUTPUT” on page 23.

REPORT DEFINITIONS
The response to the REPORT DEFINITIONS test outputs M_STATUS and
M_DATA fields. If the command succeeds, a table of the currently
programmed note definitions is displayed.

DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 1

The DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 1 executes the following
sequence of tests:
Status
Accept
Refund.

DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 2

The DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 2 executes the following

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-133
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

sequence of tests:
Status
Accept
Encash.

SHUTTER TEST
The SHUTTER test opens the shutter, leaves it open for approximately 3s and
then closes the shutter. Appropriate SHUTTER OPEN and SHUTTER
CLOSED messages are displayed. If at any point the shutter should fail, an
error message is displayed showing the M_STATUS.

SET NOTES
The SET NOTES test allows you to set the number of bills to be picked from
each cassette on a DISPENSE test. Only prompts for configured cassettes are
displayed. If the total number of bills exceeds 200 the command fails. A
default of 5 bills for each configured cassette is used if no number is entered.

STACK
The STACK test picks a number of bills and moves them to the escrow, ready
for presentation. The default value is 5 from each configured cassette type but
this can be changed by the SET NOTES option.

PRESENT
The PRESENT test moves bills that have been previously stacked to a
position where you can remove them.
If you do not remove the notes within 15s they are retracted to the Retract
area and a NOTES RETRACTED message is displayed. Completion of the
Retract operation or manual removal of the notes will terminate the test.

DISPENSE
The DISPENSE test performs the STACK and PRESENT functions in a
single operation. The default value for the number of bills picked from each
configured cassette type is 5 but this can be changed by the SET NOTES
option.

TEST CASH UNITS

The TEST CASH UNITS test picks one note from each physical cassette,
transports it to the back of the shutter, and then places it back into the cassette.

TEST GUIDE LIGHT

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-134 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

The TEST GUIDE LIGHT test flashes the guide light on and off until the
CANCEL button is selected.

DISPENSE RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE

The DISPENSE RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE performs the following
sequence of tests:
Clear
Status
Test Cash Units
Shutter Test
Dispense
Clear

MOTOR TEST
The MOTOR test attempts a mechanical reset of the device to check
mechanical operation and initialize mechanical parts. On receipt of the
device's response, the returned M_STATUS and M_DATA fields will be
displayed to indicate the success or otherwise of the test.

SAVE STATISTICS
The SAVE STATISTICS function saves device statistics to the GBRU
component folder. An option is provided to copy the file to floppy disk.

SAVE BV INFO
This SAVE BV INFO function saves Bill Validation information to the GBRU
component folder. An option is provided to copy the file to floppy disk.

M_STATUS AND M_DATA

The M_STATUS codes and M_DATA returned for the GBNA/GBRU are
listed in NCR publication B006-XXXX-A000, 56XX/Personas Self-Service
Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status code Notebook - Volume 2.

NOTE: M_Data contains the error codes returned by the GBNA/GBRU

error code system.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS

S_DATA

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-135
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

The S_DATA returned for the GBNA/GBRU are:

S_DATA Meaning
00H GOOD - No error, continue to use.
01H ROUTINE - Continue to use but log error information in maintenance
fields.
02H WARNING - Continue to use, log error information, warn operator if possi-
ble.
03H SUSPEND - Do not use this device for the defined time period.
04H FATAL - Do not use this device again until there has been operator inter-
vention.

TALLIES
The tallies are incremented by one (1) when the appropriate condition occurs
during diagnostic and normal use. The GBNA/GBRU tallies are as follows:

Tally Description
FEED SEP Notes fed from separator.
FEED 1 Notes fed from Cassette Position 1.
FEED 2 Notes fed from Cassette Position 2.
FEED 3 Notes fed from Cassette Position 3.
FEED 4 Notes fed from Cassette Position 4.
STOR ESC Notes stored to Escrow.
STOR RES Notes stored to Reservoir.
STOR 1 Notes stored to Cassette Position 1.
STOR 2 Notes stored to Cassette Position 2.
STOR 3 Notes stored to Cassette Position 3.
STOR 4 Notes stored to Cassette Position 4.
STOR CFT Notes stored to Counterfeit area.
STOR REJ Notes stored to Reject area.
STOR CAP Notes stored to Capture area.
GENUINE Genuine notes categorized.
DAMAGED Damaged notes categorized.
NOT REC Unrecognized notes categorized.
SUSPECTS Suspect notes categorized.
CNTFEIT Counterfeit notes categorized.
DOUBLES Double notes detected.
LONGS Long notes detected.
SKEWED Skewed notes detected.
TOOCLOSE “Notes Too Close” detected.
DEP OPS Deposit Transactions (Operations).

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-136 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Tally Description
DISP OPS Dispense transactions.
SHUTFAIL Shutter faults detected.
BILLJAMS Bill Jams detected.
MECH ERR Mechanical errors detected.
SHUTOPEN Shutter jammed open errors detected.
SHUTCLOS Shutter jammed closed errors detected.
COMMSERR Communications errors.
BNCH RET Number of bunches returned without validation.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

WARNING

Make sure that the electricity supply to the GBNA/GBRU is

disconnected before carrying out any cleaning.

GBNA / GBRU
Remove any accumulations of paper dust from the transport with a lint-free
cloth dampened with alcohol. The following areas are recommended for
special attention: escrow entry, counterfeit area, top transport, lower transport,
pre-acceptor entry.

CURRENCY CASSETTE
Clean the cassette with a lint-free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol. Do
not use any other cleaning agents or abrasives.

STRAPPING
There are three fuses in the module power supply:
Fuse 1 = 250 V 10 A (Littelfuse)
Fuse 2 and Fuse 3 = 250 V 30 A (Littelfuse)

HISTORY

NOTE: In the following tables “FO” is used to show changes introduced to

improve the reliability of the cash acceptor in the event of the entry of
foreign objects.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-137
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

MECHANICAL

Module: Pre-Acceptor (140 mm) R/A

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020091 Use to replace Requires
009-0019421, rework to sepa-
009-0020240 and rator if type
009-0020375 009-0019425
or
009-0020242.
Refer to “Pre-
Acceptor
Replacement”
in this chapter.

Module: Pre-Acceptor (178 mm) F/A

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020090 Use to replace Requires
009-0019422, rework to sepa-
009-0020241 and rator if type
009-0020376 009-0019425
or
009-0020242.
Refer to “Pre-
Acceptor
Replacement”
in this chapter.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-138 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: Separator

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-109425 009-0020242 NIC Rework
009-0020242 009-0020377 NIC (FO) required to the
pusher of 009-
109425 and
009-0020242
when Pre-
Acceptor
replaced.
Refer to “Pre-
Acceptor
Replacement”
in this chapter.
009-0020377

Module: Escrow and Reservoir

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019426 009-0020243 NIC
009-0020243 009-0020378 NIC FO
009-0020378

Module: Upper Transport (Removable Reject Bin)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019428 009-0020244 NIC
009-0020244 009-0020379 NIC
009-0020379

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-139
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: Upper Transport (Fixed Reject Bin)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019429 009-0020245 NIC
009-0020245 009-0020380 NIC
009-0020380

Module: BV Entry Transport

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019435

Module: BV Entry Transport (FO)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020381

Module: Lower Transport (GBRU4)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019438 009-0020382 NIC
009-0020382

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-140 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: Lower Transport (GBNA2)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019439 009-0020383 NIC
009-0020383

Module: Lower Transport (GBNA4)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019440 009-0020384 NIC
009-0020384

SENSORS

Module: BV Module (Line Magnetic Sensor)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019431

Module: BV Module (Line Magnetic Sensor plus

Serial Number Option)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019433

ELECTRONIC

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-141
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: Main Upper PCB

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019436

Module: Separator PCB

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019437

Module: Lower PCB (GBRU)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019446

Module: Lower PCB (GBNA)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019447

Module: Reed Switch PCB

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019568

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-142 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number

Module: Power Supply

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019445

Module: Recycle Motor

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019441

Module: Deposit Motor Assembly

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019565

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-143
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: BV Fan

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019762

Module: BV Fan, Large

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020387

MEDIA CONTAINERS

Module: Currency Cassette (Recycle)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019448 009-0020246 NIC
009-0020246

Module: Currency Cassette (Recycle with Keylock)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019449 009-0020247 NIC
009-0020247

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-144 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: Currency Cassette (Deposit)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019452 009-0020248 NIC
009-0020248

Module: Currency Cassette (Deposit with Keylock)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019453 009-0020249 IC
009-0020249

Module: Reject Bin (Removable)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019427 009-0020250 NIC
009-0020250

Module: Reject Bin (Removable with Keylock)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019564 009-0020251 IC
009-0020251

HARNESSES

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-145
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: Cassette Connector Harness

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019569

Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020174

Module: Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper,URCN)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020175

Module: Cable Assembly (BV Power)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020176

Module: 100 Base-T Cable (BV LAN)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020177

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-146 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number

Module: Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper, Power)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020178

Module: Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper, Signal)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020179

Module: Cable Assembly (ATM Power)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020180

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-147
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: USB Cable Assembly

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020181

Module: Cable Assembly (Shutter/MEEI)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020182

TIMING BELTS

Module: Carrier Timing Belt

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020172

Module: Main Timing Belt, Upper Transport

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020173

CABINET

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-148 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Module: Upper Base

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019434

Module: Lower Base (GBRU 4 Cassettes)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019442

Module: Lower Base (GBNA 2 Cassette)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019443

Module: Lower Base (GBNA 4 Cassette)

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019444

Module: Push Latch

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0019689

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.13-149
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number

Module: Gas Strut Assembly

Old Part New Part

Change Number Interchangeability Comments
Number Number
009-0020171

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.13-150 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CONTENTS

iTRAN 1000 ATM Check Processor

(Type 4)

Chapter 26.14

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................ 26.14-1

...BY ANY OTHER NAME ........................................................... 26.14-2

DESCRIPTION................................................................................. 26.14-2
SECURITY SHUTTER.................................................................. 26.14-4
INFEED .......................................................................................... 26.14-4
THICK ITEM DETECTOR ........................................................... 26.14-4
DE-SKEW MECHANISM............................................................. 26.14-4
TRANSPORT MECHANISM........................................................ 26.14-5
SENSORS....................................................................................... 26.14-5
Track Sensors 1 and 2 (Short Infeed)........................................... 26.14-6
Track Sensor 1 (Medium and Long Infeeds) ............................... 26.14-6
Track Sensor 2 (Medium and Long Infeeds) ............................... 26.14-6
Track Sensor 3.............................................................................. 26.14-6
Track Sensor 4.............................................................................. 26.14-6
Track Sensor 5.............................................................................. 26.14-6
Track Sensor 6.............................................................................. 26.14-7
Track Sensor 7.............................................................................. 26.14-7
Track Sensor 8.............................................................................. 26.14-7
Track Sensor 9.............................................................................. 26.14-7
Track Sensor 10............................................................................ 26.14-7
Track Sensor 11............................................................................ 26.14-8
Bin Full Sensors ........................................................................... 26.14-8
MICR READER MODULE ........................................................... 26.14-8
FRONT AND REAR IMAGING ................................................... 26.14-9
REAR ENDORSE PRINTER......................................................... 26.14-9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-i
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Multi-Line Endorser ...................................................................26.14-10

Single-Line Endorser ..................................................................26.14-11
MULTI-POCKET BINS ...............................................................26.14-12
SPECIFICATION .........................................................................26.14-12
Cheques.......................................................................................26.14-12
Power Requirement ....................................................................26.14-12
Weight.........................................................................................26.14-13

TEST TOOLS..................................................................................26.14-13

ADJUSTMENTS.............................................................................26.14-13
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ................................26.14-13
DFD SENSORS CALIBRATION ................................................26.14-14
MODULE CONFIGURATION....................................................26.14-14
MODULE LOAD FILE ................................................................26.14-15
DISPLAY VERSION NUMBER .................................................26.14-15
CAMERA CALIBRATION .........................................................26.14-16
Image Quality .............................................................................26.14-16
Camera Calibration Procedure....................................................26.14-16
MICR READER CALIBRATION ...............................................26.14-16
Reader Performance....................................................................26.14-16
Reader Calibration Procedure.....................................................26.14-17
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS...............................................26.14-18
Single-Line Endorser ..................................................................26.14-18
Medium and Long Infeed ...........................................................26.14-19
Multi-pockets..............................................................................26.14-21

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT......................................................26.14-22
CONNECTOR BOARD ...............................................................26.14-22
ATM Interface ............................................................................26.14-23
CONTROLLER BOARD .............................................................26.14-23
PRINTHEAD BOARD .................................................................26.14-24
BIN ISLAND BOARD .................................................................26.14-24

INTERNAL CABLES.....................................................................26.14-25
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 1 OF 11)
SHUTTER / MEI / POWER ADAPTER HARNESS ..................26.14-25
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 2 OF 11)
INFEED SENSORS AND LEDS .................................................26.14-26
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 3 OF11)
DOUBLE FEED DETECT ...........................................................26.14-27
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-ii AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 4 OF 11)

INFEED AND HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTORS.......... 26.14-28
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 5 OF 11)
HORIZONTAL GUIDE SENSORS AND DE-SKEW................ 26.14-29
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 6 OF 11)
MICR PREAMP BOARD ............................................................ 26.14-30
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 7 OF 11)
FRONT AND REAR CAMERAS................................................ 26.14-31
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 8 OF 11)
VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR AND SENSORS............... 26.14-32
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 9 OF 11)
SL ENDORSER............................................................................ 26.14-33
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 10 OF 11)
ML ENDORSER .......................................................................... 26.14-34
CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 11 OF 11)
BIN MODULE HARNESS .......................................................... 26.14-35

TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................. 26.14-36
MODULE ERROR STATES ....................................................... 26.14-36

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................. 26.14-39

PHASE 1 TEST RESULTS.......................................................... 26.14-40
PHASE 2 TEST RESULTS.......................................................... 26.14-40

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................. 26.14-41

ENABLE....................................................................................... 26.14-41
EJECT........................................................................................... 26.14-42
ENDORSE.................................................................................... 26.14-42
CAPTURE BIN 1 ......................................................................... 26.14-42
CAPTURE BIN 2 ......................................................................... 26.14-42
CAPTURE BIN 3 ......................................................................... 26.14-42
CLEAR ......................................................................................... 26.14-42
DISPLAY FRONT IMAGE ......................................................... 26.14-42
DISPLAY REAR IMAGE............................................................ 26.14-43
SENSORS..................................................................................... 26.14-43
SHUTTER .................................................................................... 26.14-43
DE-SKEW CYCLE ...................................................................... 26.14-43
ENDORSER CYCLE ................................................................... 26.14-43
CAPTURE BIN SOLENOID ....................................................... 26.14-43
TRANSPORT MOTOR................................................................ 26.14-44
RUN TO RUN .............................................................................. 26.14-44
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-iii
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS..............................................................26.14-44
S_DATA .......................................................................................26.14-44
TALLIES ......................................................................................26.14-45

ERROR CODES..............................................................................26.14-46
M_STATUS ..................................................................................26.14-46
M_DATA Byte 0 ..........................................................................26.14-47
M_DATA ......................................................................................26.14-48
ERROR CODE REFERENCE......................................................26.14-48
Routine Error Statuses ................................................................26.14-49
Runtime Error Statuses ...............................................................26.14-50
Diagnostic Error Statuses ...........................................................26.14-52

MODULE REPLACEMENT..........................................................26.14-58
CPM TRANSPORT ......................................................................26.14-58
MULTI-POCKETS .......................................................................26.14-62
MULTI-POCKETS DEFLECTOR WIRE....................................26.14-64
INFEED ........................................................................................26.14-65
TOP GUIDE..................................................................................26.14-69
CONTROL ELECTRONICS........................................................26.14-72
SINGLE-LINE ENDORSER ........................................................26.14-76
MULTI-LINE ENDORSER .........................................................26.14-78
RAILS (SLIDES) ..........................................................................26.14-79

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..................................................26.14-82

CLEANING MATERIALS ..........................................................26.14-82
SENSORS .....................................................................................26.14-82
CAMERA......................................................................................26.14-82
TRANSPORT ...............................................................................26.14-82
VISUAL INSPECTION................................................................26.14-82

STRAPPING ...................................................................................26.14-82

HISTORY........................................................................................26.14-83
MODULE: INFEED - CPM4 SHORT .........................................26.14-83
MODULE: INFEED - CPM4 MEDIUM......................................26.14-83
MODULE: INFEED - CPM4 LONG ...........................................26.14-83
MODULE: TOP GUIDE ..............................................................26.14-83
MODULE: CPM4 - SLE...............................................................26.14-84
MODULE: CPM4 - MLE .............................................................26.14-84
MODULE: CONTROL ELECTRONICS ....................................26.14-84
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-iv AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

MODULE: SINGLE-LINE ENDORSER .................................... 26.14-84

MODULE: MULTI-LINE ENDORSER...................................... 26.14-85
MODULE: MULTI-POCKETS ................................................... 26.14-85
MODULE: POCKET DEFLECTOR WIRE ................................ 26.14-85

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-v
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-vi AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.14

iTRAN 1000 ATM Check Processor

(Type 4)

INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the iTRAN 1000 Check Processor Type 4 (CPM4) used
in the 66XX ATMs.

Capture Bin Multi-Pocket Bins

Track Guide

Infeed Guide

Access Door

Endorser Top Guide

Endorser
Track Guide
Camera Unit
Corner Belt
Assembly

The CPM4 consists of two separable modules, one mounted above the
other.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-1
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

The lower module consists of a transport and camera system that permits
cheques to be accepted, imaged and either returned to the user or transported
to the multi-pocket storage bins. A wide range of cheque types with different
layouts and data formats can be handled. The CPM4 is also capable of reading
the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code-line of a cheque and of
endorsing the back of the cheque. Cheque images are available for user lead-
through, transmission to a remote host, or for local printing and, additionally,
the images may be used by software utilities to read and process cheque infor-
mation such as code-line data, printed data, and handwritten amounts.
The upper module consists of a vertical transport mechanism that drives the
cheques into the multi-pocket storage bins as shown in the following
illustration.

Plastic Plate

Capture Bin (Bin 3)

Cheque Receiving Bin

(Bin 2)

Cheque Receiving Bin

(Bin 1)

Actuator Wire

...BY ANY OTHER NAME

The name Cheque Processing Module (CPM4) is used in engineering
documentation, (for example, in signal names on schematic diagrams), and for
that reason the abbreviation CPM4 or CPM is used in this chapter.
The name iTRAN applies to a range of products that perform image-based,
item processing functions.

DESCRIPTION
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-2 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

The CPM4 is attached to the ATM by two rails (one at either side) that permit
the whole module to be racked out of the ATM.

The CPM4 communicates with the host ATM via a USB interface.
The CPM4 can be considered to have the following functional areas:
Security shutter
Infeed
De-skew mechanism
Transport mechanism
Sensors
MICR reader module
Front and rear imaging
Rear endorse printer
Multi-pocket bins.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-3
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

SECURITY SHUTTER
The security shutter is attached to the facia in front of the CPM infeed
transport to prevent unauthorised access to the module. The shutter is
controlled from the CPM Control Board. Sensors indicate whether the shutter
is fully opened or fully closed.
The facia mounted Media Entry Indicators are also controlled from the
CPM Control Board.

INFEED
The infeed module consists of a driven single belt with four shaft mounted
idler rollers on the long infeed transport (two on the short and medium length
infeeds) and two sprung pressure rollers bearing down on the belt to grip the
cheques and transport. One pressure roller is located at the start of the
transport and creates a grip on the document when it has been inserted about
50 mm
(1.97 in.) into the module. It also grips a document that has been returned to
the facia slot until it is taken by the user. The second pressure roller ensures
that cheques are positively driven into the de-skew mechanism.
There are three sensors along the length of the infeed. See “SENSORS”
on page 5 for a description of their purpose.

THICK ITEM DETECTOR

The thick item detector is located on the main transport near the infeed. Three
optical sensors detect thick items or multiple cheques. Its purpose is to detect
and prevent thick items from entering the CPM transport.

NOTE: The name Double Feed Detector (DFD) is used in engineering doc-
umentation, error codes and statuses, (for example, in signal names on
schematic diagrams), and for that reason either Double Feed Detector or
DFD is used in this chapter.

DE-SKEW MECHANISM
The cheque is moved into the de-skew position by driven lower rollers and a
rack of upper idler rollers that bears down upon them. The rack of upper
rollers is lifted by a solenoid to remove the grip on the cheque. A second
solenoid is de-energized to permit a single wheel to rise under spring pressure
to drive the cheque at right angles to its previous direction of travel until it
butts against a reference surface. This makes sure that the cheque is in the
correct position for subsequent imaging and MICR read operations when the
forward motion is returned by lowering the rack of rollers again.
Sensors are used to detect that the cheque has been correctly de-skewed.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-4 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

For more information, see “SENSORS” on page 5.

TRANSPORT MECHANISM
The transport can move cheques to and from the processing modules and into
the multi-pocket bins. Cheques that have not reached the multi-pocket bins
can be returned to the customer.
Sensors detect the position and direction of movement of the cheque and
identify if a jam has occurred and its location. For more information, see
“SENSORS” on page 5.

SENSORS
The following diagram shows the CPM4 track layout, giving the locations of
the processing devices, the track sensors, and the bin full sensors.
The de-skew mechanism and the endorser stage are the two primary loca-
tions where a cheque may rest between processing operations.
The diagram below shows the layout of the short infeed variant of the
CPM4.
Bin Full
Sensor
3

2
Cheque
Bins
1
11

10

Bin Full Double Feed Infeed

Lever Detector
9
Endorser Stage Area

De-skew
Mechanism 1&2
8 3
MICR
Endorser Read Head 4
Track
5 Sensors
7 6
Front Camera

Rear Camera

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-5
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

The purpose of each of the sensors is described in the following text.

Track Sensors 1 and 2 (Short Infeed)

Track Sensors 1 and 2 are located between the shutter and first drive shaft of
the infeed, one on each side of the centre drive roller. The two sensors act as
one and have the following functions:
provide the signals for the infeed transport to start
combines with Track Sensor 5 to detect when the cheque has fully entered
the transport allowing the shutter to be closed.

Track Sensor 1 (Medium and Long Infeeds)

Track Sensor 1 is located between the shutter and first drive shaft of the
infeed. It has the following functions:
provides the signal for the infeed transport to start
combines with Track Sensor 3 to detect when the cheque has fully entered
the transport allowing the shutter to be closed.

Track Sensor 2 (Medium and Long Infeeds)

Track Sensor 2 is a pair of sensors straddling the infeed belt that act as a single
sensor. It has the following function:
detects cheque jams in the infeed.

Track Sensor 3
Track Sensor 3 is centred in the track and is one of an array of sensors making
up the Double Feed Detector. It has the following functions:
sets an item present flag, if covered when sensors 1 and 2 become clear
combines with track sensors 1 and 2 to check document length
combines with at least two other sensors to detect items that are too thick
detects the trailing edge of the cheque for staging in the de-skew section.

Track Sensor 4
Track Sensor 4 is located in the de-skew area 2.25 mm (0.09 in.) above the
reference surface. It has the following function:
detects that the cheque has been successfully de-skewed.

Track Sensor 5
Track Sensor 5 is located in the de-skew area 61 mm (2.40 in.) above the
reference height. It has the following functions:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-6 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

checks for documents that are too narrow (after the de-skew operation)
checks initial document length (short infeed only).

Track Sensor 6
Track Sensor 6 is located just over 30 mm (1.18 in.) upstream of the MICR
read head. Its functions are as follows:
locates lead edge for downstream devices
measures the exact cheque length for use during MICR read, image, and
endorse operations
staging a cheque for endorsement.

Track Sensor 7
Track Sensor 7 is located in the vertical track section around the corner from
the front camera. Its function is as follows:
detects jams in reader and camera areas after the cheque passes sensor 6.

Track Sensor 8
Track Sensor 8 is located just before entry into the multi-pocket bin module. It
has the following functions:
detects jams at the endorser, either during endorsement or as the cheque
passes through.

Track Sensor 9
Track Sensor 9 is located just before entry into the multi-pocket bin module. It
has the following functions:
monitors cheque passing from the core processing module into the multi-
pocket bin module
sychronize the bin 1 deflector gate with the position of the cheque
detects jams at the module interface and while the cheque is moving past
or into bin 1.

Track Sensor 10
Track Sensor 10 is located upstream of the deflector gate for bin 1. Its
functions are as follows:
sychronize the bin 2 deflector gate with the position of the cheque
watches for unexpected items arriving because of a bin selector failure
detects jams while the cheque is moving past or into the associated bin
selector.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-7
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Track Sensor 11
Track Sensor 11 is located upstream from the curved track leading into bin 3.
Its functions are as follows:
watches for unexpected items arriving because of a bin selector failure
monitors cheques on the way to bin 3 and detects any jams.

Bin Full Sensors

There is one Bin Full Sensor located in each multi-pocket bin. A wire lever is
lifted up by the growing stack of cheques until it pushes against a plastic plate
clipped into the top of the bin. The plate is lifted until it interrupts the sensor
beam. This signals a “bin nearly full” status which changes to “bin full” when
three more cheques have been deposited in that bin.

MICR READER MODULE

The MICR Reader module is located immediately after the de-skew module.
It is capable of recognizing either E-13B or CMC-7 character fonts. The
cheque is driven past the low speed MICR head at full transport speed with its
MICR band in contact with the head. This produces an analog magnetic
signature which is sampled and digitized using an 8-bit ADC at rates of 1233
and 1606 samples per inch for E-13B and CMC-7 respectively. The captured
data is sent to the host ATM, as it is being captured, via a dedicated USB
stream pipe. MICR recognition is performed during processing by software in
the ATM’s PC core and includes:
E-13B or CMC7 character recognition
An ASCII output string.
The ASCII data string includes all the encode line characters such as
inter-character blanks.
The MICR read head is placed so that its 12.7 mm (0.50 in.) scan band
will capture characters printed within the ANSI specified 6.35 mm (0.25 in.)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-8 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

print band. The MICR read scan position is shown in the diagram below:

Document

12.7 mm

MICR Band

1.57 mm

FRONT AND REAR IMAGING

After passing under the MICR read head the cheques pass between two
cameras; one that scans the front and one that scans the rear of the cheque.
The cameras use line scan imaging sensors across an image scan height of
104 mm (4.09 in.) to capture 8-bit, grey scale (256 levels) images. The
capture resolution is 200 pixels per inch in both the vertical and horizontal
directions. The image data is stored in its raw state in local RAM to await
transmission to the host ATM. Pixel data is sent in the order in which it was
captured with the first byte being for the lead edge pixel located closest to the
track bottom. An optical sensor mounted in the track detects the leading and
trailing edge of the document (see “Track Sensor 6”).
The image registration tolerances can be summarised as follows:
Capture resolution = 200 ± 5 pixels per inch
Lead and trail edge registration = ± 4 pixels
Bottom edge registration = ± 14 pixels
Image height = ± 2.5 mm
Image skew = maximum 1.0 degrees.

REAR ENDORSE PRINTER

Beyond the cameras the transport turns vertically upwards and the rear of the
cheque passes the rear endorse printer. This printer can be one of two types;
multi-line or single-line.
The multi-line print module uses a dot matrix printhead and carriage
mechanism that is capable of printing multiple lines across the cheque
endorsement area. The single-line print module uses the same printhead
mounted in a fixed position.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-9
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

The endorser font is based on one used for passbook printing and is
installed using a download message to allow for future expansion. There are
73 printable ASCII characters, the carriage return code and two control codes
(7BH and 7DH) for switching between standard (4.5 characters per cm) and
compressed (6 characters per cm) print formats. The printable character set is
shown below:

€ !”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_£

ASCII codes for lower case alphabet characters will be accepted by the
endorser but will be printed as upper case characters. Any other ASCII char-
acter code, either not shown in the above character set or not a valid control
code, will be printed as an open square bracket “[“.

Multi-Line Endorser
The multi-line endorser can print 40 mm (1.57 in.) long lines spaced
approximately 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) apart with up to 18 characters per line in
standard format and 24 characters per line in compressed format. Print lines
that do not fit on a single line, wrap to the start of the next print line.
As shown in the following illustration, the endorsement area starts at 18
mm (0.71 in.) from the bottom, to clear the MICR band, and must be at least 5
mm (0.20 in.) from each of the other three document edges. Based on the min-
imum document height of 63 mm (2.48 in.), the endorsement area is limited to
a region 40 mm (1.57 in.) high.
Document
Trailing Edge
Transit Institution of Payee
Endorsements First Deposit Endorsement
Endorsement

Endorsement

5 mm
Multi-Line

Multi-Line
Zone 2

Zone 1
Area

Area

40 mm

18 mm

5 mm 5 mm

76.2 mm 38.1 mm

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-10 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

The CPM4 command protocol requires the application to specify the

position of the first print line by selecting either zone 1 or zone 2 for endorse-
ment. For zone 1 the printing starts with the last line just inside the zone
around 38 mm (1.50 in.) from the document trailing edge. Printing proceeds
line by line in reverse order up to
5 mm (0.20 in.) from the document trailing edge. Lines that would print off
the end of the document will be truncated. With zone 2 endorsements printing
is done in a conventional top down fashion, starting just inside the top of the
zone at about 40 mm (1.57 in.) from the document trailing edge. Printing can
continue down to
5 mm (0.20 in.) from the lead edge of the document. Through the use of
spaces and carriage returns it is possible to place text anywhere within the
shaded region shown in the illustration.

Single-Line Endorser
The single-line endorser prints along the length of the document at 30 mm
(1.18 in.) from the document lower edge. The length of the line depends upon
the length of the document with the limitation that no print should be located
within 5 mm (0.20 in.) of the document edges. The default start position is
approximately 5 mm (0.20 in.) from the trailing edge of the document.
Trailing space characters are used to shift the first printable character further
from the trailing edge. Characters that would print beyond the last
5 mm (0.20 in.) of the document will be truncated. This results in lines with
the following character count:
Shortest documents (150 mm (5.91 in.)):
63 standard characters
84 compressed characters
Longest document (225 mm (8.86 in.)):
101 standard characters

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-11
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

135 compressed characters.

Single Line Endorsement

30 mm

5 mm 5 mm

MULTI-POCKET BINS
The multi-pocket bins are located in the separate bin module, above the CPM4
core unit, and complete the cheque path. Solenoid operated gates deflect the
cheques into the lower two bins. If these gates are not operated, the normal
path of the cheque is into the highest bin. Each bin contains a bin full sensor
(see the section “Sensors”).
The bins have the following sizes and typical capacities:
Bin 3 (top bin) - 150 flat items, 38 mm (1.5 in.) storage height
Bin 2 (middle bin) - 150 flat items, 38 mm (1.5 in.) storage height
Bin 1 (lowest bin) - 600 flat items, 102 mm (4.0 in.) storage height.

SPECIFICATION

Cheques
The CPM4 is capable of handling cheques that meet the following criteria:
Length = 150 mm (5.91 in.) to 225 mm (8.86 in.)
Width = 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) to 108 mm (4.25 in.)
Thickness = 0.076 mm (0.003 in.) to 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Weight = 75 g/m2 (20 lb.*) to 105 g/m2 (28 lb.*)

NOTE: * Paper weights are based on ANSI X9.100-10 (previously X9.18)

Paper Specification for Checks.

Power Requirement
The CPM4 controller board, motors, solenoids, sensors, and peripheral

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-12 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

devices require the following dc voltage and currents:

Quiescent Current Peak Continuous Current

+24 V - constant 500 mA 5.0 A

The +24 V supply is sourced from the ATM power supply. The current
rating in the table represents a total load which includes the current sourced
for the following voltages derived from the constant +24 V:
+5 V is derived using a dc to dc converter mounted on the CPM4 Control-
ler Board.
+12 V to drive the MEI is derived using a fixed regulator
+15 V to MICR is derived using a fixed regulator.

Weight
The weight of the CPM4 is as follows:
SLE core module (without infeed) = 14.0 kg (30.9 lbs)
MLE core module (without infeed) = 14.5 kg (32.0 lbs)
Carrier = 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs)
Infeed (short) = 0.8 kg (1.8 lbs)
Infeed (medium) = 1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)
Infeed (long) = 2.0 kg (4.4 lbs)
Multi-pocket bin module = 11.0 kg (24.3 lbs).

TEST TOOLS
The following test documents are available to test the CPM:
MICR test document 484-0046074 and 484-0046075
Image quality document 484-0050375
Calibration document set 484-0092469.

ADJUSTMENTS

CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

After replacing the electronics boards a full calibration procedure must be
performed on the CPM using the calibration documents supplied for the
MICR, Camera, and DFD Sensors.

NOTE: DFD sensors should be calibrated first so that test documents can
be entered successfully into the CPM.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-13
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

To carry out configuration and calibration tasks on the CPM, proceed as

follows:
1. From the System Application Main Menu select the option Self-Service
Configuration.
2. Select Set Device Configuration.
3. Select Cheque Processing Module 4 to reach the Cheque Processing
Module menu where the selections permit configuration and calibration
tasks to be performed as follows:

DFD SENSORS CALIBRATION

Selection of DFD Sensors Calibration allows the DFD sensors to be
calibrated.
A warning prompt tells you that the correct calibration document must be
used. Select OK to close the prompt.
A further menu is displayed asking, “Continue with calibration?: No” -
with “No” being the default selection. Three options are also displayed: Tog-
gle, OK, and Cancel. Toggle changes between Yes and No. Cancel, or OK
with No selected returns you to the main configuration menu without perform-
ing the calibration.
Select Yes and press OK to perform the calibration. If a document is
detected, the calibration procedure exits and the message “Document found in
transport” is displayed. Otherwise, you are prompted to enter a DFD calibra-
tion document and the device is enabled. If the document is not entered within
15 seconds, “No document entered” is displayed and the procedure exits.
When the document is entered in time, the DFD sensor calibration is per-
formed. On successful calibration the device’s EEPROM is updated and a
message is displayed. The calibration document is ejected and you are
prompted to remove it.

MODULE CONFIGURATION
On selection of Module Configuration a command is sent to the CPM to clear
the transport mechanism of any documents and an information message is
displayed. If the clear fails, an information message is displayed.
The main configuration menu is then displayed containing the configura-
tion values for:
Number of Capture Bins
MICR Reader Type
Endorse Printer Type
CPM Device Type.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-14 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

The initial values displayed are those read from the CPM when the menu
selection was made. Changes may be made to the CPM Device Type and
MICR Reader Type parameters by entering the required values into the data
entry items.

NOTE: The CPM Device Type is initially set from the firmware installed
on the CPM controller board. If the contoller board is replaced at the
same time as the Platform is re-installed, it is possible for the wrong
device type to be detected. The CPM Device Type option provides the
ability to correct the device type.

There are also four options displayed on the configuration menu for the
functions: Tab, Reset, OK, and Cancel.
1. Tab allows you to tab through each data entry field in turn.
2. Reset changes the currently highlighted parameter back to its original
value.
3. OK and Cancel are used to accept or reject changed parameters, as fol-
lows:
If OK is pressed and no changes have been made or if Cancel is
pressed then the program returns to the main configuration menu.
If OK is pressed and changes have been made, then a further menu is
displayed asking “Configure New Parameters?: No” - with “No”
being the default selection. Three options are also displayed for Tog-
gle, OK, and Cancel. Pressing the Toggle option toggles the selection
between Yes and No. If Cancel is pressed or if OK is pressed with No
selected then all changes are abandoned and the program returns to
the main configuration menu. If OK is pressed and Yes is selected
then the parameters are verified and, if acceptable, are stored in the
registry. If any of the parameters are not acceptable, then an error
prompt will be displayed and the parameters in error will be high-
lighted with an “X”.

MODULE LOAD FILE

When Module Load File is selected you are prompted to enter a flex disk
containing CPM firmware load files. The load files on the disk are verified
before being copied to the component’s install directory. A message is then
displayed indicating that a shutdown and reboot is required for the changes to
take effect.

DISPLAY VERSION NUMBER

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-15
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Selection of Display Version Number displays the version numbers of the

Main Control Board, Connector/Driver Board and Core Firmware, plus the
version numbers of the currently downloaded Main Firmware, FPGA
Configuration, Endorser Firmware, and Endorser Font Bitmap load files.

CAMERA CALIBRATION

Image Quality
The CPM4 imaging cameras meet the image quality requirements of ANSI X9
(X9.37) and truncation under Check 21.
NCR test document 484-0050375 is used to evaluate image quality.

Camera Calibration Procedure

The selection Camera Calibration allows the CPM cameras to be calibrated.
A warning prompt tells you that the correct calibration document must be
used. Select OK to close the prompt.
A further menu is displayed asking, “Continue with calibration?: No” -
with “No” being the default selection. Three options are also displayed: Tog-
gle, OK, and Cancel. Toggle changes between Yes and No. Cancel, or OK
with No selected returns you to the main configuration menu without perform-
ing the calibration.
Select Yes and press OK to perform the calibration. If a document is
detected the calibration procedure exits and the message “Document found in
transport” is displayed. Otherwise, you are prompted to enter a camera cali-
bration document and the device is enabled. If the document is not entered
within 15 seconds, “No document entered” is displayed and the procedure
exits.
When the document is entered in time, an “In progress” message is dis-
played and the camera calibration is performed. On completion, the message
disappears, the calibration document is ejected and you are prompted to
remove it.

MICR READER CALIBRATION

Reader Performance
The performance of the MICR reader is specified in terms of speed and
accuracy. For accuracy, there are two criteria, rejected and misread characters.
A reject is a character that is considered unreadable by the reader and is
identified using a special “reject” code. A misread is the substitution, by the
reader, of an incorrect character other than the designated reject code.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-16 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Reject and misread performance rates are as follows:

Font Per Character Rate Per Document Rate

Reject Misread Reject Misread

E-13B nominal 1:4,000 1:800,000 1:100 1:20,000

E-13B critical 1:2,000 1:80,000 1:50 1:2,000

CMC-7 nominal 1:4,000 1:800,000 1:100 1:20,000

CMC-7 critical 1:2,000 1:160,000 1:50 1:4,000

NOTE: The “Per Document Rate” is based on 40 characters per document.

Nominal rates are based on print being within the guidelines or at the
extreme limits of ANSI (E-13B) or ECMA (CMC-7) print specifications. The
MICR test documents (484-0046074 and 484-0046075) represent the range of
these specifications. Reader performance at or below the critical rate, on print-
ing that conforms to the applicable specifications, indicates that reader main-
tenance or repair is necessary.

Reader Calibration Procedure

Selection of “MICR Reader Calibration” allows the MICR reader to be
calibrated.
A warning prompt tells you that the correct calibration document must be
used. Select OK to close the prompt.
A further menu is displayed asking, “Continue with calibration?: No” -
with “No” being the default selection. Three options are also displayed: Tog-
gle, OK, and Cancel. Toggle changes between Yes and No. Cancel, or OK
with No selected returns you to the main configuration menu without perform-
ing the calibration.
Select Yes and press OK to perform the calibration. If a document is
detected the calibration procedure exits and the message “Document found in
transport” is displayed. Otherwise, you are prompted to enter the signal level
printed on the MICR calibration document. The valid range is 90 to 111. If an
invalid value is entered an error prompt is displayed and you are allowed to
re-enter the value.
You are then prompted to enter the MICR calibration document and the
device is enabled. If the document is not entered within 15 seconds, “No doc-
ument entered” is displayed and the procedure exits.
When the document is entered in time, an “In progress” message is dis-
played and the MICR calibration is performed. On completion, the message
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-17
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

disappears, the calibration document is ejected and you are prompted to

remove it.

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

Single-Line Endorser
The single-line endorser must be adjusted horizontally to give a gap of 0.005
in. to 0.007 in. between the printhead and the platen.
Adjust as follows:
1. Loosen the three SLE mounting screws.
Mounting Screws Platen Solenoid

Single-line Endorser Printhead Platen

2. Hold the platen solenoid in its energized position.

3. Place a 0.006 in. feeler gauge between the printhead and the platen.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-18 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

4. Move the SLE horizontally until the feeler gauge lightly touches both the
printhead and the platen.

Platen Solenoid

Printhead

0.005 in - 0.007 in.

5. Tighten the SLE mounting screws.

6. Check the gap.
7. Readjust if necessary.

Medium and Long Infeed

Nodding Nose - The nodding features of both the medium and long infeeds
require vertical adjustment to ensure that the infeed automatically aligns with
the opening in the ATM facia. This adjustment positions the infeed guide shaft
correctly in relation to the ATM alignment bracket.
Make the adjustment as follows:
1. Screw the spring plunger all the way up into the nodding adjustment
block.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-19
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

2. Screw the spring plunger down until its tip just contacts the nodding
adapter bracket.

Spring Plunger

Nodding Adjustment
Block

Nodding Adapter
Bracket

Spring Plunger Tip

3. Continue to move the spring plunger down until the infeed entry is moved
up into the position shown in the figure below.
Spring Plunger

3 mm (0.12 in.) 7.80 mm

+/- 1 mm (0.04 in.) (0.31 in.)
Infeed Stud Nodding Adapter
Bracket

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-20 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

4. Check that there is still enough stroke left in the spring plunger to permit
the infeed to move down 2 mm (0.08 in.) at the entry end.

Multi-pockets
The multi-pocket module must be aligned horizontally with the CPM
transport to ensure that cheques pass between the two modules without
jamming.

1. Loosen the two screws securing the multi-pocket module to the carrier
plate.
2. Slide the module left or right until the inside walls of the guides are verti-
cally aligned with each other.

Bin Guide

Transport Guide

3. Tighten the two screws.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-21
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT

CONNECTOR BOARD
The diagram below names the connectors of the CPM Connector Board and
provides a diagram of the CPM drive belts of the bottom module.

J1-B
J1-A
J4 J3 J2

INFD MTR
INFD SEN
DBLE FD END MICR J5-B BKSTP SEN
J5-A BKSTP MTR

J6-B MTR’B’
J1 SLE SOL
J6-A MTR’A’

J7-G MTR SEN’B’

J7-F MTR SEN’A’
J7-E DSKW DRV SOL
J7-D DSKW IDLER SOL
J7-C NOT USED
J2 END
J7-B INFD SEN
J7-A DSKW MTR
J8-F CNR SWITCH
SLE ONLY J8-E ENTRY OPN GDE
J8-D PKT FIX GDE
J8-C ENTRY FIX GDE
J8-B END OPN GDE
J8-A END FIX GDE

BELT LAYOUT

P1
POWER
J9 PKTS

P2
MEI SHUTTER J11 J10

CONTROLLER CONTROLLER

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-22 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

ATM Interface
The CPM4 has three interfaces with the host ATM:
Communications
Power
MEI and shutter.

Communications Interface - The CPM4 interfaces to the ATM processor

via a USB compliant interface. The USB connector is mounted on the CPM4
Control Board.

Power Interface - Power is obtained from the host ATM via a 2-pin right
angled Molex mini-junior connector (NCR part number
009-00006461) on the connector board, with the following pinout:

+24 V Return 2 1 +24 V

MEI and Shutter Interface - The CPM4 module control board drives the
shutter and MEI mounted on the ATM facia. The harness plugs into an 8-pin
right-angled Molex mini-junior connector (NCR part number 009-0006464)
on the connector board, with the following pinout:

N/C 5 1 Shutter Lock Sense

+12 V 6 2 Shutter Ground
CPM-MEI A 7 3 Shutter Open Sense
CPM-MEI B 8 4 Shutter Solenoid On

CONTROLLER BOARD
The Controller Board carries two ribbon cable connections to the Connector
Board, the USB interface to the ATM processor and the connection to the
camera. Refer to the schematics in the “Internal Cables” section.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-23
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

PRINTHEAD BOARD
The Printhead Board is fitted to the CPM4 with the single-line endorser. The
following diagram identifies the connectors on the board.

SLE PTR

END J2

NOT USED J4

SLE MTR J3

SLE SOL J1

BIN ISLAND BOARD

The Bin Island Board is located beneath the bottom check acceptor bin. It
serves as a distribution point for the cables to the sensors, motor, and selector
solenoids in the bin module. The diagram below identifies the connectors on
the board. Refer also to Sheet 12 of the internal cables schematic in this
chapter.

NOT USED
FIX GD SEN J1-I
MOV GD SEN J1-H
ISLAND BOARD

MTR SEN J1-G

J1-F J2
BINS J1-E
J1-D
SEL 1 J1-C
SEL 2 J1-B
MTR J1-A

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-24 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

INTERNAL CABLES
The schematics in this section show the pin-to-pin connections of the internal
cables of the CPM4.

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 1 OF 11)

SHUTTER / MEI / POWER ADAPTER HARNESS
SURGE
LIMIT PWR
CPM PWR J3
+24 V I/L
1 1
+24 V I/L RTN
2 2

Surge Limiter Board

Connector Board

+24 V
3 3
+24 V RTN PWR
4 4
J1
5 N/C I/L SWITCH +24 V
6 N/C +24 V SW 1
CPM I/L SW COM 1 +24 RTN
+24 V 2
CPM I/L SW NO 2
J2
CPM I/L SW

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-25
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 2 OF 11)

INFEED SENSORS AND LEDS

Short Infeed
J7-B
SEN LED+
1 1 1 +
SEN COM C LED1
2 2 2 -
SEN 1E
3 3 3 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 1 LED2
4 4 4 -
SEN LED-
201 5 5 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 0 SEN1
202 6 6 -
SEN 2E
203 7 7 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 2 SEN2
204 8 8 -
Connector Board

INFEED Medium and Long Infeed

J7-B
SEN LED+
1 1 1 +
SEN COM C LED1
2 2 2 -
SEN 1E
3 3 3 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 1 LED2A
4 4 4 * -
SEN LED-
201 5 5 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 0 * SEN2B
202 6 6 -
SEN 2E
203 7 7 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 2 SEN1
204 8 8 -
INFEED +
SEN2A
-
* Pin 2 is connected to pin 4
on Long Infeed Transport and +
to pin 6 on Medium Infeed. SEN2B
-

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-26 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 3 OF11)

DOUBLE FEED DETECT

J4
210 205
209 204
208 203
207 202

DFD LEDs
206 201
10 5
9 4
8 3
Connector Board

7 N/C KEY 2
6 1

205 205
204 204
203 203
202 202

DFD Sensors
201 201
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 KEY KEY 2
1 1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-27
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 4 OF 11)

INFEED AND HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTORS

J1-A
24V White
1
Infeed
2 KEY
24V RTN Black Motor
201
202 N/C

J1-B
Orange
1
White
2 Infeed
Green Sensor
201
Connector Board

Blue
202
J6-A
24V Red
203
24V Black
202
24V Yellow Entry
201
24V Blue Step
3
24V White Motor
2
24V Orange
1

J7-F
24V Blue
202
24V Green Entry
201
24V White Motor
2 Sensor
24V Orange
1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-28 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 5 OF 11)

HORIZONTAL GUIDE SENSORS AND DE-SKEW

Moving Guide
+ LED4
J8-E -
LED+ + LED5
1 EXT -
LED-
201 1 1 + LED6
J7-D 2 2 -
+24V
1 3 3 SOL1
24V RTN (De-skew)
2 4 4

J8-C Fixed Guide

SEN6- -
203
+ SEN6
202
SEN5- -
Connector Board

+ SEN5
201
SEN4- -
3
SEN COM C + SEN4
2
1

J7-A
202 N/C
24V RTN Black
201
De-skew
2 KEY
24V White Motor
1
J7-E
24V RTN White De-skew
2
24V White Drive
1 Solenoid

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-29
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 6 OF 11)

MICR PREAMP BOARD

J2
GROUND
1 1
+15V
2 2
ADC CLOCK
3 3

MICR Preamp Board

Connector Board

POT_CS
4 4
GROUND
5 5
CONVERT START
201 201
202 KEY KEY 202
ADC_DATA
203 203
POT_DATA
204 204
GROUND
205 205

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-30 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 7 OF 11)

FRONT AND REAR CAMERAS

CAMERA CONN
J10 J1 VIDEO
1 1
2 N/C
. . GND
3 2
. 34-Way . +5V
4 3
. Ribbon . GREEN LED-
5 4

R_Camera
. Cable . GND
. . 6 5
7 SP 6
GND
8 7
J11 J2 CP
9 8
10 RED LED- 9
. .
Connector Board

LED+
Controller Board

11 10
. 34-Way .
12 N/C
. Ribbon .
. Cable .
. .
VIDEO
201 1
202 KEY
203 GND 2
+5V
204 3
GREEN LED-
205 4
F_Camera
GND
206 5
207 SP 6
GND
208 7
CP
209 8
120 RED LED- 9
211 LED+ 10
212 N/C

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-31
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 8 OF 11)

VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR AND SENSORS

J6-B
24V Orange
203
24V White
202
24V Blue Transport
201
Exit
Connector Board

3 24V Yellow
Step
2 24V Black Motor
24V Red
1
J7-G
24V Blue
202
24V Green Transport
201
24V White Motor
2
Orange Sensor
1 24V

J8-A
SEN8E -
203
+ SEN8
202
SEN9E -
201
+ SEN9
3
2 SEN7E -
KEY
SEN COM C + SEN7
1
-
J8-B
LED- + LED8
201
LED+ -
1
+ LED7
J8-D
-
202 + LED9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-32 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 9 OF 11)

SL ENDORSER

J3-END J2 SLE PTR

. . . .
. . . .

Printhead
34-Way Ribbon
. Ribbon . . Cable .
. Cable . . .
. . . .

CPM Endorser Board

Connector Board

RMTR-J3
201 N/C

SLE Motor
24V RTN Black
202
24V White
1
2 KEY

SLE-SOL J1
28V RTN White
202

SLE Solenoid
201 N/C
2 KEY
28V White
1

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-33
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 10 OF 11)

ML ENDORSER

J3-END J2 MLE PTR

. . . .
. . . .

Printhead
34-Way Ribbon
. Ribbon . . Cable .
. Cable . . .
. . . .
CPM Endorser Board
Connector Board

J1
201 N/C

MLE Shutter
24V RTN Black
202

Motor
24V White
1
2 KEY
J3
201 N/C
MLE Motor
Dual Shaft
24V RTN Black
202
24V White
1
2 KEY
J4
201 N/C
MLE Motor

24V RTN Black

202
24V White
1
2 KEY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-34 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CPM4 INTERNAL CABLES (SHEET 11 OF 11)

BIN MODULE HARNESS

J8-D J2 J1-A
Orange
203 213 203
White
202 See Sheet 8 202
Blue Bin
201 201
Yellow Step
3 13 3 Motor
2 12 2 Black
Red
1 1
J9-POCKETS J2 J1-G
Blue
211 202
Green Bin
210 210 201
White Motor
209 209 2
Orange Sensor
208 208 1
207 207 J1-B/C
Connector Board

Bin Island Board

206 206 +28V White Bin

2
+28V RTN Black Selector
205 205 1 Solenoid
204 204 J1-D/E/F
203 N/C -
202 Bin Full
202 203 +
201 Sensor
201 201 -
2 Bin Full
10 10 + LED
1
9 9
J1-I Bin Fixed Guide
8 8
-
7 7 202
+ SEN10
6 11 201
-
6 2
+ SEN11
5 5 1
4 4 J1-H Bin Movable Guide
-
3 KEY 201
+ LED10
2 3 1
-
1 1
+ LED11

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-35
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains error messages and their corrective actions.

MODULE ERROR STATES

The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the
sections “Module Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions
on FRU actions.

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Control Electronics Fault Inspect_Now/Repair Check for damage on control
boards and repair.
Otherwise, replace control
electronics.
Too Many Comm Failures Inspect_Now/Repair Remove any documents
present.
Inspect power connectors
and data cables.
It may be necessary to reset
the ATM to recover this type
of error.
Too Many Entry Failures Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect the shutter mecha-
nism.
Remove any documents
present.
Inspect electrical connec-
tors and cables.
Otherwise, replace shutter.
Shutter Jammed Open Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect the shutter mecha-
nism.
Remove any documents
present.
Inspect electrical connec-
tors and cables.
Otherwise, replace shutter.
Shutter Jammed Shut Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect the shutter mecha-
nism.
Remove any documents
present.
Inspect electrical connec-
tors and cables.
Otherwise, replace shutter.
In-feed Fault Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect the infeed and repair
loose electrical connections.
Otherwise, replace infeed.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-36 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Top Guide Fault Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect the top-guide/de-
skew mechanism and repair
loose electrical connections.
Release mechanical jams.
Otherwise, replace top-
guide.
Endorser Ribbon Low Replace_Soon/ Replace endorser ribbon.
Replace
Endorser Ribbon Empty Replace_Now/ Replace endorser ribbon.
Replace
Endorser Fault Inspect_Now/Repair Refer to byte 1 of M_DATA
for endorser diagnostic error
code then refer to the error
code reference section.
Out-feed Fault Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect the outfeed and
repair loose electrical con-
nections.
Otherwise, replace outfeed.
Transport Jam At In-feed Inspect_Now/Repair Remove foreign object,
debris or jammed cheque.
Transport Jam At De-skew Inspect_Now/Repair Remove foreign object,
debris or jammed cheque.
Transport Jam At MICR Inspect_Now/Repair Remove foreign object,
debris or jammed cheque.
Transport Jam At Camera Inspect_Now/Repair Remove foreign object,
debris or jammed cheque.
Transport Jam At Endorser Inspect_Now/Repair Remove foreign object,
debris or jammed cheque.
Transport Jam At Out-feed Inspect_Now/Repair Remove foreign object,
debris or jammed cheque.
Transport Jam Inspect_Now/Repair Remove foreign object,
debris or jammed cheque.
Capture Bin 1 Full Soon Full_Soon/Empty Empty bin 1.
Capture Bin 1 Full Full/Empty Empty bin 1.
Capture Bin 2 Full Soon Full_Soon/Empty Empty bin 2.
Capture Bin 2 Full Full/Empty Empty bin 2.
Capture Bin 3 Full Soon Full_Soon/Empty Empty bin 3.
Capture Bin 3 Full Full/Empty Empty bin 3.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-37
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Interlock Open Inspect_Now/Repair Push CPM fully back into
ATM.
Inspect switch or harness for
damage.
Inspect power supply for
damage.
Check for damage on control
boards and repair.
Otherwise, replace control
electronics.
Load file validation failure Inspect_Soon/Repair Download a valid EEPROM
image.
Eliminate ESD or electrical
noise.
Inspect USB cable for dam-
age.
Load file download failure Inspect_Soon/Repair Download EEPROM image
again.
Eliminate ESD or electrical
noise.
Inspect USB cable for dam-
age.
Check for damage on control
boards and repair.
Otherwise, replace control
electronics.
Fatal Comms Failure Inspect_Now/Repair Try communications
response again.
Eliminate ESD or electrical
noise.
Inspect USB cable for dam-
age.
Check for damage on control
boards and repair.
Otherwise, replace control
electronics.
Too Many USB Reset Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect USB cable for dam-
age.
Check for damage on control
boards and repair.
Otherwise, replace control
electronics.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-38 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error Message SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Sensor Failure Inspect_Now/Repair Inspect sensors and remove
debris or clean dust build up
with a dry, lint-free cloth.
Inspect sensors and LEDs
for damage. If damaged,
replace FRU
Inspect sensor harness for
damage.
Check for damage on control
boards and repair.
Otherwise, replace control
electronics.

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS
Two sets of level 0 diagnostic tests are performed during CPM startup:
Kernel diagnostics held with the core firmware in protected EEPROM -
phase 1 of startup
Module integrity diagnostics held with the main module controlware in
writeable EEPROM - phase 2 of startup.
The result of each phase of tests is indicated on four green LEDs located
on the CPM Main Controller Board visible through the opening in the white
plastic cover as shown in the following illustration:

D1 R14
Diagnostic LEDs D2 D5
(Green)
D3 D6
Edge of Board D4 R15
R1 R16

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-39
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

PHASE 1 TEST RESULTS

The table below shows the status LED patterns that display to show the
outcome of the first phase of the startup process:

LED Pattern Fault

D1 D2 D3 D4
ON ON ON ON Fatal failure.
OFF OFF OFF ON CPU internal RAM test.
OFF OFF ON OFF CPU XRAM test.
OFF OFF ON ON CPU code execution RAM test.
OFF ON OFF OFF Core EEPROM checksum test.
OFF ON OFF ON Main controlware EEPROM checksum test.
OFF ON ON OFF FPGA EEPROM checksum test.
OFF ON ON ON FPGA configuration.
ON OFF OFF OFF Endorser controlware FLASH checksum test.
ON OFF OFF ON Endorser font FLASH checksum test.
ON OFF ON ON Stacking bin checksum test.
ON OFF ON OFF Waiting for USB connection.
OFF OFF OFF OFF Successful startup - all OK.

NOTE: LEDs that are ON show a steady light in the above patterns.

PHASE 2 TEST RESULTS

The table below shows the LED patterns that can result from second phase
startup:

LED Pattern Fault

D1 D2 D3 D4
OFF OFF OFF OFF All OK.
OFF OFF OFF ON No interlocked +24V.
OFF OFF ON OFF Track sensor fault detected.
OFF OFF ON ON Item present in the track.
OFF ON OFF OFF Shutter fault detected.
OFF ON OFF ON Infeed fault detected.
OFF ON ON OFF Reserved.
OFF ON ON ON Transport entry step motor failure.
ON OFF OFF OFF Transport exit step motor failure.
ON OFF OFF ON MICR fault detected.
ON OFF ON OFF Imaging system fault detected.
ON OFF ON ON Endorsement printer fault detected.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-40 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

NOTE: LEDS that are ON show a flashing light in the above patterns.

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS
Tests on the Cheque Processing Module (CPM) are:
1. Enable
2. Eject
3. Endorse
4. Capture Bin 1
5. Capture Bin 2
6. Capture Bin 3
7. Clear
8. Display Front Image
9. Display Rear Image
10. Sensors *
11. Shutter *
12. De-skew Cycle *
13. Endorse Cycle *
14. Capture Bin Solenoid *
15. Transport Motor *
17. Run To Run *

NOTE: 1. Looping is available on the tests marked *.

NOTE: 2. M-DATA and M_STATUS codes returned by the level 1 diagnos-

tic tests are listed in this chapter.

ENABLE
The ENABLE test enables the CPM to accept a document.
You are prompted to insert a document and, if this is not done within 15
seconds, the CPM is disabled, a message saying, No Document Entered is dis-
played, and a Not Complete status is returned. A document inserted within the
time is scanned and staged in the CPM and a Complete status is returned.
If there is a document present in the transport when the CPM is enabled, it
is rescanned and a Complete status is returned.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-41
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

EJECT
The EJECT test moves the current document to the front transport and
displays a prompt asking for the document to be removed. If the document is
not taken within 15 seconds, the prompt is removed and the document is
retracted back into the CPM, Document Not Taken is displayed and a Not
Complete status is returned. If the document is taken, the prompt is removed,
Document Taken is displayed and a Complete status is returned.
If there is no document in the transport when the Eject is selected, No
Document Present is displayed and a Not Complete status is returned.

ENDORSE
The PRINT test prints the test string:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
on the rear of the current document and returns a Complete status.
If there is no document present in the transport, No Document Present is
displayed and a Not Complete status is returned.

CAPTURE BIN 1
The CAPTURE BIN 1 test moves the document into Bin 1 and returns a
Complete status.
If there is no document present in the transport, No Document Present is
displayed and a Not Complete status is returned.
If the document jams during capture, Unable To Capture is displayed and
a Not Complete status is returned.

CAPTURE BIN 2
As Bin 1 for Bin 2.

CAPTURE BIN 3
As Bin 1 for Bin 3.

CLEAR
The CLEAR test runs the transport to make sure that it is clear of documents.
After the transport has been run, if all sensors are clear, a Device Clear
message is displayed and a Complete status is returned.
If a sensor is blocked a Device Jammed message is displayed and a Not
Complete status is returned.

DISPLAY FRONT IMAGE

The DISPLAY FRONT IMAGE test opens a window displaying the front
image of the most recent document entered. A key press terminates the test. If
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-42 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

no front image has been lifted, a No Image To Display message is displayed.

DISPLAY REAR IMAGE

As Front Image test for rear image.

SENSORS
The SENSOR test displays the current sensor status of the shutter, track and
bin sensors in M_DATA format.

SHUTTER
The SHUTTER test flashes the media entry indicator on and off twice and the
shutter is opened and closed once.

DE-SKEW CYCLE
The DE-SKEW CYCLE test activates the DC motor then, after one second,
both solenoids. After one more second, the motor and both solenoids are
deactivated.

NOTE: This test allows service personnel to observe the operating mecha-
nism. It does not diagnose problems or report errors.

ENDORSER CYCLE
The ENDORSE CYCLE test varies depending on whether there is a single-
line or multi-line endorser installed.
For single-line endorser, the ribbon motor will run continuously during
the three second test cycle. After the first second, the platen solenoid is acti-
vated for one second and is then deactivated.
For multi-line endorser, the shutter is opened, the head moved into the
track and moved up and down the cam, stopping when it is back in its home
position. The printhead is then retracted and the shutter closed.

NOTE: This test allows service personnel to observe mechanism cycling. It

does not diagnose problems or report errors.

CAPTURE BIN SOLENOID

The CAPTURE BIN SOLENOID test sequentially activates and deactivates
each of the solenoids associated with the capture bin.

NOTE: This test provides a visual aid only. It does not diagnose problems
or report errors.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-43
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

TRANSPORT MOTOR
The TRANSPORT MOTOR test activates the cycle of the transport motors.
The motors run in one direction for two seconds, stop for one second and run
in the opposite direction for two seconds. The motors that are activated are:
Infeed
Entry step
Exit step
Bin step.
The capture bin solenoids are activated and deactivated as part of this
cycle. When the cycle is completed, all motors and solenoids are deactivated.

NOTE: This test provides a visual aid only. It does not diagnose problems
or report errors.

RUN TO RUN
The RUN TO RUN test executes the following sequence of tests:
ENABLE
EJECT.
If the test item is not removed within five seconds after being rejected, the
following commands are executed:
RETRACT
ENDORSE
CAPTURE BIN 2.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS

S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the CPM are:

S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error, continue to use)
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault, continue to use and log error information)
02 WARNING (May require attention, continue to use and log error infor-
mation)
03 SUSPEND (Do not use device for application-defined time period)
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-44 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

TALLIES
The tallies are incremented by one (1) when the appropriate condition occurs
during diagnostic and normal use. The CPM tallies are as follows:

Tally Description
NUM_DOCS Number of documents entered.
TRAN_JAM Number of transport jams.
FRNT_IMG Number of front image document requests.
REAR_IMG Number of rear image document requests.
ENDORSED Number of document endorses.
TAKEN Number of documents ejected and taken.
BIN1 Number of documents captured to bin 1.
BIN2 Number of documents captured to bin 2.
BIN3 Number of documents captured to bin 3.
SHUT_OPS Number of shutter operations.
EN_CHARS Number of endorser characters printed.
TRANSACT Number of completed transactions.
DFDFAIL Number of double feed detect failures.
DSKWFAIL Number of de-skew failures.
MICRFAIL Number of MICR failures.
TJ_INFD Number of jams at infeed.
TJ_DSKEW Number of jams at deskew.
TJ_CAM Number of jams at camera.
TJ_ENDRS Number of jams at endorser.
TJ_OUTFD Number of jams at outfeed.
TJ_MICR Number of document jams at MICR.
FATALJAM Number of fatal jams.
COMMSERR Number of comms errors.
USBRESET Number of USB resets.
COMSTOUT Number of comms timeouts.
SHUTJAMO Number of shutter open jams.
SHUTJAMC Number of shutter closed jams.
MICRREAD Number of code lines read.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-45
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

ERROR CODES

M_STATUS

M_STATUS Meaning
00 GOOD - No errors
01 JAM_ERROR - A jam occurred while moving a document
02 NO_DOC_PRESENT - Command not completed because no document
was in transport
04 COMMAND_IN_PROGRESS - Command not completed because
previous command was still in progress
05 DEVICE_ERROR - Command not completed because
of a control failure. (See error code returned in M_DATA (1))
06 ALREADY_FATAL - Command not completed because device severity is
already Fatal
07 ENTRY_FAILURES_EXCEEDED - Jam or timeout on document entry
has exceeded threshold
08 SHUTTER_JAM - Shutter jammed closed
09 INVALID_DOC - Invalid document entered
10 WRONG_POCKET - Document placed in wrong pocket. This occurs if
bin divert gates fail
12 OVERFILL - A bin was overfilled
13 JAM_WITH_ACCESS - Shutter still open so user has access to docu-
ment
14 TOO_MANY_WITH_ACCESS - Jam with access count exceeded
threshold
15 JAM_IN_OUTFEED - Document jammed in outfeed, possibly not cover-
ing any sensors
16 TOO_MANY_COMMS_ERROR - A serious communications failure has
occurred
17 PRINTER_FATAL - Printer has become fatal due to life count
19 JAM_AT_ENTRY - A jam occurred at Entry (CPM-2&3 only)
20 JAM_AT_DESKEW - A jam occurred at the De-skew
21 JAM_AT_CAMERA - A jam occurred at the Camera
22 JAM_AT_ENDORSER - A jam occurred at the Endorser
24 JAM_AT_MICR - A jam occurred at the MICR
30 INTERLOCK_OPEN - The interlock is open
31 BIN1_FULL - Capture bin 1 is full
32 BIN2_FULL - Capture bin 2 is full
33 BIN3_FULL - Capture bin 3 is full
35 SHUTTER _JAMMED_OPEN - Shutter is jammed open
36 SHUTTER_JAMMED_CLOSED - Shutter is jammed closed

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-46 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

M_STATUS Meaning
40 DRIVER_ERROR - A driver error occurred
41 USB_RESET - A USB Reset occurred
42 TOO_MANY_USB_RESETS - There have been too many consecutive
USB Resets
43 COMMS_ERROR - A Comms Error occurred
44 COMMS_TIMEOUT - Timed out waiting for Comms Response
45 SENSOR_FAILURE - Sensors have failed
46 PRINTER_FAULTY -Printer module inoperative
49 INITIALIZATION_FAULT - The CPM device has detected a fault that pre-
vents it from being initialized for use. (See error code returned in
M_DATA (1))
50 LONG_DOCUMENT - Item is too long to put in capture bin
51 THICK_DOCUMENT - Thick or multiple items entered (possible double
feed)
52 NARROW_DOCUMENT - Item is too narrow to move through transport

M_DATA Byte 0
The Byte 0 data indicates the command state when the response is generated.
Byte 0 - Internal command being executed:
00 - Reset - resetting device
01 - Enable - enabling device
02 - Disable - disabling device
03 - Eject - ejecting document
04 - Capture - capturing document
05 - Endorse - endorsing document
06 - Clear - clearing device
07 - Config - querying device configuration
08 - Sensors - querying device sensors
09 - Retract - retracting document
10 - Status - querying device status

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-47
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

11 - Exercise - testing solenoids and motors

12 - Eject Timeout Period - event generated after Eject Timeout
Period expired.

M_DATA

M_DATA Byte Description

0 Response origin - See M_DATA Byte 0
1 Error code reported from the device. (See Error Code Reference)
2 Track Sensor #1 (1 = blocked)
3 Track Sensor #2 (1 = blocked)
4 Track Sensor #3 (1 = blocked)
5 Track Sensor #4 (1 = blocked)
6 Track Sensor #5 (1 = blocked)
7 Track Sensor #6 (1 = blocked)
8 Track Sensor #7 (1 = blocked)
9 Track Sensor #8 (1 = blocked)
10 Track Sensor #9 (1 = blocked)
11 Track Sensor #10 (1 = blocked)
12 Track Sensor #11 (1 = blocked)
13 Bin #1 Full Sensor (1 = full)
14 Bin #2 Full Sensor (1 = full)
15 Bin #3 Full Sensor (1 = full)
16 Reserved (0)
17 Interlock switch #1 (1 = interlock open)

ERROR CODE REFERENCE

The second byte of M_DATA may contain a value that indicates the location
of a hardware failure. The following tables list the possible values and their
meanings.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-48 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Routine Error Statuses

The following CPM4 error statuses apply to the application program and do
not indicate any hardware fault condition.

Error
Code Error Name Description
(Hex)
00 Operation_Successful No problem to report/ Successful command com-
pletion.
01 Operation_Pending The Transport Activation command has been
accepted.
02 Operation_Timeout No application timeout when customer failed to
enter a cheque.
03 Invalid_Device Attempting to arm an optional device that is not
installed.
04 Bad_Cmnd_Sequence Busy processing a Transport Activation com-
mand.
05 Invalid_Command Invalid command ID value.
06 Invalid_Diagnose No test defined for the valid DIAG_ID value
received.
07 Invalid_Data Unexpected data value or type received.
08 Invalid_Data_Length Received more or less data than expected.
09 Data_Buffer_Overflow Too much data received.
0F No_Item_Present There is no cheque in the CPM transport.
10 Item_Removed Customer retrieved cheque before it could be
retracted.
12 Bin_Nearly_Full Reported when up to 5 more cheques can be
deposited in bin.
15 Module_Not_Initialized The module has not completed a successful diag-
nose(0).
30 General_Module_Fault Indicates that the data field contains multiple error
codes (diag-0).
86 Invalid_Endorse_Cmnd Invalid command received by endorser.
87 Invalid_Endorse_Data Invalid command data received by endorser.
88 Invalid_Endorse_Length Invalid command length received by endorser.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-49
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Runtime Error Statuses

The following CPM4 error statuses occur during cheque processing and are
only considered to be an indication of a hardware fault when they become
chronic. In other words, when they occur at an unusually high rate or become
persistent and cannot be cleared.

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
0A Shutter_Jam Unable to Tampering Shutter assembly
open or Faulty shutter (motor, sensor, Control electronics
close the or circuit board)
shutter. Faulty harness
Faulty control electronics
0B Item_Too_ Document is Improperly calibrated sensors Module CPM
Short less than Faulty harness Control electronics
150mm Faulty control electronics
long.
0C Item_Too_ Document is Faulty infeed (drive belt, roller Infeed
Long more than or motor) Module CPM
225mm Faulty harness
long.
0D Double_Feed More than 1 Bad DFD sensor calibration Module CPM
document Faulty DFD hardware Control electronics
has entered Faulty harness
the CPM. Faulty control electronics
0E Item_Jammed Cheque Object or paper caught in Infeed
stopped transport Top guide
moving and Excessive dust build up over a Outfeed
failed to track sensor Endorser
arrive at the Improperly calibrated sensors Module CPM
staging Improperly closed movable Control electronics
area. cheque guides
Faulty transport components
(belts, driver roller, motor, sen-
sor)
Improperly aligned or broken
guide interfaces
Improperly adjusted de-skew
mechanism
Improperly adjusted MLE
Bent or dislodged endorser
shield
Faulty harness
Faulty control electronics

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-50 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
11 Item_Deskew Unable to Object (paper clip, staple or Module CPM
_Failure push cheque tape) or paper caught in trans- Top Guide
against track port Control electronics
bottom refer- Excessive dust build up over a
ence. track sensor
Improperly calibrated sensors
Improperly latched top guide
Improperly adjusted de-skew
mechanism
Faulty de-skew component
(belt, motor, solenoid, sensor,
drive roller)
Faulty harness
Faulty control electronics
13 Bin_Full More than 5 Excessive dust build up or Multi-pocket bins
documents debris around bin full sensor Control electronics
placed in bin Improperly calibrated sensor
since sen- Stuck bin full flag
sor first Bent sensor bracket
blocked. Sensor harness fault
Faulty control electronics
14 Unexpected A track sen- Excessive dust build up or Infeed
_Item sor became debris blocking a track sensor Top guide
blocked Sensor harness fault Outfeed
unexpect- Faulty control electronics Module CPM
edly. Control electronics
16 Item_Too_ The cheque Excessive dust build or debris Top guide
Narrow is less than blocking a track sensor Module CPM
62.5mm in Improperly calibrated sensors Control electronics
height. Sensor harness fault
Faulty control electronics
17 USB_Disconn A USB dis- USD disconnect due to ESD, Control electronics
ect connect and electrical noise or faulty USB
automatic cable.
re-enumera- Faulty control electronics.
tion
occurred.
18 Infeed_Jam Cheque
seen by
entry sen-
sor but failed
to arrive at
DFD sensor.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-51
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
19 Infeed_Jam_ Infeed motor
Stall stalled
before
cheque
arrived at
DFD sen-
sors.
1A Infeed_Jam_ Entry step
Entry motor stalled
before
cheque
arrived at
DFD sen-
sors.
1B Infeed_Jam_ Exit step
Exit motor stalled
before
cheque
arrived at
DFD sen-
sors.

Diagnostic Error Statuses

The following error statuses are those reported by diagnostics executed
following a power up to trigger the bootloading of the main CPM controlware.
They indicate hard faults that will make the module unavailable for item
processing. The problem identified must be resolved before the module can
complete a clean startup.

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
20 No_ Main con- USB disconnect during down- Control electronics
Controlware troller load due to ESD, electrical
firmware noise, or faulty USB cable.
download Faulty control electronics
required.
21 No_FPGA_ FPGA con- USB disconnect during down- Control electronics
Config figuration file load due to ESD, electrical
download noise, or faulty USB cable.
required. Faulty control electronics

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-52 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
22 No- Endorser USB disconnect during down- Control electronics
Endorser_FW FW down- load due to ESD, electrical
load noise, or faulty USB cable.
required. Faulty control electronics
23 No_Endorser_ Endorser USB disconnect during down- Control electronics
Bitmap font down- load due to ESD, electrical
load noise, or faulty USB cable.
required. Faulty control electronics
24 Invalid_File_ Bad format Corrupted download file
Type for a down- USB disconnect during down-
load file. The load due to ESD, electrical
first byte is noise, or faulty USB cable.
not 0X88.
25 Invalid_ The storage Corrupted download file
Storage_ID ID is not an USB disconnect during down-
“E” or an “F”. load due to ESD, electrical
noise, or faulty USB cable.
26 Incorrect_File Download Corrupted download file
_Size data will not USB disconnect during down-
fit in allo- load due to ESD, electrical
cated stor- noise, or faulty USB cable.
age space.
27 Bad_File_ Bad check- Corrupted download file
Checksum sum for the USB disconnect during down-
binary part load due to ESD, electrical
of the down- noise, or faulty USB cable.
load.
28 Invalid_ The address Corrupted download file
storage_ in the file USB disconnect during down-
Addr header is load due to ESD, electrical
not a valid noise, or faulty USB cable.
address.
29 NV_Memory_ Unable to Faulty control electronics Control electronics
Failure write/read-
back to
FLASH or
EEPROM
memory.
31 No_Interlock_ Unable to Faulty interlock hardware Control electronics
24V activate (switch or harness)
RON signal. Faulty power supply
Faulty control electronics

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-53
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
32 Track_Sensor Unable to Excessive dust build up or Infeed
_ calibrate one debris blocking track sensor Top guide
Fault or more Sensor harness fault Outfeed
track sen- Faulty sensor or LED Module CPM
sors. Faulty control electronics Control electronics
33 Item_Present A cheque Excessive dust build up or Infeed
has been debris blocking track sensor Top guide
detected in Sensor harness fault Outfeed
the trans- Faulty sensor or LED Module CPM
port. Faulty control electronics Control electronics
34 Shutter_Fault Faulty Tampering Shutter harness
motor/sole- Faulty shutter (motor, sensor, Control electronics
noid or feed- or circuit board)
back sensor. faulty harness
Power supply problem
Faulty control electronics.
35 Infeed_Drive_ Faulty motor Movable infeed guide not Infeed
Fault or feedback latched properly Infeed Module CPM
sensor. (mechanical fault or severe Control electronics
item jam)
Sensor broken or blocked by
debris
Faulty harness
Defective motor
Faulty control electronics
36 Deskew_fault Faulty Object (paper clip, staple or Module CPM
motor/sole- tape) or paper jammed in Top guide
noid or feed- transport Control electronics
back sensor. Top guide not latched prop-
erly.
Improperly adjusted de-skew
mechanism
Faulty harness
Faulty de-skew component
(belt, motor, solenoid, sensor,
drive roller)
Faulty control electronics

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-54 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
37 Entry_Stepper Faulty trans- Object (paper clip, staple or Module CPM
_Fault port entry tape) or paper jammed in Control electronics
step motor transport
or feedback Motor feedback sensor broken
sensor. or blocked by debris
Faulty harness
Faulty step motor
Faulty bearing
Faulty control electronics
38 Exit_Stepper_ Faulty trans- Object (paper clip, staple or Module CPM
Fault port exit step tape) or paper jammed in Control electronics
motor or transport
feedback Motor feedback sensor broken
sensor. or blocked by debris
Faulty harness
Faulty step motor
Faulty bearing
Faulty control electronics
39 MICR_ Unable to Excessive electrical noise Module CPM
System_Fault detect sig- Faulty MICR pre-amp board Control electronics
nal gain Faulty harness
changes. Faulty control electronics
3A Image_ Unable to Faulty camera Module CPM
System_Fault communi- Faulty or disconnected har- Control electronics
cate with ness
camera con- Faulty control electronics
troller
(FPGA).
3B Endorser_ Faulty Faulty endorser mechanism or Endorser
Fault endorse- electronics Control electronics
ment printer Faulty harness
mechanism. Excessive electrical noise
Faulty control electronics
3E Image_Data_ The host Application fault Control electronics
Stall stopped USB disconnect during down-
reading load due to ESD, electrical
image data. noise or faulty USB cable
Faulty control electronics
3F MICR_Data_ The host Application fault Control electronics
Stall stopped USB disconnect during down-
reading load due to ESD, electrical
MICR data. noise or faulty USB cable
Faulty control electronics
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-55
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
40 No_Data_ Requested New control electronics requir- Control electronics
Available setup data ing EEPROM setup.
not availa- Faulty control electronics
ble (query
diag fault).
41 Infeed_Config Configura- New control electronics with Infeed
_ tion bit disa- incorrect configuration byte. Module CPM
Fault grees with Faulty harness Control electronics
detected Faulty control electronics
infeed type.
42 DFD_Sensor_ One or more Improperly calibrated double Module CPM
Fault of the dou- feed detector sensors Control electronics
ble feed Faulty DFD hardware
detect sen- Faulty harness
sors is not Faulty control electronics
working.
43 Bin_Full_ One or more Excessive dust build up or Multi-pocket bins
Sensor_Fault of the bin full debris around bin full sensor Control electronics
sensors is Improperly calibrated double
not working. feed detector sensors
Stuck bin full flag
Bent sensor bracket
Sensor harness fault
Faulty control electronics
44 Bin_Stepper_ Faulty bin Object (paper clip, staple or Multi-pocket bins
Fault module step tape) or paper jammed in Control electronics
motor or transport
feedback Motor feedback sensor broken
sensor. or blocked by debris
Faulty harness
Faulty step motor
Faulty bearing
Faulty control electronics
80 Endorser_ Endorser Faulty endorser mechanism or Endorser
COMM_Fault communica- electronics Control electronics
tions failure. Faulty harness
Excessive electrical noise
Faulty control electronics

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-56 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
81 Platen_ Single-line Faulty endorser mechanism or Endorser
Solenoid_ endorser electronics Module CPM
Fault solenoid fail- Faulty solenoid/platen assem- Control electronics
ure. bly
Faulty harness
Faulty control electronics
82 Ribbon_Motor Single-line Faulty ribbon cartridge Endorser
_Fault endorser rib- Faulty endorser ribbon motor Control electronics
bon motor Faulty harness
fault. Faulty control electronics
Multi-line
endorser rib-
bon and
printhead
carriage
motor fault.
83 Engage_ Multi-line Faulty endorser mechanism or Endorser
Motor_Fault printhead electronics Control electronics
engage- Faulty harness
ment DC Faulty control electronics
motor prob-
lem.
84 Comb_Motor_ Multi-line Endorser comb (shutter) Endorser
Fault cheque obstructed by debris Module CPM
guide comb Faulty endorser comb mecha- Control electronics
DC motor nism
problem. Faulty harness
Faulty control electronics
85 Endorser_ Configura- New control electronics with Endorser
Config_Fault tion bit disa- incorrect configuration byte Control electronics
grees with Faulty harness
detected Faulty control electronics
endorser
type.
86 Invalid_ Invalid com-
Endorser_ mand
cmnd received by
endorser.
87 Invalid_ Bad com-
Endorse_Data mand data
received by
endorser.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-57
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Error
Code Error Name Description Possible Cause Possible FRU
(Hex)
88 Invalid_ Invalid com-
Endorse_ mand length
Length received by
endorser.

MODULE REPLACEMENT
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of Field
Replaceable Units of the CPM4.
The replacement procedures are
CPM Transport
Multi-Pockets
Multi-Pockets Deflector Wire
Infeed
Top Guide
Control Electronics
Single-Line Endorser
Multi-Line Endorser
Rails (slides).

NOTE: For more information on the connections to the electronics boards,

see the section “CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT” on page 22.

CPM TRANSPORT
Remove the CPM transport as follows:
1. Disconnect the Shutter and USB cables from the CPM electronics boards,
and unscrew the screws securing the harness bracket to the CPM.

NOTE: Front access ATMs will have two screws securing the harness

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-58 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

bracket to the ATM; rear access ATMs will have four screws.

Cables
Screws

2. Disconnect the lower connector from the bin island board and the connec-
tors from interlock switch.

Connectors

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-59
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

3. Disconnect the connector from underneath the transport and remove the
cable ties.

Cable Ties Connector

4. Unscrew the three screws securing the CPM transport to the carrier plate.
Lugs

Screws

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-60 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

5. Unscrew the two screws securing the multi-pocket module to the carrier
plate.
Screw

Screw

6. Slide the multi-pocket module to the right, using the yellow handles.
7. Slide the transport to the left, using the yellow handles, until the keyhole
slots can be lifted over the lugs.
8. Tilt the transport towards you and support it against your body.
9. Lift the transport away from the ATM.

Replacement - Replacement of the CPM transport is the reverse of the

above procedure. The following should be noted:
1. Take care not to trap any cables when placing the transport back on its
supporting lugs.
2. Transfer the nodding adapter bracket (for the long infeed) from the old
CPM transport to the replacement (see the following illustration).
3. Ensure the multi-pocket module is aligned correctly (see “Adjustments”
in this chapter).
4. Carry out a transport sensors calibration procedure (see “Adjustments” in
this chapter).

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-61
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

NOTE: The following illustration shows the nodding adapter bracket for
the long infeed.

Nodding Adapter
Bracket

Retaining Screws

MULTI-POCKETS
Remove the multi-pocket module as follows:
1. Disconnect the lower connector from the bin island board.

Connector

2. Unscrew the two screws securing the multi-pocket module to the carrier

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-62 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

plate.
Screw Lug

Screw

Lug

3. Unscrew the three screws securing the CPM transport to the carrier plate.

Screws

4. Slide the transport to the left, using the yellow handles.

5. Slide the multi-pocket module to the right and up, using the yellow han-
dles, until the keyhole slots can pass over the heads of the lugs and lift the
module away from the ATM.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-63
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

Replacement - Replacement of the multi-pocket module is the reverse of

the above procedure. The following should be noted:
1. Ensure the multi-pocket module is aligned correctly (see “Adjustments”
in this chapter).

MULTI-POCKETS DEFLECTOR WIRE

Remove the multi-pocket deflector wire as follows:
1. Lift the spring metal retainer and lift the pocket wire shaft out from its
location.

2. Feed the deflector wire and pocket wire shaft into the pocket below and

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-64 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

remove from the CPM.

3. Remove the pocket wire shaft from the pocket wire and retain the shaft.

Replacement - Replacement of the pocket wire is the reverse of the above

procedure. Take care not to dislodge the white plastic plates.

INFEED
Remove the short, medium, or long infeed transports as follows:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-65
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

1. Disconnect the ground wire.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-66 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

2. Remove and retain the screw and spacer at both sides of the infeed.

3. Disconnect the infeed harness.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-67
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

4. Lift the infeed away from the CPM.

Replacement - Replacement of the infeed unit is the reverse of the above

procedure with the addition that the track sensors will have to be calibrated
and the pin plungers on either side of the medium and long infeeds may have
to be adjusted to achieve the correct nodding function with the new unit. See
“ADJUSTMENTS” on page 13.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-68 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

TOP GUIDE
Remove the top guide as follows:
1. Push the latch to open the top guide. Disconnect the connector and
unhook the spring from its shaft.
Connector

Spring

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-69
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

2. Remove the two screws securing the top guide to the pivot shafts.

Screws

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-70 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

3. Remove the two screws securing the top guide to the top pivot shaft and
DFD guide.
Screws

4. Slide the top guide off the pivot shafts and lift it away from the CPM.

Replacement - Replacement of the top guide is the reverse of the above pro-
cedure. You will need to carry out the track sensor calibration. See “ADJUST-
MENTS” on page 13.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-71
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

CONTROL ELECTRONICS
Remove the control electronics as follows:
1. Unscrew the two screws securing the PCB assembly to one side of the
module and the two screws securing the harness bracket to the CPM.

2. Disconnect the endorser, DFD and MICR connectors from the connector
board.

Connectors

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-72 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

3. From the other side of the module, disconnect the camera connector from
underneath the controller board.

Camera Connector
4. Unscrew the two screws securing the PCB assembly to this side of the
module.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-73
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

5. Disconnect the harness connector panel from the connector board, and lift
out the assembly as shown.

NOTE: The connectors shown in the photograph are on a panel that, when
lifted, disconnects all harness connectors at the same time.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-74 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

6. Unscrew the four screws securing the two PCB plastic covers and remove
the covers from the PCB assembly.

7. Remove the two controller board harnesses from the PCB assembly.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-75
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

8. Remove the connector and controller boards from the PCB bracket (8 M3
screws).

Replacement - Replacement of the electronics boards is the reverse of the

above procedure. Reconnect all harnesses to the locations shown in the dia-
gram in the “Connector Assignment” section of this chapter.
After replacing the electronics boards a full calibration procedure must be
performed on the CPM using the MICR, Camera, and DFD Sensors, calibra-
tion documents supplied with the new boards. Track sensors should also be
calibrated. Refer to the “CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION” on
page 13 in this chapter.

SINGLE-LINE ENDORSER
Remove the single-line endorser as follows:
1. Disconnect all harness connectors from the endorser board.
Harness Connectors

M4 Screws

2. Unscrew the two M4 screws securing the endorsor assembly and lift out
the assembly.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-76 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

3. Unscrew the two M3 screws securing the endorsor board cover and
remove the cover from the endorsor assembly.
4. Unscrew the four M3 screws securing the endorsor board and remove the
board from the endorsor assembly.
5. Remove the ribbon cassette.
6. Unscrew the three M4 screws securing the SLE module and remove the
SLE module from the main plate.

Replacement - Replacement of the Single-Line Endorser is the reverse of

the above procedure. You must check the printhead gap and adjust if neces-
sary. See “ADJUSTMENTS” on page 13.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-77
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

MULTI-LINE ENDORSER
Remove the multi-line endorser as follows:
1. Lift the latch and slide the MLE module fully out of the CPM.
2. Remove the ribbon cassette.
3. Remove the two screws securing the ribbon cable clamp. Cut the cable
ties securing the ribbon cable and the motor cable to the clamp and the
MLE body. Unplug the cables from the MLE connectors.

Screws

4. Push the MLE back into the CPM taking care not to trap the cables.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-78 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

5. Remove the four nuts and lock washers securing the MLE to the sliding
block and lift the MLE out of the CPM.

Replacement - Replacement of the multi-line endorser is the reverse of the

above procedure. Make sure that the latch functions properly.

NOTE: There are no CE adjustments for the MLE.

RAILS (SLIDES)
Remove the rails (slides) as follows:
1. Remove the CPM transport.
2. Remove the multi-pocket module.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-79
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

3. Unscrew the two screws securing the carrier plate to each rail.

Screws

4. Slide the carrier plate until it is released from the tangs on each rail and
lift the carrier plate away from the rails.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-80 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

5. Unscrew the two screws securing each rail to the ATM. To gain access to
the nearest screw, extend the rail fully then push the plastic button on the
centre rail to release the rail. Push the whole rail into the ATM until the
ball-bearing race of the inner rail and centre rail are aligned as shown in
the photograph below. The screw is then accessible through the hole in
the centre rail, behind the inner rail, as shown in the photograph.
Race Alignment

6. Extend each rail fully and pull the rail until it is released from the tangs
on the side of the ATM. Lift each rail away from the ATM.

NOTE: If the rail cannot be pulled easily from the ATM, you may need to
use a mallet or hammer to gently dislodge the rail from the tangs.

Replacement - Replacement of the rails is the reverse of the above proce-

dure. Make sure that the rails function properly.

NOTE: There are no CE adjustments for the rails.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-81
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CLEANING MATERIALS
The following cleaning materials are the only authorized materials for use on
the CPM:
Canned air, 10 oz. - Systemedia Stock No. 526487
Cleaning tissue-wet (pack of 50) - Systemedia Stock No. 523419, NCR
Part No. 484-0051501
Cleaning swab, 6 inch (length) flat plastic with felt cleaning area (pack of
10) - Systemedia Stock No. 523396, NCR Part No. 484-0051295.

SENSORS
Multi-pocket bin sensors should be cleaned at every service call with a soft
brush or compressed air jet. See “SENSORS” on page 5 for the location of the
sensors.

CAMERA
At every service call, clean the front and rear camera lenses using flat felt
covered swabs.

TRANSPORT
At every service call, clean all flat surfaces of transports with wet cleaning
tissues.

VISUAL INSPECTION
At intervals of three months, inspect the transport drive belts for damage,
slackness or wandering.

STRAPPING
None.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-82 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

HISTORY

MODULE: INFEED - CPM4 SHORT

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0094013

MODULE: INFEED - CPM4 MEDIUM

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0091978

MODULE: INFEED - CPM4 LONG

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0091980

MODULE: TOP GUIDE

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0068812

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-83
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

MODULE: CPM4 - SLE

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0093979

MODULE: CPM4 - MLE

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0093980

MODULE: CONTROL ELECTRONICS

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0092823

MODULE: SINGLE-LINE ENDORSER

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0068814

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-84 AUGUST 2005
 iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

MODULE: MULTI-LINE ENDORSER

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0092680

MODULE: MULTI-POCKETS

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0093991

MODULE: POCKET DEFLECTOR WIRE

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
484-0091766

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
AUGUST 2005 26.14-85
iTRAN 1000 ATM CHECK PROCESSOR (TYPE 4)

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.14-86 AUGUST 2005
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

CONTENTS

Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes

Chapter 26.15

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................ 26.15-1

DESCRIPTION................................................................................. 26.15-2
CASSETTE TYPES ....................................................................... 26.15-2
NOTE SENSING............................................................................ 26.15-2
CURRENCY SIZES....................................................................... 26.15-2

BASIC OPERATIONS ..................................................................... 26.15-3

OPENING THE CASSETTE ......................................................... 26.15-3
STAGE OPERATION FOR DEPOSIT CASSETTES................... 26.15-5
STAGE OPERATION FOR RECYCLER CASSETTES .............. 26.15-6
Latching the Note Stage ............................................................... 26.15-7
Unlatching the Note Stage............................................................ 26.15-8
CLOSING THE CASSETTE ....................................................... 26.15-11
CLEANING.................................................................................. 26.15-12

CONFIGURING THE CASSETTE................................................ 26.15-12

SETTING THE NOTE GUIDE CLEARANCE........................... 26.15-13
Cutting the Note Guide Spacers ................................................. 26.15-14
SETTING IDENTIFICATION CODES....................................... 26.15-17
Accessing the Magnets............................................................... 26.15-17
CASSETTE BODY TO LID IDENTIFICATION ....................... 26.15-19
Colour Code Labels.................................................................... 26.15-19
Indelible Ink Marking................................................................. 26.15-19

REPLENISHMENT........................................................................ 26.15-19
PREPARING CURRENCY ......................................................... 26.15-19
Used Currency............................................................................ 26.15-19
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-i
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

New Currency.............................................................................26.15-20
LOADING A CASSETTE............................................................26.15-20
UNLOADING A CASSETTE ......................................................26.15-22

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-ii
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

CONTENTS

Chapter: 26.15

Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes

INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the cassettes used in the NCR Cash Acceptor and
Recycler when installed in NCR ATMs.
It provides operation, configuration and maintenance information and is
intended for use by personnel who unload, load and configure these cassettes.
The information is presented in four sections:
Description - describes the different variations of cassette.
Basic Operations - information on opening, closing, cleaning cassettes
and operating the note stage.
Configuring the Cassette - describes how to set up a cassette for different
currencies.
Replenishment - how to prepare the currency, load it into and unload it
from a cassette.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-1
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

DESCRIPTION
The NCR cash acceptor and recycler cassettes are portable containers
moulded in high impact polycarbonate. They are designed to store and, under
the control of the parent sub-system, release currency.

CASSETTE TYPES
There are two types of cassette, deposit and recycler. Deposit cassettes have a
blue front and recycler cassettes have a grey front.

Deposit Cassette Recycler Cassette

(Blue) (Light Grey)

NOTE SENSING
Both types of cassette have note sensing and will indicate full and empty
conditions to the parent system as appropriate.

CURRENCY SIZES
The cassettes can be mechanically adjusted to hold currency of the following
sizes:
Width (short edge) - 60mm (2.36in.) to 86mm (3.39in.)
Length (long edge) - 120mm (4.72in.) to 182mm (7.17in.).
In addition, electro-mechanical adjustment provides up to sixteen differ-
ent cassette identification codes.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-2
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

BASIC OPERATIONS

OPENING THE CASSETTE

Open the cassette as follows:
1. Place the cassette on a flat surface.
2. Remove the latch seal (if fitted) according to your in house procedures.
3. Unlock the key lock (if fitted) on the cassette lid.

NOTE: The key cannot be removed while the cassette is unlocked.

4. Pull the bottom of the lid latch away from the body of the cassette.

5. Lift the latch up a small amount then pull the top of the latch away from
the cassette.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-3
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

6. Hinge the latch down to free the cassette lid.

7. Raise the lid past the vertical position then unhook it from the metal hinge
lugs at the front of the cassette body. Remove the lid completely from the
cassette body.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-4
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

STAGE OPERATION FOR DEPOSIT CASSETTES

The note stage on the deposit cassettes does not have a latch. The stage must
be pulled back to the rear of the cassette and held in place while removing
currency from the cassette.

WARNING

Make sure that the stage is firmly held in the rear position
while removing currency from the cassette.

Remove currency from the deposit cassette as follows:

1. Place the cassette on a suitable flat surface. Firmly support the rear of the
cassette with one hand.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-5
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

2. Placing your fingers into the stage as shown below, pull it all the way to
the rear of the cassette.

3. Hold the stage at the rear of the cassette whilst removing the currency.

4. When all currency has been removed gently allow the stage to return to
the home position at the front of the cassette.

STAGE OPERATION FOR RECYCLER CASSETTES

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-6
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

Recycler cassettes have a latch to keep the stage at the rear of the cassette
during replenishment.

Note Stage

Note Stage Latch Release

Some early models of the cash acceptor and recycler have recycler cas-
settes that do not have the stage latch. If your recycler cassette is of this type
then operate the stage as defined in Stage Operation for Deposit Cassettes.

Latching the Note Stage

Latch the note stage as follows:
1. Place the cassette on a suitable flat surface. Firmly support the rear of the
cassette with one hand.

2. Placing your fingers into the stage as shown below, pull it all the way to
the rear of the cassette until the stage latch clicks.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-7
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

NOTE: Do not press the stage latch release situated in the stage as this will
prevent the stage from latching correctly.

3. Make sure the latch clicks and the stage is held in the rear position before
removing your hand.

Unlatching the Note Stage

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-8
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

4. Firmly support the rear of the cassette with one hand.

5. Place the thumb of your free hand on the outside rear of the cassette and
take hold of the note stage, placing your fingers into the stage as shown
below. Squeeze slightly to relieve the spring tension on the note stage.

WARNING

Take care not to press the note stage latch release before you
have a firm grip on the stage.

6. While maintaining the hold on the stage press the green stage latch
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-9
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

release with your middle finger.

7. Gently allow the stage to slide to the front of the cassette. If there is cur-
rency in the cassette ensure that it has not been trapped under the stage.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-10
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

CLOSING THE CASSETTE

NOTE: Make sure that the note stage is returned to the home position
before closing the cassette.

1. Holding the lid in a vertical position, hook the front of the lid onto the
metal hinge lugs on the front of the cassette body then close the lid.

2. Lift the latch up and forward toward the cassette.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-11
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

3. Hook the latch over the lid latch block.

4. Pull the latch down and then press towards the cassette body until it clicks
into the locked position.

5. Replace the latch seal (if fitted) according to your in house procedures.
6. Lock the key lock (if fitted) on the cassette lid and remove the key.

NOTE: The key can only be removed when the cassette is locked.

CLEANING
Using a lint-free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol or soap and water,
remove any dust and stubborn marks or grease. Do not use any other cleaning
agents or abrasives.

CONFIGURING THE CASSETTE

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-12
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

This section covers the following topics:

Setting the note guide clearance.
Setting identification codes.
Cassette body to lid identification.

SETTING THE NOTE GUIDE CLEARANCE

The currency width adjustment is made by first establishing the width of the
currency that the cassette is to hold. This measurement is then used to
determine the thickness of spacers located between the note guides and the
cassette lid.

Currency Length

$
Currency
Width

The note guides are not installed when the cassette leaves the factory and
will be packed separately. Have the following parts to hand before starting to
configure the note guide clearance of the cassette.Note
Left Hand Wide
Note Guide (1)
Right Hand Wide
Note Guide (1)

Spacer (9)

Narrow Note Guide (1)

Screw (9)

Screw Plate (9)

NOTE: For the key lock (if fitted), the keys are packaged with the ATM.

The note guide spacers are segmented to provide 17 different thicknesses

depending on where they are cut. After the cut has been made the top part of
the spacer is referred to as spacer part A and the bottom as spacer part B.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-13
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

The following diagram shows the different segment cut numbers and the
distinction between spacer part A and spacer part B.
Spacer Part A

cut 1
cut 2
cut 3
cut 4
cut 5
cut 6
cut 7
cut 8

Spacer Part B
Depending on the thickness required either spacer A or spacer B is used
but never a combination of both A and B. All the spacers should be cut to the
same thickness.
The note guides should be set to accommodate the widest note that is to
be used.

Cutting the Note Guide Spacers

Cut the note guide spacers as follows:
1. First measure the width of the currency that the cassette will handle.
2. Add 3 mm to the measurement for clearance.
3. Refer to the table below to determine where to cut the spacer for the cor-
rect thickness.

Note Spacer Part To

Segment To Resulting Spacer
Measurement Use
Cut Thickness
(Incl. 3mm) A B
88 1 X 2
86 8 X 4
85 2 X 5
83 7 X 7
82 3 X 8
80 6 X 10
79 4 X 11
77 5 X 13
76 5 X 14
74 4 X 16
73 6 X 17
71 3 X 19
70 7 X 20
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-14
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

Note Spacer Part To

Segment To Resulting Spacer
Measurement Use
Cut Thickness
(Incl. 3mm) A B
68 2 X 22
67 8 X 23
65 1 X 25
62 no cut complete spacer 28

4. Cut each spacer at the required segment using a small hacksaw. Remove
any burrs after cutting.
5. Clip each of the nine spacers into the cassette lid by pressing the legs of
the spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-15
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

6. Insert a screw plate between the top two divisions of each of the nine
spacers. Make sure each screw plate is fully inserted and the screw holes
line up.

7. Using a cross-head screwdriver, screw the two wide note guides to the
outermost spacers and the narrow guide to the central spacers using three
screws for each guide.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-16
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

NOTE: The ridged ends of the guides should be at the front of the cassette
lid (the end with the hinge lugs) with the spring guides set centrally.

8. The note guide clearance is now set.

SETTING IDENTIFICATION CODES

The identification code of a cassette is set by up to four magnets in the side of
the cassette.
The positions of the magnets determine the identification code of the cas-
sette. The code allows the module to know which cassette is in which position
and use the correct one for deposit and recycling.

Accessing the Magnets

Access the magnets as follows:
1. Place the cassette on its side as shown below.
2. Release the magnet cover by pressing the two tags from within the cas-
sette.

Magnet Cover

Cover Release Clips

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-17
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

3. Remove the magnet cover. The four magnets and seven magnet posts are
now visible. Counting from the rear of the cassette, the first four posts are
used for setting the code. The last three posts are used for storing the
spare magnets and are not active. Typically a new cassette will be factory
configured as shown below with the code set to one.

Active Posts Storage Posts

4. The magnets should be placed with the white side facing away from the
cassette. The white end should be facing towards the top of the cassette.
To set the ID code, place the magnets in the posts as detailed in the
following table.

Cassette
Post 1 Post 2 Post 3 Post 4
ID Code
0
1 X
2 X
3 X X
4 X
5 X X
6 X X
7 X X X
8 X
9 X X
10 X X
11 X X X
12 X X
13 X X X
14 X X X
15 X X X X

5. Once the cassette is configured replace the magnet cover. The top of the

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-18
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

magnets should be visible between the magnet cover and the side of the
cassette.

CASSETTE BODY TO LID IDENTIFICATION

Once the cassette has been configured, it is advisable that the body and lid are
visually identified to avoid a mismatch of bodies and lids.
The following methods are recommendations only. You may however use
other methods according to in-house procedures.

Colour Code Labels

Each configuration is allotted a colour code. By attaching a label of that
colour to both body and lid, the matching body and lid can be identified.

Indelible Ink Marking

The cassette can be identified by writing the configuration on the inside or
outside of both the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen.

REPLENISHMENT

PREPARING CURRENCY
Before loading the currency into a recycler cassette it must be prepared as
described in the following sections.

Used Currency
Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100
notes in one hand and separating out with the other. While separating out, the
currency should be checked for obvious defects such as:
Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency.
Staples, pins or any foreign matter attached to the currency.
Torn or limp notes with pin holes.
Two or more notes stuck to each other.
Corner folds (straighten as required).
Folded notes.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-19
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

New Currency
New or un-circulated currency should be separated (fanned) out several times
before loading into the cassette. Any notes considered to be unacceptable
should be removed.
The packaging of new currency can cause it to be set into a bow shape.
This bow shape may be either across the length or the width of the notes and
may cause the notes to jam in the module.
It is recommended that these notes should be processed through a count-
ing machine where possible. If this is not possible then the notes should be
manually fanned and flattened several times. If the bow persists follow the
instructions given in the section Loading A Cassette for notes that are
deformed in this way.

NOTE: Bad currency preparation may impair the performance of the mod-
ule.

LOADING A CASSETTE
Load a cassette as follows:
1. Open the cassette.
2. Slide the note stage all the way to the rear of the cassette until it latches.
3. Align the edges of the notes in both planes by holding a bundle loosely
between the fingers and thumbs of both hands and tapping lightly on a

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-20
 CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

flat surface, then tapping the note ends.

4. Raise the front of the cassette to ease loading. For example, stand the cas-
sette at an angle against a wall.
5. Load the notes into the cassette.

NOTE: 1. For notes bowed along their length, load the cassette with alter-
nate packs/bundles of 100 notes as shown, and make sure that any bowed
notes are loaded with the bow towards the stage.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-21
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER CASSETTES

NOTE: 2. For notes bowed across their width, load the cassette with alter-
nate bundles of 100 notes as shown, and make sure that the bow is point-
ing away from the stage.

6. Continue until the required amount is loaded.

7. Release the stage and allow it and the note stack to slide upwards until the
currency stack touches the front support.
8. Lay the cassette back flat on its base. The currency should now remain
between the front support and the stage in an upright position.
9. Close the cassette.

UNLOADING A CASSETTE
Unloading a cassette is a reversal of the loading procedure. Refer to Basic
Operations for details of cassette opening, closing and note stage operation.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.15-22
 COIN DISPENSER

CONTENTS

Coin Dispenser

Chapter 26.16

DESCRIPTION................................................................................. 26.16-1
POWER REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 26.16-2
CURRENCY SET .......................................................................... 26.16-2
Column Assignment .................................................................... 26.16-3
HOPPER EMPTY SWITCHES ..................................................... 26.16-3
CANISTER DETECT MICROSWITCH ....................................... 26.16-3
COIN SOLENOIDS ....................................................................... 26.16-4
COIN CHUTE ................................................................................ 26.16-4

CONFIGURING THE COIN DISPENSER MODULE ................... 26.16-5

HOPPER CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 26.16-5
Low Coin Detection ..................................................................... 26.16-5
Empty Coin Hopper Detection..................................................... 26.16-6
MECHANISM THRESHOLDS..................................................... 26.16-6
CASSETTE (CANISTER) THRESHOLDS .................................. 26.16-6
ENTERING CONFIGURATION VALUES.................................. 26.16-7
Mechanism Thresholds Menu ...................................................... 26.16-9
Cassette Thresholds Menu ......................................................... 26.16-10

FIRMWARE VERSION................................................................. 26.16-11

COIN DISPENSER SELF TEST.................................................... 26.16-11

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................. 26.16-12

CLEAR COMMAND................................................................... 26.16-12
DISPENSE TEST ......................................................................... 26.16-12
DISPENSER STATUS................................................................. 26.16-12
RS232 TURNAROUND .............................................................. 26.16-12
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-i
 COIN DISPENSER

TAMPER INDICATOR STATUS ...............................................26.16-13

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS..............................................................26.16-13
S_DATA .......................................................................................26.16-13
TALLIES ......................................................................................26.16-13

MODULE REPLACEMENT..........................................................26.16-15

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..................................................26.16-16

STRAPPING ...................................................................................26.16-16

HISTORY........................................................................................26.16-17
MODULE: COIN..........................................................................26.16-17
MODULE: CCTALK INTERFACE BOARD .............................26.16-17
MODULE: MEI FOR UX PRODUCTS.......................................26.16-17
MODULE: COIN DISPENSER HARNESS ................................26.16-17

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-ii
 COIN DISPENSER

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.16

Coin Dispenser

DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the coin dispenser used in the 66XX ATMs. The
module is mounted in a lockable box attached to the side of the ATM. The
coin chute turns into the top-box of the ATM and then out through the facia to
the coin bowl.

Coin Canister

CCTalk Interface Board

Coin Dispenser

The coin dispenser is capable of:

Dispensing coins on demand from an eight-column coin canister
Reading and clearing counts of coins dispensed
Reporting a low coin condition in each coin column
Reporting a no coin condition in each coin column
Detecting a coin jam in the coin delivery chute.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-1
 COIN DISPENSER

NOTE: 1. The divisions in the coin canister that hold the columns of coins
are referred to in diagnostics as hoppers.

NOTE: 2. The coin canister is referred to as a cassette in the threshold entry

screens.

POWER REQUIREMENTS
+24Vdc is supplied by the ATM to the CCTalk PCB mounted near the coin
dispenser. The CCTalk PCB generates +24 Vdc and +34 Vdc outputs which
are required by the coin dispenser.
Current:
+24 Vdc - 0.02 Amp
+34 Vdc - 1.1 Amp

CURRENCY SET
The denomination and capacity of the columns are as follows:

No. of Cumulative
Denomination
Columns No. of Coins
US Dollars:
1 cent (P) 3 531
5 cent (N) 1 138
10 cent (D) 2 402
25 cent (Q) 2 306
Total value 128.91 dollars
Euro:
1c 1 159
2c 1 157
5c 1 156
10c 1 135
20c 1 122
50c 1 109
1E 1 113
2E 1 123
Total value 409.93Euros

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-2
 COIN DISPENSER

Column Assignment

Left<-------------------------------Columns----------------------------------->Right
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
US Dollar 25c 10c 1c 1c 1c 5c 10c 25c
Euro 2E 1c 20c 5c 10c 1E 2c 50c

HOPPER EMPTY SWITCHES

A Hopper Empty microswitch for each coin hopper is fitted on the coin
dispenser, as shown in the following illustration. When the column of coins in
a hopper drops to a low level the microswitch is activated and a Hopper
Empty alarm condition is initiated.

Hopper Empty Switch

NOTE: A Hopper Empty condition is also initiated by the software count-

ing coins dispensed. The Hopper empty switches serve as a backup to the
software, initiating a Hopper Empty alarm on low, even when the hopper
was not full on canister replacement (refer to ‘Configuring the Coin Dis-
penser Module’).

CANISTER DETECT MICROSWITCH

A microswitch in the canister slot of the coin dispenser detects the presence or
absence of the coin canister. This switch is wired so that if the canister is
removed, a Cassette Removed signal is generated by the control system.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-3
 COIN DISPENSER

COIN SOLENOIDS
Solenoid operated actuators located beneath the hopper empty switches flick
coins from the bottom of each hopper, into the coin chute.

COIN CHUTE
Coins dispensed from the coin canister are fed via the coin chute to the coin
bowl on the ATM facia. A triple infra-red detector is fitted to the end of the
chute to detect any coin jams in the chute, as shown below. Jam events are
signalled to the control system, resulting in an error message being displayed.

Triple Infra-Red
Detectors

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-4
 COIN DISPENSER

CONFIGURING THE COIN DISPENSER MODULE

HOPPER CONFIGURATION
The Self Service Configuration Menu for the Coin Dispenser Module enables
adjustment of the Low Level (Threshold 1) and Empty Level (Threshold 2)
for individual hoppers of the coin canister.
The default values are shown in the table below:

Hopper
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
US Dollars:
Coin Value 25c (Q) 10c (D) 1c (P) 1c (P) 1c (P) 5c (N) 10c (D) 25c (Q)
Threshold 1 137 179 159 159 159 124 179 137
Threshold 2 153 201 177 177 177 138 201 153
Euro:
Coin Value 2E 1c 20c 5c 10c 1E 2c 50c
Threshold 1 110 143 109 140 121 101 141 97
Threshold 2 123 159 122 156 135 113 157 109

Low Coin Detection

A Coin Low response to a Dispense command is initiated when the number of
coins dispensed from any hopper, since the canister was filled, is equal to the
value of Threshold 1.
When a hopper is defined as Coin Low, a dispense operation will be exe-
cuted only if the number of coins currently in the hopper exceeds the number
of coins requested. If the number cannot be satisfied, a response of Coin
Empty will be initiated for that command. Further commands may succeed if
coins are available to meet the request.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-5
 COIN DISPENSER

Empty Coin Hopper Detection

A Coin Empty response to a Dispense command is initiated when the number
of coins dispensed from any hopper since the canister was filled, is equal to
the value set for Threshold 2. By default, this value is set to the maximum
number of coins for each hopper.

NOTE: Threshold 1 and Threshold 2 determine the coins remaining in the

hopper by subtracting the number of coins dispensed since the canister
was last replenished. Therefore, it is essential that all hoppers in the coin
canister are full when the canister is replenished and the Module reset
(see also, ‘Hopper Empty Switches’).

MECHANISM THRESHOLDS
There are two mechanism thresholds: Coin Jam and Coin Block:
A Coin Jam occurs when the exit sensor does not go clear at the end of a
dispense. The threshold sets the number of transport jams that must occur
consecutively before an SOH is raised.
Coin Block is defined as the exit sensor being blocked at the start of a dis-
pense. The threshold sets the number of transport jams that must occur
before a block status is returned.
The default value for both of these thresholds is 1.

CASSETTE (CANISTER) THRESHOLDS

There are two cassette thresholds, Cassette Low and Cassette Empty:
The Cassette Low threshold sets the number of coin columns (hoppers) in
a canister that may report low before the whole canister is reported as
low.
The Cassette Empty threshold sets the number of coin columns (hoppers)
in a canister that may report empty before the whole canister is reported
as empty.
The default value of both of these thresholds is 1.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-6
 COIN DISPENSER

ENTERING CONFIGURATION VALUES

The coin dispenser configuration menu is reached by setting the ATM to
Supervisor mode, selecting Self-Service Configuration, and selecting the Coin
Dispenser option from the Set Device Configuration Menu. A screen similar
to the following will be displayed:

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-7
 COIN DISPENSER

Hopper Configuration Menu

Selecting the Hopper Configuration option displays a screen similar to the
following:

Enter the hopper threshold values as follows:

1. Use the TAB key to select a hopper and enter a Low Threshold value for
currency to be loaded in the hopper.
2. Select PAGE DOWN to set the Empty Threshold values for the specific
currency.
3. When all threshold values have been set, press OK to start the validation
process and return to the Coin Dispenser menu. (Pressing DEFAULT will
return the Low and Empty Threshold values to those held in the registry.).

NOTE: If any parameters do not contain valid values, a prompt is displayed

indicating the valid range of values. Each invalid parameter is marked
with an ‘X’.

4. Return the ATM to Normal mode.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-8
 COIN DISPENSER

Mechanism Thresholds Menu

Selecting the Mechanism Thresholds option displays a screen similar to the
following:

Enter the mechanism threshold values as follows:

1. Enter a Coin Jam Threshold and Coin Block Threshold to a value
between 1 and 10.
2. When the threshold values have been set, press OK to start the validation
process and return to the Coin Dispenser menu. (Pressing DEFAULT will
return the Threshold values to those held in the registry.).

NOTE: If any parameters do not contain valid values, a prompt is displayed

indicating the valid range of values. Each invalid parameter is marked
with an ‘X’.

3. Return the ATM to Normal mode.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-9
 COIN DISPENSER

Cassette Thresholds Menu

Selecting the Cassette Thresholds option displays a screen similar to the
following:

Enter the cassette threshold values as follows:

1. Enter a Cassette Low Threshold and Cassette Empty Threshold to a value
between 1 and 8.
2. When the threshold values have been set, press OK to start the validation
process and return to the Coin Dispenser menu. (Pressing DEFAULT will
return the Threshold values to those held in the registry.).

NOTE: If any parameters do not contain valid values, a prompt is displayed

indicating the valid range of values. Each invalid parameter is marked
with an ‘X’.

3. Return the ATM to Normal mode.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-10
 COIN DISPENSER

FIRMWARE VERSION
Selecting the Firmware Version option displays a screen similar to the
following:

1. Select Previous to return to the Coin Dispenser menu.

2. Return the ATM to Normal mode.

COIN DISPENSER SELF TEST

The Coin Dispenser Module will carry out a self test on demand by selecting
Device Self Test from the System Application Menu and Coin Dispenser from
the Device Self Test Menu. When the Run Tests button is selected, either
individually or in conjunction with other Self Tests, the Coin Dispenser
Module will dispense one coin from each of the eight coin hoppers.
On completion of the self test, the result is displayed on a summary
report.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-11
 COIN DISPENSER

LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTICS
The diagnostics menu enables selection of the following functions:
CLEAR
DISPENSE
DISPENSE STATUS
RS232 TURNAROUND
TAMPER INDICTAOR STATUS

CLEAR COMMAND
Selecting CLEAR from the Coin Dispenser menu clears all counters and flags
related to previously detected malfunctions, clears the severity and re-
initialises the Coin Dispenser.

DISPENSE TEST
Selecting DISPENSE from the Coin Dispenser menu prompts the user for the
number of coins to be dispensed from the eight hoppers (columns) of the coin
canister. Valid values are between 0 and 25. Refer to ‘Column Assignment’ on
page 3 for the predetermined currency set.
Entering the number of coins to be dispensed from each hopper will dis-
pense the coin denominations shown in the table for each hopper. For exam-
ple, for a US Dollar canister, setting hoppers 1 to 8 to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 will
dispense 9 quarters, 9 dimes, 6 nickels and 12 cents, for a total of 36 coins
($3.57).
Entering an invalid number of coins will display an error message, then
return to the Dispense Menu.

NOTE: When looping is ON, the values entered in the Coin Dispense menu
are prompted for on the first iteration only.

When the coins have been dispensed, a status report is displayed.

DISPENSER STATUS
Selecting DISPENSER STATUS from the Coin Dispenser menu will display
the status of the Coin Dispenser.

RS232 TURNAROUND
Selecting RS232 TURNAROUND from the Coin Dispenser menu performs a
turnaround test on the serial port. The purpose of the test is to verify that the
RS232 serial communication channel is operating correctly. A turnaround
plug (NCR Part No. 445-0596290) must be fitted to the Globetek Connector E
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-12
 COIN DISPENSER

of the ATM, prior to execution of the test.

When the test has been completed a report is displayed.

TAMPER INDICATOR STATUS

Selecting TAMPER INDICATOR STATUS from the Coin Dispenser menu
displays the status of the coin dispenser tamper indicator.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the Coin Dispenser are:

S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the Coin Dispenser are:

S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD. (Operation Successful, Coin Low, Turnaround Error).
03 SUSPEND. (Transport blocked).
04 FATAL. Comms. failure, Coin empty, Hopper jam, Transport jam,
Tamper detected, Not cleared, Cassette missing, Device inoperative).

TALLIES
The tallies recorded for the Coin Dispenser are:

Tally
Meaning
Mnemonic
HOP1_OPS Hopper 1 Dispense Operations
HOP1_JAM Hopper 1 Dispense Jams
HOP2_OPS Hopper 2 Dispense Operations
HOP2 _JAM Hopper 2 Dispense Jams
HOP3_OPS Hopper 3 Dispense Operations
HOP3_JAM Hopper 3 Dispense Jams
HOP4_OPS Hopper 4 Dispense Operations
HOP4_JAM Hopper 4 Dispense Jams
HOP5_OPS Hopper 5 Dispense Operations
HOP5_JAM Hopper 5 Dispense Jams
HOP6_OPS Hopper 6 Dispense Operations
HOP6_JAM Hopper 6 Dispense Jams
HOP7_OPS Hopper 7 Dispense Operations
HOP7_JAM Hopper 7 Dispense Jams
HOP8_OPS Hopper 8 Dispense Operations
HOP8_JAM Hopper 8 Dispense Jams

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-13
 COIN DISPENSER

Tally
Meaning
Mnemonic
TRANSJAM Transport Jams
COMMSOPS Communications Operations
COMMSRET Communications Retries
COMMFAIL Communications Failures
ALL_JAMS Coin Transport Jams
TRANBLOK Coin Transport Blockages
LOWSTRIG Coin Cassette Low Sensor Triggers

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-14
 COIN DISPENSER

MODULE REPLACEMENT
If the coin module is replaced, the top-box chute may need to be adjusted to
align the chute with the coin module guide. Align the chute as follows:
1. Loosen the two M3 x 6 thread-forming screws on the top-box chute.

2. Adjust the top-box chute to align with the coin module guide.

3. Tighten the two M3 x 6 thread-forming screws.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-15
 COIN DISPENSER

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
At every service call, check for any foreign matter in the coin bowl on the
facia, and further up the chute. Use a probe such as an unsharpened pencil, to
dislodge and remove any blockage.

At intervals of three months, clean the coin dispenser with mild detergent
on a damp cloth.

STRAPPING
None.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-16
 COIN DISPENSER

HISTORY

MODULE: COIN

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0020825

MODULE: CCTALK INTERFACE BOARD

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
497-0414376

MODULE: MEI FOR UX PRODUCTS

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0019545

MODULE: COIN DISPENSER HARNESS

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
445-0682928

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-17
 COIN DISPENSER

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.16-18
 GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

CONTENTS

Graphical Operator Panel

Chapter 26.18

DESCRIPTION................................................................................. 26.18-1

CONNECTORS AND CABLES ...................................................... 26.18-2

STRAPPING ..................................................................................... 26.18-2

ADJUSTMENTS .............................................................................. 26.18-3

CALIBRATING THE PANEL....................................................... 26.18-3
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY PARAMETERS..................................... 26.18-3

MODULE REPLACEMENT ........................................................... 26.18-4

GRAPHICS CARD ........................................................................ 26.18-4
GOP ASSEMBLY .......................................................................... 26.18-4

TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................... 26.18-5
STATUS INDICATORS ................................................................ 26.18-5
FAULT FINDING .......................................................................... 26.18-5

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 26.18-8

HISTORY ......................................................................................... 26.18-8

MODULE: GOP ASSEMBLY WITH NCR LOGO ...................... 26.18-8
MODULE: GOP ASSEMBLY WITH FUJITSU LOGO............... 26.18-8
MODULE: GOP PCI GRAPHICS CARD ..................................... 26.18-8
MODULE: CABLE ASSEMBLY - USB TYPE A TO TYPE B... 26.18-9
MODULE: CABLE ASSEMBLY - HARNESS GOP POWER .... 26.18-9
MODULE: CABLE ASSEMBLY - DVI-D SINGLE LINK (4m) 26.18-9

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-i
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-ii
 GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

CONTENTS

Chapter 26.18

Graphical Operator Panel

DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the graphical operator panel (GOP) and provides
configuration and maintenance information.
The graphical operator panel is a high-resolution LCD with an integral
resistive touchscreen. It displays 262,144 colours (6 bits/colour) and will auto-
matically scale SVGA and XGA formats to fill the entire viewable area. The
panel is capable of displaying text, graphics and full motion video, supplied
via a DVI-D input.

Normal

Supervisor

The operator panel allows users to access System Application and other
applications such as FLM App, which provides replenishment instructions via
text and video leadthrough. Typical tasks performed using the panel are sys-
tem configuration, error reporting, fault diagnosis and replenishment.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-1
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

CONNECTORS AND CABLES

The GOP is powered via the ATM power supply, and is also connected to
the PC core by a USB cable (type B to type A port), and by a DVI-D cable for
video input. Shown below are the cable connections point on the top rear of
the panel (viewed from above), and the DVI-D cable at the PC.

USB
DVI-D Power

For details of cables and pin-outs, refer to chapter 26.10 in this manual.

STRAPPING
None.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-2
 GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

ADJUSTMENTS

CALIBRATING THE PANEL

1. From the System Application Main Menu select the option Self-Service
Configuration.
2. Select Set Device Configuration.
3. Select USBGOP to perform the calibration test.
4. A touchscreen target will appear four times. Press the target each time,
then repeat the test when prompted to confirm the calibration.
The test can be carried out on the GOP or with the application transferred to
the front interface. You will have 90 seconds to perform the test on the rear
panel and 300 seconds to perform the test on the front of the ATM.

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY PARAMETERS

The display parameters can be adjusted via 4 push buttons on the rear of the
panel. The buttons are recessed and only accessible using a small diameter
screwdriver or similar implement. The buttons are, from left to right when
viewed from the rear: Down, Up, Select and Menu.
Press the menu button to display the OSD (on-screen display) menu. Use
the Up (+) and Down (-) buttons to navigate within the menu, and the Select
button to choose from the options. The + and - buttons also modify selected
values, such as the brightness. Press the menu button again to exit from
menus.
Menu Function
Picture Brightness
Contrast
Horizontal position
Vertical position
Advanced Color temperature (‘whiteness’)
Sharpness
OSD OSD timeout
OSD position
OSD horizontal position
OSD vertical position
Option Factory reset
OSD language
Display mode

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-3
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

MODULE REPLACEMENT
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of Field
Replaceable Units of the Graphical Operator Panel. The replacement
procedures are:
Removal and replacement of the graphics card
Removal and replacement of the GOP assembly.

GRAPHICS CARD
The graphics card is a slot-in card, located in the PC core as indicated by the
DVI-D cable in the following illustration.

GOP ASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect the power, DVI and USB cables from the top rear of the panel
(accessible via the gap in the rear of the panel mounting bracket).
2. Loosen the four M4 screws securing the panel to the mounting bracket.
3. Slide the screws up and out of the mushroom slots.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-4
 GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

TROUBLESHOOTING
The GOP has no power switch or user-accessible reset switch, so assuming
there is power to the panel, the display should operate.

STATUS INDICATORS
The following table explains the status of the panel indicated by the bi-
colour Video LED visible on the GOP front housing and the ‘Searching Dig-
ital’ icon displayed on the LCD

‘Searching
Video Indicator Meaning
Digital’
Green Displayed DVI video to the panel has ceased. The
GOP will enter sleep mode in
approximately one minute if DVI is not
restored.
Amber Displayed GOP has been powered up and no DVI
signals are present. GOP will enter sleep
mode in approximately one minute if DVI
is not found

Green -- DVI video detected. LCD display should

be active.
Amber -- DVI video is not detected. LCD may be
inactive or displaying a ‘Searching
Digital’ message.

FAULT FINDING

Symptom(s) Possible Cause Action

No display image and No power. Verify 24V available to
video LED not lit. the GOP.
Cable connector not Verify cable housing
seated correctly. fully seated into
connector on GOP.
Internal fuse blown. Replace graphics card.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-5
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

Symptom(s) Possible Cause Action

No display image but Inverter cable or Replace GOP assembly.
video LED is green. backlight inverter
cable faulty.
Display backlight Inspect cabling and LCD
faulty. display. Replace faulty
item.
No display image but No DVI video Check DVI cable and
video LED is amber. present to GOP. PC.
Cycling GOP power
displays ‘Searching
Digital’.
No display image but Image processor Replace graphics card.
video LED is amber. crashed.
Cycling GOP power
restores image.
Non-uniform or dim Defective LCD Replace GOP assembly.
display image display.
Display image distorted PC display properties Reset PC colour pallet
or mis-framed. settings and resolution.
Faulty LCD display. Replace GOP assembly.

Faulty video Replace graphics card.

processor board.
Partial or malfunctioning Faulty LCD display. Replace GOP assembly.
columns or rows.
Display image is ‘noisy’ Cable connector not Reseat or replace DVI
but ‘Searching Digital’ seated correctly. video cable.
image is clean. PC video card Repair or replace PC.
damaged.
Display image and LCD cable or display Replace GOP assembly.
‘Searching Digital’ image faulty.
are ‘noisy’. Video processor Replace graphics card.
board faulty.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-6
 GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

Symptom(s) Possible Cause Action

Display shows ‘Out of PC video resolution Reset video resolution to
Range’ error message. set too high. XGA or lower.
Video LED dark but Faulty video LED. Replace graphics card.
display image OK.
White screen. LCD cable or display Replace GOP assembly.
faulty.
Video processor Replace graphics card.
board faulty.
No response. Faulty host PC. Inspect, repair or replace
PC.
USB cable not con- Connect or replace USB
nected or faulty. cable.
Faulty touchscreen Replace graphics card.
controller.
Faulty touchscreen. Replace GOP assembly.

Intermittent operation. USB cable not con- Connect or replace USB

nected or faulty. cable.
Faulty touchscreen Replace graphics card.
controller.
Faulty USB port on Repair or replace PC.
PC.
Can’t move cursor to Calibration not set. Run touchscreen calibra-
edges of screen. tion.
Cursor movement doesn’t Faulty touchscreen or Replace GOP assembly.
match direction of input. touchscreen cable.
Faulty touchscreen Replace graphics card.
controller.

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-7
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Ensure the power to the GOP is disconnected, then wipe the screen gently
with a clean, lint-free cloth to remove dust and other particles. Avoid
scratching the panel. If required, first spray glass cleaner onto the cloth.

CAUTION

Do not pour or spray liquid of any kind directly onto the

panel.

HISTORY

MODULE: GOP ASSEMBLY WITH NCR LOGO

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
445-0683552

MODULE: GOP ASSEMBLY WITH FUJITSU LOGO

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
445-0683553

MODULE: GOP PCI GRAPHICS CARD

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0020044

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-8
 GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number

MODULE: CABLE ASSEMBLY - USB TYPE A TO TYPE B

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0018826

MODULE: CABLE ASSEMBLY - HARNESS GOP POWER

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
445-0683201

MODULE: CABLE ASSEMBLY - DVI-D SINGLE LINK (4m)

Old Part New Part Change

Interchangeability Comments
Number Number Number
009-0020419

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-9
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
26.18-10
CUT

User Feedback Form

Book. Title: NCR Personas M-Series ATMs
Field Service Manual

Book No.: B006-6488-C000 Date: AUGUST 2005

NCR welcomes your feedback on this publication. Your comments can be
of great value in helping us to improve our information products.

You may send your comments, electronically, to the Information

Solutions Department in Dundee, Scotland . See over for details.

Circle the numbers below that best represent your opinion of this publica-
tion.

Ease of use 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 = Excellent

Accuracy 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 = Good
Clarity 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 = Adequate
Completeness 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 = Fair
Organization 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 = Poor
Appearance 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 = Not Applicable
Examples 5 4 3 2 1 0
Illustrations 5 4 3 2 1 0
Job performance 5 4 3 2 1 0
Question resolution 5 4 3 2 1 0
Overall satisfaction 5 4 3 2 1 0

Indicate the ways you feel we could improve this publication.

❑ Improve the table of contents ❑ Add more/better quick reference aids

❑ Improve the overview/introduction ❑ Add more examples

❑ Improve the organization ❑ Add more illustrations

❑ Improve the index ❑ Add more step-by-step procedures

❑ Make it less technical ❑ Add more troubleshooting information

❑ Make it more concise/brief ❑ Add more details

CUT
 CUT
Write any comments you may have below. Please include page numbers where ap-
plicable.

FOLD

You can use the following address to send your comments to the
Information Solutions Department at Dundee:
e-mail - [email protected]

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please fill in the

information below:
Name:
Organisation:
Company:
Address:

Telephone: Fax:

Thank you for your evaluation of this publication. Fold the form where
indicated, tape (please do not staple), affix stamp and drop in the mail.

FOLD

Affix
Postage
Stamp
Here

NCR Financial Solutions Group Ltd.

Information Solutions Department
Discovery Centre
3 Fulton Road
Dundee
Scotland
DD2 4SW
CUT